Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutCONTRACT DOCUMENTS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FY 2021 LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION WATERLOO, IA CONTRACT NO. 983 City of Waterloo Waterloo, Iowa \\‘\i\`t I hereby certify that this engineering document was -ytit, D. G'q It, and prepared I by duty licensed P rrry of direct personal supervision seer �lv v�� 0 Soft/, under the laws of the State of Iowa. es 12670 frr w s /p W A Gam" Steven D.Larson,PE Date 1114t�1QNAL �G� Iowa License Number 12870 ` My license renewal date is December 31,2020 • Pages or sheets covered by this seal: / Z./ 2$56'Z 3 a _ .-\\\\\\\" t hereby certify that this engineering document was S.�q,�tt plq �that I by�a duly licensed Prof direct personal Engineer swervision ®O t poOp tilt` der the .f the State of Iowa. p 21299 } ►��� S1gnature Date ,r�/lrllr,ss ,ow,„ ��, � Donald S.Moore.PS 1i 4!ONAL — Iowa License Number 21299 My I c•nse renewal date Is December 31,2021 1 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Lt` S 1 \‘\\ I hereby certify that this engineering document was c o �1NI 11 prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision CEN q 1111 and that i am a duly licensed Professional Engineer oP 1 SFo (��11t, under the laws of the State of Iowa. 0 Tr d)1% `� 19579 �! /643-Z020 'r,11O Gi Signature Date I /p W p Cj,• Adam C.Daters,PE Iilllh /ONAL �� Iowa License Number 19579 My license renewal date is December 31,2020 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: ,4u_ GTHEf2. PAvES Prepared By: Copyright 2020, Clapsaddle-Garber Associates, Inc. Clapsaddle-Garber Associates, Inc. All Rights Reserved Consulting Engineers Clapsaddle-Garber Associates, Inc. 5106 Nordic Drive•Cedar Falls, Iowa 50613•Telephone 641-752-6701 •Fax 641-752-2849 Toll Free 800-542-7981 •www.cgaconsultants.com ITY ATERLo • f .-- L` -a Municipal Biddingand COVID - 19 ter,00 , The Waterloo City Clerk's Office is committed to balancing the important role municipal bidding plays —° in the local economy with ensuring the safety of city staff as COVID-19 cases spread through Iowa. We encourage prospective bidders to follow the guidelines below for submitting bids while public access to City Hall is limited and the City Clerk's Office is closed to the public. 1. We strongly recommend all bidders submit bids by mail, Fed-Ex, or UPS prior to the bid deadline. Bids should be mailed to the following address: City Clerk's Office 715 Mulberry Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Please note on the envelope which project you are bidding on. 2. Contractors wishing to deliver a bid in person while public access to City Hall is limited should call the City Clerk's Office at 319-291-4323 prior to dropping off a bid in person. In the event another city department receives a bid, employees will work to ensure it arrives at the correct location prior to the bid opening. Bids delivered to a department other than City Clerk's Office will be accepted if received prior to the deadline listed in the notice. 3. All bids received will be initialed and the time received recorded, in accordance with Iowa public bidding laws. 4. Bid openings will be held in the Harold E. Getty Council Chambers on the second floor of City Hall until public access to City Hall changes. The bid openings will be livestreamed on YouTube and made available on the city website. 5. Contractors or the public may request copies of opened bids by calling the City Clerk's Office at 319-291-4323 or emailing clerk a(�aterloo-ia.orq. Received bids are made available on the Document Center page of the city website after the bid opening at the following link: http•//www cityofwaterlooiowa.com/government/ci d©cumentsearch/index.php 6. Please direct questions about this process to the City Clerk's Office at 319-291-4323. FY 2021 ',LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION PROJECT NO. 5623 WATERLOO, IOWA CONTRACT NO. 983 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS ITEM 1. NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING 2. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 3. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4. FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL 5. SALES TAX EXEMPTION INFORMATION FORM 6. FORM OF BID BOND 7. NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVITS 8. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE 9. TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS 10. BIDDER STATUS FORM 11. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM 12. POTENTIAL ITEMS OF WORK FOR MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION A. SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM, B. LETTER FORM FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES(CCO-3) C. MEE/WBE SCOPE LETTER(CCO-4A) D. MBE AND/OR WBE PREBID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM(CCO-4) E. MBE/WBE LETTER OF INTENT TO BID(CCO-5) 13. WATERLOO/CEDAR FALLS MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESSES ENTERPRISE CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR'S GUIDE 14. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS 15. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS 16. SPECIAL PROVISIONS 17. SUPPLEMENTAL SUDAS SPECIFICATIONS 18. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 19. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONS 20. SUPPLEMENTAL LIFT STATION SPECIFICATIONS 21. GEOTECHN CAL REPORT 22. FORM OF CONTRACT 23. FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND 24. FORM OF PAYMENT BOND TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTRACT 983 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING On Proposed Plans, Specifications, Form of Contract, And Estimate of Cost For the FY 2021 LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION In the City of Waterloo, Iowa CONTRACT NO. 983 RECEIVING OF BIDS PLEASE SEE INSERT REGARDING MUNICIPAL BIDDING AND COVID-19. Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, at her office in the City Hall of the said City on the 19th day of November until 1:00 p.m. for the construction of the FY 2021 LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION, Contract 983 as described in detail in the plans and specifications now on file in the Office of the City Clerk. OPENING OF BIDS PLEASE SEE INSERT REGARDING MUNICIPAL BIDDING AND COVID-19. All proposals received will be opened in the First Floor Conference Room at City Hall, in the City of Waterloo, Iowa, on the 19th day of November at 1:00 p.m., and the proposals will be acted upon at such later time and place as may then be fixed by the City Council. PUBLIC HEARING Notice is hereby given that the Council of said City will conduct a public hearing on the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-described improvement project at 5:30 p.m. on November 23rd, 2020, said hearing to be held in the Harold E. Getty Council Chambers in City Hall - in said City. The proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for said improvements heretofore prepared by the City Engineering Department are now on file in the office of the City Clerk for public examination, and any person interested therein may file written objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto at the meeting above set forth. The City of Waterloo will continue to hold City Council meetings as scheduled, however in response to COVID-19, elected officials and city staff will participate via videoconferencing with elected officials and city staff dialing in to the meeting to participate. The public is invited to speak on public hearing items in the following ways. Call the City Clerk's Office at 319-291-4323 by 4:45 p.m. to obtain conference call information. Alternatively, you may email your comments to -ornme_is v a erl o-ia.c=g and they will be read during the public hearing. Please state the public hearing item on which you wish to speak. Members of the public may also attend the meeting in person but will be strongly encouraged to wear a mask and practice social distancing. The NOTICE TO BIDDERS can be viewed at the following locations: 1) City of Waterloo web site at httplici.waterloo.ias/ 2) Plan rooms: 1-1 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING CONTRACT NO. 983 Master Builders of Iowa 221 Park Street, PO Box 695 Des Moines, IA 50303 McGraw Hill Construction Dodge 3315 Central Ave. Hot Springs, AR 71913 Reed Construction Data 30 Technology Parkway South, Ste. 500 Norcross, GA 30092 Plan Room Web sites: Master Builders of Iowa web site at www.nnbionline.com Dodge Lead web site: http://dodgeprojects.construction.com/ Reed Const. Data Lead web site: http://www.cmdgroup.com/project-leads/ SCOPE OF WORK The work involved in this project consists of; all site work to include grubbing, excavation, installing of all below grade structures and connective piping, valves, meter, quick disconnect, lift station pump rails, shoes, pumps, level sensors, access doors, pump lift, CMU electrical control building and all electrical equipment such as; generator, ATS, 440 switch gear panels and breakers, 100 amp panel and breakers, pump control panels with SCADA panel, interior and exterior outlets and building and site lighting and appurtenances. All excavation, backfill and any dewatering required during construction. Construction of lift station site access drive and site embankment. Construction of access drive, aggregate access drive and aggregate site cover. Site fencing and swing gates with locking capability. Site grading with local borrow. All areas not aggregate covered shall be seeded and mulched. Site power supply work (By others) shall be coordinated to keep project on schedule. Published pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 26 of the City Code of Iowa and upon order to the City Council of said Waterloo, Iowa, on the day of CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA BY: Kelley Felchle City Clerk 1-2 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING CONTRACT NO. 983 NOTICE TO BIDDERS For the Taking of Construction Bids for the FY 2021 LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION In the City of Waterloo, Iowa CONTRACT NO. 983 RECEIVING OF BIDS PLEASE SEE INSERT REGARDING MUNICIPAL BIDDING AND COVID-19. Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, at her office in the City Hall of the said City on the 19th day of November until 1:00 p.m. for the construction of the FY 2021 LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION PROJECT NO. 5623, Contract 983, as described in detail in the plans and specifications now on file in the Office of the City Clerk. OPENING OF BIDS All proposals received will be opened in the Second Floor Council Chambers at City Hall, in the City of Waterloo, Iowa, on the 19th day of November, at 1:00 p.m., and the proposals will be acted upon at such later time and place as may then be fixed by the City Council. PUBLIC HEARING The Council of said City will conduct a public hearing on the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above- described improvement project at 5:30 p.m. on November 23rd, 2020, said hearing to be -- held in the Harold E. Getty Council Chambers in City Hall in said City. The City of Waterloo will continue to hold City Council meetings as scheduled, however — in response to COVID-19, elected officials and city staff will participate via videoconferencing with elected officials and city staff dialing in to the meeting to participate. The public is invited to speak on public hearing items in the following ways. Call the City Clerk's Office at 319-291-4323 by 4:45 p.m. to obtain conference call information. Alternatively, you may email your comments to commentsw rloo-ia. r and they will be read during the public hearing. Please state the public hearing item on which you wish to speak. Members of the public may also attend the meeting in person but will be strongly encouraged to wear a mask and practice social distancing. SCOPE OF WORK The work involved in this project consists of; all site work to include grubbing, excavation, installing of all below grade structures and connective piping, valves, meter, quick disconnect, lift station pump rails, shoes, pumps, level sensors, access doors, pump lift, CMU electrical control building and all electrical equipment such as; generator, ATS, 440 switch gear panels and breakers, 100 amp panel and breakers, pump control panels with SCADA panel, interior and exterior outlets and building and site lighting and appurtenances. All excavation, backfill and any dewatering required NOTICE TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 2 - 1 during construction. Construction of lift station site access drive and site embankment. Construction of access drive, aggregate access drive and aggregate site cover. Site fencing and swing gates with locking capability. Site grading with local borrow. All areas not aggregate covered shall be seeded and mulched. Site power supply work (By others) shall be coordinated to keep project on schedule. BEGINNING AND COMPLETION DATES The work under the proposed contract shall be commenced within ten (10) working days after receipt of "Notice to Proceed" and this project shall have a split completion date. Work required to allow, at a minimum, manual use of the lift station by intended users shall be completed by June 1, 2021; all other work, including final commissioning of the lift station and all other site work shall be completed by July 1, 2021. METHOD OF PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR The Contractor will be paid against bi-monthly estimates in cash on the basis of ninety- five percent (95%) of the work as it is completed and materials delivered and work approved. Final payment will be made thirty-one (31) days after completion of the work and acceptance by the Council. Before final payment is made, vouchers showing that all subcontractors and workmen and all persons furnishing materials have been fully paid for such materials and labor will be required unless the City is satisfied that material, men and laborers have been paid. The Contractor is hereby notified that if the City does not have cash on hand to pay monthly pay estimates, according to Chapter 384.57 of the Code of Iowa, payment may be made by anticipatory warrants issued bearing a rate of interest not exceeding that permitted by Chapter 74A, Code of Iowa. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Plans and Specifications governing the construction of the proposed improvements have been prepared by Clapsaddle-Garber Associates, Inc., which plans and specifications and also the prior proceedings of the City Council referring to and defining said proposed improvements are hereby made a part of this notice, and the proposed contract by reference shall be executed in compliance therewith. Plans and Specifications are available for review only from the Engineering Department on the second floor of City Hall. Plans and Specifications may be downloaded at no charge from https://www.cgaplanroom.com or a printed copy may be obtained by contacting Beeline + Blue at 2507 Ingersoll Ave., Des Moines, Iowa 50312 or by phone at (515) 244-1611. Deposits will be refunded if the plans are returned in usable condition (i.e. generally free of highlights, ink markings, tears, stickers, water stains and soiling) to Clapsaddle-Garber Associates, Inc. at 5106 Nordic Drive in Cedar Falls, Iowa, by the end of the 14th consecutive day after the project has been awarded. No deposits will be refunded for any requests or plans received after the 14th consecutive day, which includes plans returned via mail service. Plan holders are responsible for ascertaining when the project has been awarded. If the plan holder is the prime contractor or a subcontractor or supplier of the prime contractor NOTICE TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 2 -2 that has been awarded the project, Plans and Specifications do not need to be returned to receive the deposit. The prime contractor must submit a list of his subcontractors and suppliers for the City to verify eligibility for the refundable deposit. Upon award of project, the prime contractor, his subcontractors and suppliers shall be supplied with the needed number of plans and specifications at no additional cost. CONTRACT AWARD A contract will be awarded to the qualified bidder submitting the lowest bid. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, re-advertise for new bids, and to waive informalities in the bids submitted that might be in the best interest of the City. Bids may be held by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a period not to exceed thirty (30) days from the day of the opening of bids for the purpose of reviewing the bids and investigating the qualifications of bidders, prior to awarding the contract. By virtue of statutory authority, a preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced with the State of Iowa and preference will be given to local domestic labor in the construction of the improvement. PROPOSALS SUBMITTED The bidder shall submit bids on the items listed in the proposal. The bidder shall clearly write or type the unit bid price and the bid item extension (Unit Price x Estimated Qty) in numerals on the blanks provided. Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price and extension, the City of Waterloo shall consider the unit bid price as being the valid unit bid price. The bidder has the option to submit a computer-generated spreadsheet in lieu of the portion of the Forrn of Bid or Proposal, which includes the Bid Item Number, Description, Unit, Estimated Quantity, Unit Bid Price, Total Bid Price and Total Bid. The computer-generated spreadsheet shall include all of the information listed in that portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal as well as bear the signature of the Prime Contractor submitting the bid. For the bidders who submit a computer-generated spreadsheet, the TOTAL BID (with alternates, if applicable) shall also be indicated in the space(s) provided on the Form of Bid or Proposal. BID SECURITY REQUIRED All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond, (on the form furnished by the City) payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the required bonds, his bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the Bidder and NOTICE TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 2 - 3 the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying Power of Attorney. PERFORMANCE & PAYMENT BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a "Performance Bond" and a "Payment Bond" within ten (10) days after forms are presented to him in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council and shall guarantee the faithful performance of the contract and the terms and conditions therein contained, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor and protect and save harmless the City from claims of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor. MAINTENANCE BOND Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this contract, it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond must be approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM / SUBCONTRACTING The program proposes numerical projections regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as Subcontractors, vendors and suppliers in the performance of Contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. A goal of at least ten percent (10%) for MBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000.00 or more. A goal of at least two percent (2%) for WBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000.00 or more. Any project funded in part or in total with federal funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The Prime Contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The MBE/WBE subcontractors, suppliers or vendors must provide the Prime Contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the Contractor is not required to accept their bid. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to completion. If the work is not completed within the specified contract period, plus authorized extensions, the contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount of five hundred dollars ($500.00) per day, for each day, as further described herein, in excess of the authorized time. Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages will be charged will be working days that the contractor does, or could have worked, from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be counted only if work is performed. Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not chargeable for NOTICE TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 2 -4 Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sunday if no work is done, and legal holidays. Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list items do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra work orders. When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract extends beyond the normal construction season for such work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing a request that working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed the following construction season. This amount is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the cost to the City of providing the required additional inspection, engineering and contract administration. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Before the work is commenced on this contract, a conference shall be held for the purpose of discussing the contract. The conference shall be attended by the prime contractor, subcontractors and City Officials. BIDDER STATUS Attention of bidders is called to compliance with the provisions of the Resident Bidder/Non-Resident Bidder requirements. Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Bidder Status Form in the form herein provided. Failure to submit a fully completed Bidder Status Form with the bid may result in the bid being deemed nonresponsive and rejected. SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certification to purchase building materials or supplies in the performance of construction contracts let by the City of Waterloo. Posted pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 26 of the City Code of Iowa. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA -- NOTICE TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 2 - 5 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. EXPLANATIONS TO BIDDERS Any explanation desired by a bidder regarding the meaning or interpretation of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., must be requested in writing and with sufficient time allowed for a reply to reach bidders before submission of their bids. Any interpretation made will be in the form of an amendment of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., and will be furnished to all prospective bidders. Its receipt by the bidder must be acknowledged in the space provided on the Proposal Form or by letter or telegram received before the time set for opening of bids. Oral explanations or instructions given before the award of the contract will not be binding. 2. EXAMINATION OF PROPOSED WORK Bidders should visit the site and take such other steps as may be reasonably necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the work, and the general and local conditions which can affect the work or the cost thereof. Failure to do so will not relieve bidders from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the work. The owner will assume no responsibility for any understanding or representation concerning conditions made by any of its officers or agents prior to the execution of the contract, unless included in the Notice to Bidders, the Specifications or related documents. 3. PREPARATION OF BIDS a. Bids shall be submitted on the forms furnished, or copies thereof, and must be manually signed. If erasures or other changes appear on the forms, each erasure or change must be initialed by the person signing the bid. The bidder has the option to submit a computer-generated spreadsheet in lieu of the portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal, which includes the Bid Item Number, Description, Unit, Estimated Quantity, Unit Bid Price, Total Bid Price, and Total Bid. The computer-generated spreadsheet shall include all of the information listed in that portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal as well as bear the signature of the Prime Contractor submitting the bid. For the bidders who submit a computer-generated spread- sheet, the TOTAL BID (with alternates, if applicable) shall also be indicated in the space(s) provided on the Form of Bid or Proposal. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3- 1 5623 b. The Bid Form may provide for submission of a price or prices for one or more items, which may be lump sum bids, alternate prices, schedule items resulting in a bid on a unit of construction or a combination thereof, etc. When the Bid Form explicitly requires that the bidder bid on all items, failure to do so will disqualify the bid. When submission of a price on all items is not required, bidders should insert the words "no bid" in the space provided for any item on which no price is submitted. c. Unless called for, alternate bids will not be considered. d. Modifications of bids already submitted will be considered if received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders by the time set for closing of bids. Telegraphic modifications will be considered, but should not reveal the amount of the original or revised bid. e. In preparing bid, the bidder shall specify the price, written legibly in ink or with the typewriter, at which he proposes to do each item of work. The unit price shall be stated in figures in the blank space provided (i.e., $7.14). In items where unit price is required, the total amount of each item shall be computed at the unit prices bid for the quantities given on the Bid Form and stated in figures in the blank space provided. If the bidder chooses to submit the unit prices, total bid price, and total bid on a computer-generated spreadsheet, all numbers shall be easily legible. f. Any changes or alterations made in the Bid Form, or any addition thereto, may cause the rejection of the bid. No bid will be considered which contains a clause in which the contractor reserves the right to accept or reject a contract awarded him by the city Council of Waterloo. Bids in which the unit prices are obviously unbalanced may be rejected. g. If the bidder does not qualify as a resident bidder, the nonresident bidder shall specify on the project proposal whether any preference to resident bidders, including but not limited to any preference to bidders, the imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to bidders or laborers from that state or foreign country is in effect in the nonresident bidder's state or country of domicile at the time of a bid submittal. 4. SUBMISSION OF BIDS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3- 2 5623 PLEASE SEE INSERT REGARDING MUNICIPAL BIDDING AND COVID-19. a. A bid must be sealed in a separate envelope and marked to indicate its contents and be accompanied by the bid security in a separate envelope. If forwarded by mail, the two envelopes shall be placed in a third and mailed to the City Clerk/Auditor. All bids must be filed with the City Clerk/Auditor of the City of Waterloo at his office in the City Hall before the time specified for closing bids. b. Bids received prior to the advertised hour of opening will be securely kept sealed. The officer whose duty it is to open them will decide when the specified time has arrived, and no bid received thereafter will be considered; except that when a bid arrives by mail after the time fixed for opening, but before the reading of all other bids is completed, and it is shown to the satisfaction of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the non-arrival on time was due solely to delay in the mails for which the bidder was not responsible, such bid will be received and considered. c. Bidders are cautioned that, while telegraphic modifications of bids may be received as provided above, such modifications, if not explicit and if in any sense subject to misinterpretation, shall made the bid so modified or amended, subject to rejection. 5. LATE BIDS AND MODIFICATIONS OR WITHDRAWALS Bids and modifications or withdrawals thereof received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders after the exact time set for closing of bids will not be considered. However, a modification which is received from an otherwise successful bidder, and which makes the terms of the bid more favorable to the City of Waterloo, will be considered at any time it is received and may therefore be accepted. Bids may be withdrawn by written or telegraphic request received from bidders prior to the time set for closing of bids. 6. PUBLIC OPENING OF BIDS PLEASE SEE INSERT REGARDING MUNICIPAL BIDDING AND COVID-19. Bids will be publicly opened at that time and place set for opening in the Notice to Bidders. Their content will be made public for the information of bidders and others interested who may be present either in person or by representative. 7. BID SECURITY REQUIRED INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3 - 3 5623 Ail bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond (on the form furnished by the City) payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the required bond, his bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the bidder and the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying Power of Attorney. 8. COLLUSIVE AGREEMENTS a. Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Non-Collusion Affidavit in the form herein provided, to the effect that he as not colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation in regard to any bid submitted. b. Each bidder submitting a bid shall have each proposed subcontractor, if any, execute and submit to the City Contract Compliance Officer by 5:00 P.M. the business day following the day bids on this project are due, a Non-Collusion Affidavit in the form herein provided, to the effect that he has not colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation in regard to any bid submitted. Before executing any subcontract, the successful bidder shall submit the name of any proposed subcontractor for approval by the City. 9. MINORITY AND/OR WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE SUBCONTRACTORS a. CITY OF WATERLOO AND/OR WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PRE-BID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM The City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form shall be submitted with the Form of Bid or Proposal. Failure to do so shall be grounds for the bid being rejected if subcontracting is proposed by the prime contractor. 10. MBE/WBE CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3 -4 5623 PURPOSE The purpose of the Contract Compliance Program (hereinafter called Program) is to act as an impetus for increasing the participation of minority and women disadvantaged business enterprise (MBE/WBE) in City awarded construction contracts. The Program does not propose to eliminate any bonafide contractor or subcontractor from bidding on City contracts, but it will hopefully serve as a needed stimulus to help local MBE/WBE's grow and eventually become mainstream contractors and subcontractors. This Contract Compliance Program does not propose to include any set-aside or quotas, but only flexible goals where "good-faith efforts" are required by the contractor to use MBE/WBE subcontractors. This Program shall not eliminate the need for contractors to continue their "good-faith efforts" in using MBE/WBE subcontractors on City contracts estimated at less than $50,000. The City of Waterloo will make every effort to reduce in-house construction and maintenance work that would be more cost effectively performed by the private sector and, thus, would allow additional bidding opportunities for MBE/WBE firms. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall be advised of all City of Waterloo awarded construction contracts. DEFINITIONS Goals: A flexible numerically expressed objective which contractors are required to make "good-faith efforts." The key to the requirement is to make documented efforts. Goals are neither set-a-sides nor a device to achieve proportional representation or equal results. Numerical goals do not create set-a-sides for specific groups, nor are they designed to achieve proportional representation or equal results. Rather, the goal-setting process in affirmative action planning is used to target and measure the effectiveness of affirmative action efforts to eradicate and prevent discrimination. Quota: A flat numerical requirement that the contractor is required to meet in order to obtain the benefit or be in compliance. The numerical INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3-5 5623 goal component of affirmative action programs is not designed to be, nor may it properly or lawfully be interpreted as, permitting unlawful preferential treatment and quotas with respect to persons of any race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The regulations at 41 CFR 60-2.12(a), 60-2.15 and 60-2.30, specifically prohibit discrimination and the use of goals as quotas. (U.S. Department of Labor) Set-Aside: An arrangement in which a particular contract is reserved for competition solely among minority and women business enterprises. Contractor. As used in this document means contractor, subcontractor, supplier, vendor, and professional service provider. Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) Any business, which is at least 51%, owned by one or more minorities and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002 Women Business Enterprise (WBE): Any business which is at least 51% owned by one or more women and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002 Minority: Any person or persons who are considered as socially and economically disadvantaged because of their identity as a group member without regard to their individual qualities. The groups include: Black American, Hispanic American, Native Americans, Eskimos, Aleuts, and Asian-Pacific Americans. 13 C.F.R. 124- 1.1(c)(3)(ii)(1983). Lowest Responsible Bidder: Bidder who has offered the lowest bid and who has exhibited skill relative to the type of work bid on, judgment, financial responsibility, and evidence of working with the Affirmative Action Employment Program and the Contract Compliance Program. Broker: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3-6 5623 One buying or selling for others on commission or other fee basis without maintaining a warehouse or other similar inventory storage facility. Good Faith Efforts: The successful bidder shall be selected on the basis of having submitted the lowest responsible bid. The obligation of the bidder is to make good faith efforts. The bidder can demonstrate that it has done so by the following: 1. The Prime Contractor met the project goal - No Action necessary 2. If the Prime Contractor failed to meet the goal, they must submit documentation of good faith efforts. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM SUBCONTRACTING The program proposes numerical projections or goals regarding _ utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as subcontractors in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. A goal of at least 10% for MBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000 or more and projects under $50,000 where applicable at the Contract Compliance Officer's discretion. There is at least 2% WBE goal on City funded projects. Any project which is funded solely or in part with Federal funds shall follow the respective agencies_contract compliance program and goals. Any project which is funded solely or in part with State funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Program is for City awarded construction contracts only. The prime contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The MBE/WBE subcontracts must provide the prime contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the contractor is not required to accept the bid. Administrative Reconsideration: As part of this reconsideration, the bidder will have the opportunity to provide written documentation or arguments concerning the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts to meet the goals. The bidder will have the opportunity to meet in person with the City of Waterloo's Administrative Reconsideration Committee to INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3 - 7 5623 discuss the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts. The Administrative Reconsideration Committee will forward a written decision on reconsideration to the Mayor and City Council, explaining the basis for finding that the bidder did or did not meet the goal or make adequate good faith efforts to do so. Documentation required will include but is not limited to the following: * Making portions of the work available for MBE/WBE subcontracting * Evidence of negotiating with MBE/WBE firms * MBE/WBE quotes obtained and non-MBE/WBE quotes used * Reasons agreements were not reached * Follow-up after initial solicitations * Efforts to assist in obtaining equipment, supplies and materials (at competitive prices), bonding, lines of credit, insurance, etc. * Evidence of past compliance or non-compliance by same contractor The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation) based on overall program goals. RESPONSIBILITIES 1. City of Waterloo A. The City Contract Compliance Officer has the responsibility to assure the City's compliance with Federal, State and Municipal regulations. B. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for maintaining a current directory of certified firms. Certification of MBE/WBE/DBE contractors is through the Iowa Department of Transportation and its Unified Certification Program. Only firms certified based on guidelines prescribed in 49 CFR Part 26 and provisions of this agreement, shall be recognized as certified by the City of Waterloo. C. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for making available a list of future project information notices to MBE/WBE firms. D. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall send notices to appropriate MBE/WBE firms in the directory of each bid solicitation with opening date. E. The City Contract Compliance Officer will receive MBE/WBE Letter(s) of Intent to Bid and within two (2) business days INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3- 8 _ 5623 forward the complete list of MBE/WBE bidders who submitted a Letter of Intent to Bid to prime contractors. Prime Contractors In order to be in compliance with the guidelines of this prc gram, the prime contractor must show good-faith efforts in following the MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program. Good-faith efforts include, but are not limited to, the following: A. Prime contractors shall send solicitation letters (Form CCO- 3) to appropriate MBE/WBE (those certified in directory prepared by City Contract Compliance Officer) at least seven (7) working days prior to bid date. Letters should identify specific items to be subcontracted. A minimum of three (3) disadvantaged business contacts must be made and documented, if there are at least three disadvantaged businesses offering services in the area to be subcontracted (See City of Waterloo MBE/WBE Certification List). If less than three (3) are offering the services to be subcontracted, then a contact is required for any that are listed as providing that service. If the Prime Contractor submits a MBE/WBE contact not on the City's MBE/WBE list, attach a copy of the MBE/WBE/DBE Certifications from another government agency. B. If a prime contract bidder is unable to identify MBE/WBE firms to perform portions of the work, the City Contract Compliance Officer should be contacted for assistance immediately. C. Prime contract bidders may solicit MBE/WBE proposals by telephone or personal interviews, but all such contacts shall be confirmed by Certified Mail, or subcontract bid request forms (Form CCO-2). D. If any MBE/WBE business submitting bids is not selected for subcontract award, documentation must accompany the "MBE/WBE Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form" (Form CCO-4 and CCO-4A) on why the MBE/WBE was not selected. These reasons could include: a. Not low bid. Copies of the competing bids may be required for verification. b. MBE/WBE did not bid, withdrew bid or non-responsive. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3 - 9 5623 c. Documentation of other business-related reason for not selecting the MBE/WBE business for a subcontract. d. Prime contractor self performs work. e. Any other reason relied on by prime. The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation) based on overall program goals. ll. MBE/WBE Firms A. MBE/WBE firms shall be certified by the Iowa Department of Transportation as owners and controllers of their respective businesses, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of August 2, 2019. B. MBE/WBE firms must perform the work on the project; they cannot act as a broker by subcontracting the work out to others. -� C. Each MBE/WBE firm planning to submit quotes on construction projects with goals, shall submit a Letter of Intent to Bid (Form CCO-5) to the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, listing specific items which the MBE/WBE firm is interested in bidding. If sufficient Letters of Intent to Bid are not received by the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, goals on subject project will be reduced accordingly. Agreements between the bidder/proposer and a MBE/WBE in which the MBE/WBE promises not to provide subcontracting quotations to other bidders/proposers are prohibited. NON-COMPLIANCE OF CONTRACTORS A. Noncompliance exists when the contractor's actions are not consistent with the requirements of the Contract Compliance Program in the areas of employment and subcontracting. B. A bidder's failure to show good-faith efforts to meet project goals or a failure to use certified MBE/WBE firms may be grounds for finding its bid not responsible. C. The Contract Compliance Officer shall submit to City Council his/her recommendation on any non-compliant contract in writing. NOTICE TO PROCEED INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3 - 10 5623 Notice to proceed on any project with goals will not be issued until City Contract Compliance Officer determines the lowest responsible bidder has used good-faith efforts to comply with this Compliance Program and the bid was responsive. CONCLUSION This program repeals or revises all sections of previous Waterloo Contract Compliance Programs. 11. EMPLOYMENT AND BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY To the greatest extent feasible, suppliers, subcontractors, and low income workers owning businesses or living in the Waterloo area must be given priority in supplying materials, bidding for subcontract work, or applying for employment by the contractor on this project. Opportunities for training and for employment arising in connection with this project, shall to the greatest extent feasible be made available to lower income persons residing in the project area. The contract area is the City of Waterloo. The City of Waterloo will require the contractor to document his efforts in securing lower income workers living in the project area and in purchasing supplies from, and awarding subcontracts to, businesses owned by persons residing in the project area. 12. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS Each bidder shall, upon request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, submit on the form furnished for that purpose (a copy of which is included in the contract documents), a statement of bidder's qualifications, his experience record in constructing the type of improvements embraced, and his organization and equipment available for the work contemplated; and, when specifically requested, a detailed financial statement. The City of Waterloo, Iowa, shall have the right to take such steps as it deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform his obligations under the contract, and the bidder shall furnish the City of Waterloo, Iowa, all such information and data for this purpose as it may request. The right is reserved to reject any bid where an investigation of the available evidence or information does not satisfy the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the bidder is qualified to carry out properly the terms of the contract. 13. AWARD OF CONTRACT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3 - 11 5623 a. Award of contract will be made to that responsive and responsible bidder whose bid, conforming to the Specifications, is most advantageous to the City of Waterloo; price and other factors considered. The intention is to award the contract at the time of opening bids, but the right is reserved to postpone such action for a reasonable time, not exceeding thirty (30) days. b. The City Council may, when in its interest, reject any or all bids or waive any informality in bids received. c. The bidder shall submit bids on all the items listed in the proposal and shall state the unit bid price in words in the blank spaces provided beneath the item description. Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price in words and listed numeral unit bid price, the City of Waterloo shall consider the unit bid price in words as being the valid unit bid price. A computer-generated spreadsheet as herein provided shall also be acceptable. Proposals requiring mathematical computations to determine unit prices or totals will be rejected. A contract will be awarded to the �- qualified bidder submitting the lowest total bid for the BASE BID plus ALTERNATE(S) chosen by the City as indicated in the NOTICE TO BIDDERS. d. When a contract for a public improvement is to be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder, a resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a nonresident bidder from a state or foreign country if that state or foreign country gives or requires any preference to bidders from that state or foreign country, including but not limited to any preference to bidders, the imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to bidders or laborers from that state or foreign country. The preference allowed shall be equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident. In the instance of a resident labor force preference, a nonresident bidder shall apply the same resident labor force preference to a public improvement in this state as would be required in the construction of a public improvement by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident. 14. EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT, BONDS, AND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE a. Subsequent to the award and within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, the successful bidder shall execute and deliver to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, an INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3- 12 5623 agreement in the form included in the contract documerts in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may require. b. Having satisfied all conditions of award as set forth elsewhere in these documents, the successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, furnish a surety bond and a payment bond in a penal sum not less than the amount of the contract as awarded, as security for the faithful performance of the contract and terms and conditions therein contained and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all persons, firms, or corporations to whom the contractor may become legally indebted for labor, materials, tools, equipment, or services of any nature including utility and transportation services, employed or used by him in performing the work. The bonds shall protect and save harmless the City from claims and damages of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the contract improvements for the period stated in the Notice of Hearing from and after completion of said improvements and their acceptance by the City. Such bonds shall be in the same form as that included in the contract documents and shall bear the same date as, or a date subsequent to that of the agreement. The current Power of Attorney for the person who signs for any surety company shall be attached to such bonds. c. The successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, furnish a certificate of insurance for approval in amounts of not less than the amounts specified in the General Specifications for Construction, Section F. No. 4 "Liability Insurance," Pages 16 to 17 of 21 Pages. The certificate of insurance shall be furnished in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo may require. The City of Waterloo shall be named as an "Additional Insured." The contractor shall similarly submit his subcontractor's certificates of insurance in the amounts for approval before each commences work. The contractor shall carry or _ require that there be Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all his employees and those of his subcontractors engaged in work at the site, in accordance with State Workmen's Compensation Laws. d. The failure of the successful bidder to execute such agreement and to supply the required bond or bonds within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, or within such extended period as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may grant, based upon reasons determined sufficient by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, _ may either award the contract to the next lowest bidder or re- advertise for bids, and may charge against the bidder the difference between the amount of the bid an the amount for which a contract INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3 - 13 5623 for the work is subsequently executed, irrespective of whether the amount thus due exceeds the amount of the bid guaranty. If a more favorable bid is received by re-advertising, the defaulting bidder shall have no claim against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a refund. 15. BIDDER STATUS Attention of bidders is called to the requirement of complying with the provisions of the Resident Bidder/Non-Resident Bidder requirement. Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Bidder Status Form in the form herein provided. Failure to submit a fully completed Bidder Status Form with the bid may result in the bid being deemed nonresponsive and rejected. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACT NO. 983 3 - 14 5623 FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL FY 2021 LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION PROJECT NO. 5623 CONTRACT NO. 983 CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Honorable Mayor and City Council Waterloo, Iowa Gentlemen: 1. The undersigned, being a Corporation existing under the laws of the State of , a Partnership consisting of the following partners: having familiarized (himself) (themselves) (itself) with the existing conditions on the project area affecting the cost of the work, and with all the contract documents listed in the Table of Contents and Addenda (if any), as prepared by the City Engineer of the City of Waterloo now on file in the office of the City Clerk, City Hall, Waterloo, Iowa, hereby proposes to furnish all supervision, technical personnel, labor, materials, machinery, tools, appurtenances, equipment, and services, including utility and transportation services required to construct and complete this FY 2021 LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION PROJECT NO. 5623, CONTRACT NO. 983, all in accordance with the above-listed documents and for the unit prices for work in place for the following items and quantities: FY 2021 LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION PROJECT NO.5623 CONTRACT NO.983 ITEM NO. ITEM UNIT QTY. UNIT PRICE TOTAL 2.01 TOPSOIL, ON SITE CY 550 $ $ 2.02 EXCAVATION,CLASS 10 CY 2850 $ $ 2.03 SUBGRADE PREPARATION, 12" SY 1270 $ $ 2.04 SUBBASE, 6", MODIFIED SY 190 $ $ SANITARY SEWER,GRAVITY MAIN, $ $ 4.01 TRENCHED,TRUSS, 12" LF 118 SANITARY SEWER, FORCE MAIN, $ $ 4.02 TRENCHED, PVC, 12" LF 175 5.01 WATER MAIN,TRENCHED, DIP, 6" LF 50 $ $ 5.02 FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY EA 1 $ $ 6.01 SANITARY MANHOLE CONNECTION EA 2 $ $ 6.02 SW-515 INTAKE RECONSTRUCTION EA 1 $ $ 7.01 CURB AND GUTTER REMOVAL LF 91 $ $ -- 7.02 PAVEMENT,C-SUD PCC,9" SY 167 $ $ 7.03 GRANULAR SURFACING, 12" SY 965 $ $ 8.01 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL LS 1 $ $ HYDRAULIC SEEDING, FERTILIZING, $ $ 9.01 AND MULCHING AC 0.54 FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO. 983 4 - 1 5623 9.02 8'SECURITY CHAIN LINK FENCE LF 244 $ $ 9.03 8'SECURITY FENCE GATE EA 2 $ $ 9.04 SILT FENCE, INSTALLATION LF 575 $ $ 9.05 SILT FENCE, MAINTENACE LF 575 $ $ 9.06 SILT FENCE, REMOVAL LF 575 $ $ INLET PROTECTION DEVICE, $ $ 9.07 INSTALLATION EA 2 INLET PROTECTION DEVICE, $ $ 9.08 MAINTENANCE EA 2 INLET PROTECTION DEVICE, $ $ 9.09 REMOVAL EA 2 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION $ $ 9.1 ENTRANCE, INSTALLATION EA 1 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION $ $ 9.11 ENTRANCE, MAINTENANCE EA 1 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION $ $ 9.12 ENTRANCE, REMOVAL EA 1 11.01 MOBILIZATION LS 1 $ $ UNIT MASONRY ELECTRICAL $ $ 12.01 CONTROL BUILDING LS 1 ELECTRICAL PACKAGE, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, 12.02 INCLUDING GENERATOR LS 1 WET WELL AND PUMP CONTROL $ $ 12.03 SYSTEMS LS 1 12.04 VALVE VAULT LS 1 $ $ 12.05 AIR RELEASE MANHOLE LS 1 $ $ 12.06 METERING MANHOLE LS 1 $ $ TOTAL BID $ 2. It is understood that the quantities set forth are approximate only and subject to variation and that the unit bid price for the work done shall govern in the actual payment to Contractor. 3. In submitting this bid, the bidder understands that the right is reserved by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, to reject any or all bids. If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered to the undersigned within thirty (30) days after the opening thereof, or at any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned agrees to execute and deliver an agreement in the prescribed form and furnish the required bond and certificate of the insurance within ten (10) days after the agreement is presented to him for signature, and start work within ten (10) days after"Notice to Proceed" is issued. 4. Security in the sum of Dollars ($ ) in the form of is submitted herewith in accordance with the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO. 983 4-2 5623 5. Attached hereto is a Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Contractor. 6. Attached hereto is a Bidder Status Form. 7. The bidder is prepared to submit a financial and experience statement upon request. 8. The Prime Contractor and Subcontractor(s), which have performed an aggregate of $10,000.00 in work for the City in the current calendar year. are prepared to submit an AAP or Update and an EOC, within ten (10) days of notification that the bid submitted is lowest and acceptable. 9. The bidder has received the following Addendum or Addenda: Addendum No. Date 10. The bidder shall list the MBE/WBE subcontractor(s), amount of subcontracts and bid items on the City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Pre-bid Contact Information Form submitted with this Form of Bid or Proposal. The apparent low Bidder shall submit a list of all other Subcontractor(s) to be used on this Project to the City of Waterloo by 5:00 p.m. the business day following the day Bids on this Project are due along with the Non-Collusion Affidavits of All Subcontractor(s). The Contractor shall submit information on subcontractors on "SUBCONTRACTOR REQUEST AND APPROVAL" Form to be provided by City prior to approval of contract. The subcontractors listed on this proposal and/or submitted to the Contract Compliance Officer cannot be changed except for the following reasons: 1) The City of Waterloo does not approve the subcontractors. 2) The subcontractors submit in writing that they cannot fulfill their subcontracts. 11. The bidder has filled in all blanks on this proposal. Those blanks not applicable are marked "none" or "NA". 12. The bidder has attached all applicable forms. 13. The Owner reserves the right to select alternates, delete line items, and/or to reduce quantities prior to the award of a contract due to budgetary limitations. -- FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO. 983 4 -3 5623 (Name of Bidder) (Date) BY: Title Official Address: (Including Zip Code): I.R.S. No. FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO. 983 4 -4 5623 INFORMATION NEEDED FOR IOWA CONSTRUCTION SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE CONTRACTOR NAME: ADDRESS: (Check One) PRIME SUBCONTRACTOR _ FEDERAL ID#: PROJECT NAME: PROJECT CONTRACT NO.: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ❑ Brickwork ❑ Landscaping ❑ Carpentry ❑ Painting ❑ Concrete ❑ Paving ❑ Drywall-Plaster-Insulation ❑ Plumbing ❑ Electrical ❑ Roofing-Siding-Sheet Metal ❑ Excavation/Grading ❑ Windows ❑ Flooring ❑ Wrecking-Demolition ❑ Heavy Construction ❑ Other (Please specify) ❑ Heating-Ventilating-Air Cond INFORMATION FOR SALES TAX EXEMPTION 5 - 1 CONTRACT 983 5623 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, as Principal, and as Surety are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF WATERLOO , Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER." In the penal sum _ Dollars ($ )lawful money of the United States,for the payment of which sum will and truly be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, admin strators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of this obligatior is such that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying bid dated the day of , 20 , for NOW, THEREFORE, (a)If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified and shall furnish a bond for his faithful performance of said contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, Then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it be ng expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner it liquidation of damages sustained in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond as provided in the specifications or by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Suret, and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or execute such contract; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety, have hereunto set their hands and seals, and such of them as are corporations, have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers this day of ,A.D. 20 (Seal) Principal By (Title) (Seal) Witness Surety By Witness Attorney-in-fact BID BOND CONTRACT 983 6 - 1 5623 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER State of )ss County of , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: _ 1. He is (Owner, Partner, Officer, Representative, or Agent) , of , the Bidder that has submitted the attached Bid; 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached Bid and of all pertinent circumstances respecting such Bid; 3. Such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid; 4. Neither the said Bidder nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached Bid has been submitted or to refrain from bidding in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in the attached Bid or of any other Bidder, or, to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the bid price or the bid price of any other Bidder, or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance, or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the Proposed Contract; and 5. The price or prices quoted in the attached Bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. (Signed) Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this _ day of , 2020. Title My commission expires NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT - CONTRACT NO. 983 7 - 1 PRIME 5623 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR -- State of ) ) ss: — County of , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: IMMO 1. He is (Owner, Partner, Officer, Representative, or Agent) , of hereinafter referred to as the "Subcontractor;" 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the subcontractor's proposal submitted by the subcontractor to — , contract pertaining to the project in • (City or County and State) — 3. Such subcontractor's proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham proposal; 4. Neither the subcontractor nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham proposal in connection with such contract or to — refrain from submitting a proposal in connection with such contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by unlawful agreement or connivance with any other bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in said subcontractor's proposal, or to fix any — overhead, profit or cost element of the price of prices in said subcontractor's proposal, or to secure through collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the proposed contract; and 5. The price or prices quoted in the subcontractor's proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, '— including this affiant. (Signed) — Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 2020. Title My commission expires — NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT - SUBCONTRACTOR 7A- 1 CONTRACT 983 5623 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE (As provided in Executive Order No. 11246) All contractors, subcontractors, vendors and suppliers of goods and services doing business with the City and value of said business equals or exceeds ten thousand dollars ($10,000.00) annually agree as follows: 1. The contractors, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap, political opinions or affiliations. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier will develop an Affirmative Action program to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status, age. mental or physical disability, political opinions or affiliations. Such actions shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Employment b. Upgrading c. Demotion or Transfer d. Recruitment and Advertising e. Layoff or Termination f. Rates of Pay or Other Forms of Compensation g. Selection for Training Including Apprenticeship 2. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status, age, mental or physical disabilities, political opinion or affiliations. 3. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier or his/her collective bargaining representative will send to each labor union or representative of workers which he/she has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising said labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitment under this section. 4. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will comply with all published rules, regulations, directives, and order of the City of Waterloo Affirmative Action Program Contract Compliance Provisions. 5. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will furnish and file compliance reports within such time and upon such forms as provided by the Affirmative Action Officer. Said forms will elicit EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE CONTRACT 983 8 - 1 information as to the policies, procedures, patterns, and practices of each subcontractor as well as the contractor himself/herself and said contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier will permit access to his/her employment books, records and accounts to the City's Affirmative Action Officer, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this contract and with rules and regulations of the City's Affirmative Action Program—Contract Compliance Provisions relative to Resolution No. 24664. 6. In the event of the contractor's non-compliance with the non-discrimination clauses of this contract or with any of such rules, regulations and orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further contracts in accordance with procedures authorized by the City Council. 7. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will include, or incorporate by reference, the provisions of the non- discrimination clause in every contract, subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by the rules, regulations or orders of the City's Affirmative Action Program, and will provide in every subcontract, or purchase order that said provisions will be binding upon each contractor, subcontractor, or supplier. 8. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to non-discrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, creed, color, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical disabilities. (Signed) (Appropriate Official) (Title) (Date) EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE CONTRACT 983 8 - 2 TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS During the performance of this contract, the contractor (for itself), its assignees, and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the "contractor") agrees as follows: 1. Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to non-discrimination in Federally assisted programs of the DOT Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. 2. Nondiscrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, national origin, sex, age, or disability in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. 3. Solicitations for Subcontracts, Including Procurement of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurement of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to non-discrimination on the grounds of race, color, national origin, sex, age, or disability. 4. Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant there to, and shall allow access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Contracting Authority, the Iowa DOT, or FHWA to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify to the Contracting Authority, the Iowa DOT or the FHWA as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the _ information. 5. Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Contracting Authority, the Iowa DOT, or the FHWA shall impose such contract sanctions as they may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: a. Withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor complies, and/or TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS CONTRACT 983 9 - 1 5623 b. Cancellation, termination, or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part. 6. Incorporation of Provisions: The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (6) in every subcontract, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Contracting Authority, the Iowa DOT, or the FHWA may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non-compliance: Provided, however, that, in the event of a contractor becomes involved in, or it threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Contracting Authority or the Iowa DOT to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the Contracting Authority or the Iowa DOT; and, in addition, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interest of the United States. • TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS CONTRACT 983 9 - 2 5623 Bidder Status Form - To be completed by all bidders Part A Please answer"Yes" or"No"for each of the following: - ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is authorized to transact business in Iowa. (To help you determine if your company is authorized, please review the worksheet on the next page). ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has an office to transact business in Iowa. - ❑ Yes ❑ No My company's office in Iowa is suitable for more than receiving mail, telephone calls, and e-mail. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has been conducting business in Iowa for at least 3 years prior to the first request for bids on this project. - ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is not a subsidiary of another business entity or my company is a suDsidiary of another business entity that would qualify as a resident bidder in Iowa. If you answered "Yes"for each question above, your company qualifies as a resident bidder. Please complete Parts B and D of this form. If you answered "No"to one or more questions above, your company is a nonresident bidder. Please complete Parts C and D of this form. - To be completed by resident bidders Part B My company has maintained offices in Iowa during the past 3 years at the following addresses: Dates: / / to / / Address: City, State, Zip: Dates: / / to / / Address: City, State, Zip: Dates: / / to / / Address: You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. City, State, Zip: To be completed by non-resident bidders Part C 1. Name of home state or foreign country reported to the Iowa Secretary of State: 2. Does your company's home state or foreign country offer preferences to resident bidders, resident labor force preferences or any other type of preference to bidders or laborers? ❑ Yes ❑ No 3. If you answered "Yes"to question 2, identify each preference offered by your company's home state or foreign country and the appropriate legal citation. You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. To be completed by all bidders Part D I certify that the statements made on this document are true and complete to the best of my knowlecge and I know that my failure to provide accurate and truthful information may be a reason to reject my bid. Firm Name: Signature: Date: You must submit the completed form to the governmental body requesting bids per 875 Iowa Administrative Code Chapter 156. This form has been approved by the Iowa Labor Commissioner. 309-6001 (09-15) 10-1 Worksheet: Authorization to Transact Business This worksheet may be used to help complete Part A of the Resident Bidder Status form. If at least one of the following describes your business, you are authorized to transact business in Iowa. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is currently registered as a contractor with the Iowa Division of Labor. 0 Yes ❑ No My business is a sole proprietorship and I am an Iowa resident for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a general partnership or joint venture. More than 50 percent of the general partners or joint venture parties are residents of Iowa for Iowa income tax purposes. O Yes ❑ No My business is an active corporation with the Iowa Secretary of State and has paid all fees required by the Secretary of State, has filed its most recent biennial report, and has not filed articles of dissolution. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a corporation whose articles of incorporation are filed in a state other than Iowa, the corporation has received a certificate of authority from the Iowa secretary of state, has filed its most recent biennial report with the secretary of state, and has neither received a certificate of withdrawal from the secretary of state nor had its authority revoked. ❑ Yes 0 No My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in this state and the statement has not been canceled. O Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in a state other than Iowa, has filed a statement of foreign qualification in Iowa and a statement of cancellation has not been filed. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership which has filed a certificate of limited partnership in this state, and has not filed a statement of termination. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership or a limited liability limited partnership whose certificate of limited partnership is filed in a state other than Iowa, the limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership has received notification from the Iowa secretary of state that the application for certificate of authority has been approved and no notice of cancellation has been filed by the limited partnership or the limited liability limited partnership. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in Iowa and has not filed a statement of termination. O Yes 0 No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in a state other than Iowa, has received a certificate of authority to transact business in Iowa and the certificate has not been revoked or canceled. 309-6001 (09-15) 10-: Revised February 2003 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM Check box that applies to party completing program: ( ) General Contractor ( ) Subcontractor I. Section A to be completed by GENERAL CONTRACTORS only: A. Name of Company _ Address of Company Zip Telephone Number ( ) _ Federal ID Number (if no Federal ID Number, Owner/President's Social Security Number) _ Name of Equal Employment Officer Name of Project Project Contract Number _ Estimated Construction Work Dates Start Finish Section B to be completed by SUBCONTRACTORS only: B. Name of General or Prime Contractor Name of Subcontractor Subcontractor's Address Zip Subcontractor's Telephone Number ( ) Subcontractor's Federal ID Number (if no Federal ID Number Owner/President's Social Security Number) - Name of Equal Employment Officer AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CONTRACT 983 11 - 1 5623 C. Remainder of program to be completed by party completing program, either Prime or Subcontractor. 1. The Owners and/or Principals of your company: Ethnic Name Address Position Sex Origin 2. Other Areas of Interest: If your company has branches or subsidiaries, or if your company is a branch or subsidiary of a parent organization, give the following information: Type of Name Address Affiliation Degree II. EMPLOYER'S POLICY (Please read carefully.) A. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to nondiscrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap. B. The employment policies and practices of the undersigned are to recruit and hire employees without discrimination, and to treat them equally with respect to compensation and opportunities for advancement, including training, upgrading, promotion, and transfer. However, we realize the inequities associated with employment training, upgrading, contracting and subcontracting for minorities and women and we will direct our efforts to correcting any deficiencies to the maximum extent possible. The same will be required of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers. C. We submit this program to assure compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and other subsequent orders that may pertain to AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CONTRACT 983 11 - 2 5623 equal employment opportunity and merit employment policies, fully realizing that our qualification and/or merit system should be evaluated and revised, if necessary. D. We agree to put forth the maximum effort to achieve full employment and utilization of capabilities and productivity of all our citizens without regard to race, creed, color, sex, national origin, economic status, age, and mental or physical handicap. E. will give training (Name of Company) and employment opportunities to local residents of Waterloo, Iowa, to the greatest extent feasible. III. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION A. recognizes that the (Name of Company) effective application of a policy of merit employment involves more than just a policy statement, and (Name of Company) will, therefore, re-evaluate our Affirmative Action Program to ensure that equal employment opportunities are available on the basis of individual merit, and to actively encourage minorities, women and local residents to seek employment with our company on this basis. B. will undertake the (Name of Company) following six (6) steps to improve our Affirmative Action Program: 1. Minority Recruitment and Employment; 2. Local Recruitment and Employment; - 3. Disabled Veteran and Vietnam Era Veteran Recruitment and Employment; 4. Handicapped Recruitment and Employment; -- 5. Female Recruitment and Employment; and 6. Training, Upgrading and Promotional Opportunities. C. will take (Name of Company) whatever steps are necessary to ensure that our total work force has adequate minority, female, and local representation. We will utilize the following methods in our recruitment attempts: 1. Local advertising media (newspapers, radio, TV); 2. Community organizations (churches, clubs, schools) 3. Public and private institutions in the area (UNI, Hawkeye Community College); AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CONTRACT 983 11 - 3 5623 4. Job Service of Iowa; and 5. Other. D. will seek qualified minority, (Name of Company) female, and local group applicants for all job categories and will make asserted efforts to increase minority, female and group representation in occupations at the higher levels or skill and responsibility. E. All sources of employment used shall be aware that we are an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer. Labor organizations representing our employees will be notified of our Equal Employment Opportunity Policy and Affirmative Action Program. F. Training, upgrading, promotion and transfer activities at all levels will be monitored to ensure that full consideration has been given to qualified minority, female, and local group employees. G. will encourage other (Name of Company) companies with whom we are associated and/or do business, to do the same and we will assist them in their efforts. H. has taken the following (Name of Company) Affirmative Action to ensure that minority, female, local contractors and/or suppliers were provided opportunities to negotiate and/or bid on this project: (if none, write "NONE') 1. 2. As a result of the above efforts, we have involved minority, female, and local contractors and/or suppliers in the following areas of subcontracting: (if none, write "NONE") 1. 2. J. will require approved (Name of Company) Affirmative Action Programs from all nonexempt contractors who propose to work on this project and will take whatever steps are necessary to ensure that non-minority contractors have adequate AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CONTRACT 983 11 - 4 5623 representation of minority, female and local persons in the r total work force. K. In further accordance with rules and guidelines issued pursuant to Executive Order 11246 as amended, we establish the goals for our company, based on parity percentages supplied by the City, and we realize these goals will be reviewed on an annual basis. L. will keep records of (Name of Company) specific actions relative to recruitment, employment, training, upgrading and promotion and will provide the City of Waterloo with any information relative to same, including activities of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers as necessary or when requested. M. Parity figures for companies located in Waterloo are as follows: Minority Parity = .08 (8%) N. Affirmative Action (Name of Company) Employment Goals: The definition of Affirmative Action Goals is as follows: "Goals may not be rigid and inflexible quotas which must be met, but must be targets, reasonably attainable by means of applying every good faith effort to make all aspects of the entire Affirmative Action Program work." For the year 2020, please submit percentage targets for employing minorities and women. If you already have reached your target for hiring minorities and women, please submit that percentage *Goals for Minorities: Goals for Women: *your affirmative action goals should be between 1% and 10% or more for minorities and 1% and 5% or more for women. Please be advised that the goals or targets are purely your estimation of how many women and minorities your company can reasonably expect to hire in 2019. Note, that none of the goals are rigid or inflexible. They are targets that your company calculates as reasonably attainable. This will help the City in its monitoring procedures as required by City of Waterloo Resolution No. 1984-142(4). CONTRACTOR'S TOTAL WORK FORCE AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CONTRACT 983 11 - 5 5623 (WATERLOO) HOURLY NAME AND ADDRESS JOB CATEGORY RACE SEX WAGE INDICATE: DISABLED VETERAN: DV VIETNAM ERA VETERAN: VV HANDICAPPED: H AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CONTRACT 983 11 - 6 5623 �. We hereby certify that we are in compliance with all City and Federal Affirmative Action Regulations and agree to accept all liability for failure to comply. Respectfully submitted, By: Company Executive Date By: Equal Employment Opportunity Officer Date City of Waterloo Affirmative Action Officer Approved Disapproved Reason: By: Date: AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CONTRACT 983 11 - 7 5623 DESCRIPTION OF JOB CATEGORIES 1. Officials/Manager: Occupations in which employees set broad policies, exercise overall responsibility for execution of all policies, or direct individual departments or special phases of the agency's operations or provide specialized consultation on a regional, district or area basis. Includes: department heads, bureau chiefs, division chiefs, directors, deputy directors, controllers, examiners, wardens, superintendents, unit supervisors, sheriffs, police and fire chiefs and inspectors and kindred workers. 2. Professionals: Occupations which require specialized and theoretical knowledge which is usually required through college training or thorough work experience and other training which provides comparable knowledge. Includes: personnel and labor relations workers, social workers, doctors, psychologists, registered nurses, economists, dietitians, lawyers, system analysts, accountants, engineers, employment and vocational rehabilitation counselors, teachers or instructors, police and fire captains and lieutenants and kindred workers. 3. Technicians: Occupations which require a combination of basic scientific or technical knowledge and manual skill which can be obtained through specialized post-secondary school education and through equivalent on-the- job training. Includes: computer programmers and operations, draftsmen, surveyors, licensed practical nurses, photographs, radio operators, technical illustrators, police and fire sergeants and kindred workers. 4. Office/Clerical: Workers are responsible for internal and external communication, recording and retrieval of data and/or information and other paper work required in an office. Includes: bookkeepers, messengers, office machine operators, clerk-typists, stenographers, court transcribers, hearing reporters, statistical clerks, dispatchers, license distributors, payroll clerks and kindred workers. 5. Skilled Craft Workers: Workers perform jobs which require special manual skill and a thorough and comprehensive knowledge of the processes involved in the work which is acquired through on-the-job training programs. Includes: Mechanics and repairman, electricians, heavy equipment operators, stationary engineers, skilled machine occupations, carpenters, compositors and typesetters and kindred workers. 6. Sales Workers: Occupations engaging wholly and primarily in direct selling. Includes: advertising agents and salesman, insurance agents and brokers, real estate agents and brokers, stock and bond salesmen, demonstrators, salesmen and sales clerks, grocery clerks and cashier checkers, and kindred workers. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CONTRACT 983 11 - 8 5623 7. Operatives (semi-skilled): Workers who operate machine or processing equipment or perform other factory-type duties of intermediate skill level which can be mastered in a few weeks and require only limited training. Includes: apprentices (auto mechanics), plumbers, building trades, metal working trades, bricklayers, carpenters, electricians, machinists, mechanics, printing trades, etc., operatives, attendants (auto service and parking), plasterers, chauffeurs, deliverymen and furnacemen, heaters (metal), laundry and dry cleaning operatives, milliners, mine operatives and laborers, motormen, oilers and greasers, (except auto painters), (except construction and maintenance), photographic process workers, stationary fireman, truck and tractor drivers, weavers, (textile), welders and flame cutters and kindred workers. 8. Laborers (unskilled): Workers in manual occupations which generally require no special training. Perform elementary duties that may be learned in few days and require the application of little or no independent judgment. Includes: garage laborers, car washers and greasers, gardeners (except farm) and groundskeepers, longshoremen, and stevedores, lumbermen, raftsmen and woodchoppers, laborers performing lifing, diggi-ig, mixing, loading and pulling operations and kindred workers. 9. Apprentices: Persons employed in a program including work training and related instruction to learn a trade or craft which is trad tionally an apprenticeship, regardless of whether the program is registered witi a Federal or State agency. 10. Trainees (on-the-job): Production. . . persons in formal training for craftsmen when not trained under apprentice programs--operative laborer, and service occupations. White Collar. . . persons engaged in formal training for clerical, managerial, professional, technical, sales, office and clerical occupations. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CONTRACT 983 11 - 9 5623 ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS: The following are items from the FY 2021 LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION PROJECT NO. 5623, Contract 983 that have a potential for MBE/WBE Participation. This listing, however, is not intended to be all encompassing; to preclude MBE/WBE Contractors from bidding on any items of the Proposal as a Subcontractor or the entire Proposal as a Prime Contractor. BID DESCRIPTION ITEM UNIT EST.QTY. 7.01 CURB AND GUTTER REMOVAL LF 91 8.01 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL LS 1 9.01 HYDRAULIC SEEDING, FERTILIZING,AND MULCHING AC 0.54 9.04 SILT FENCE, INSTALLATION LF 575 9.05 SILT FENCE, MAINTENACE LF 575 9.06 SILT FENCE, REMOVAL LF _ 575 9.07 INLET PROTECTION DEVICE, INSTALLATION EA 2 9.08 INLET PROTECTION DEVICE, MAINTENANCE EA 2 9.09 INLET PROTECTION DEVICE, REMOVAL EA 2 MBE/WBE GOALS FOR THIS PROJECT IMPORTANT: Prime Contract Bidders should be aware that ten percent (10%) MBE goal and a two percent (2%) WBE goal is attached to this project. "Certified Return Receipt" letters are no longer needed with the bid showing proof of contacting MBE or WBE Subcontractors, but the Pre-Bid Contact Information Form must be filled out completely. City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 620 Mulberry Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 291-4429 ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE CONTRACT 983 12 - 1 5623 SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM PRIME BIDDER'S LETTERHEAD Contract No.: Letting Date: I, (subcontractor's name), hereby attest that I have been solicited for a I d on (project name) in the area of (description of work and bid item no.). (Prime contractor) has informed me that if I am interested in bidding, a subcontracting bid proposal must be submitted to the company office by (date) and (time). Subcontractor's Compa•iy Name Date Subcontractor's Signature Date Prime Bidder's Signature FORM CCO-2 (07/02/2019) CONTRACT 983 12A - 1 5623 LETTER TO BE USED WHEN SOLICITING FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES Subcontractor Company Name Address RE: Contract No.: Dear • (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is presently soliciting for the follovwIng work in connection with the above referenced project. (Insert bid Item Nos. and Description of Work) (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is an Equal Opportunity Employer and all qualified bidders will not be discriminated against due to race, religion, color, sex, or origin. _ If interested in bidding your proposal must be turned in to this office by and (Date) (Time) Sincerely, (Prime Contractor's Representative) -- Form CCO - 3 (11/28/2001) CONTRACT 983 12B - 1 5623 , 11 a) al O IL H ._ 0 CQ m N ° -a w a)c L5 m I- O ti Q-c a ca rn (D ° Z C •° 0) — c� 2 1L C _co w o oC L 4-+ '^ ao °, a) oQr o ° ° E a) w u) a) 0L Q'C E +' N U U o Z Q N a C o as Q � oU0 ON a) � C � C ) ^ u) � L N C U L O Q N _0 — 00- ° ° C � � � O w ° ONQ 0_° _c Q i O Q _ .L. LL m a) U ' p L OL "0 N N O Z E U E 0 > ° •° 0 - W � _ O 0 W ° E ;-- u) o E ca m Om a) H co O O w 0) O_ "O L a) - o • � ° Ep — a) 2 u O -a >, 0 Q- o � ai 0 a) oLo o 0 � N N a) Z aim � � c 2 c ° -15 •N L ° � U > a _c - co cc°a ° ° o Q ° QE H co > � a) '3 24- U U O4- E - U ca cam •. o V N O O E U L pa) ° < a co ° C _a >, _ U L Q N Q Q ° N L _ 0 Z a) 0) to T N 'Q ° Q-m �/ ° � � ° � ca ° C ° 0 L = �, ° ca a) a) N �-- WF- CND 15 °) 00 Lo U -0 a o0 0 0 E >,� � � 0a) ,_ Dui c"a � o 0 � E EN N O_ _1 ° -0w Z _0 .C C �-. ° O C • o o C O N cL as p m w <7 0 p L --.0 N m c 4- o u°) a) co U C a m co ca co W o - co C `� a) C a) 4- "0 W ° 0 Oa) c) a) E0 'I2 — Wce W - ° m a) o a C n a L o _a a) O � 0 W00o EL- -c = U C w ° N uu)iu)i � 0 Z � � cm o W 3 � L m CO �a c)�� o`oo W O c,_am aa) � a�i � � d m 43 m ° H • N N Ccn c H ui 0 c �, W ti o m = to � a>iw Uco CO— Q `� �_ O � ° Nm C H m � L 0 2 E o •c co Ea Q coo Z n u7i N �'- ° � 2 ° Z � m 3 °) c�i ° � � L � MIN C m 0 Z N 0 . - a>) W � � Ca °N' !..E .c _c a W Z � ° ° W Ora -D N a) ,° uw •� ° U o ° 3 o a) ea M � ° am � � � � o w E ° C LC a) -0 a) U — W Z 0 •� � ° ca -aQ E Z ° C al ° a0i 0 � o as L O U a) O U C ° ° U Ca U a) m � n cam ° C m v�im 'S � " >- Qo C ca L ° z E > ° L ZS O ° p C Q,� L Z co O co E w U 0 Q ° Q C ° o U ° W I-a O ° H E � w � ca m m ° .- w L N o � _a t, > o m Z ca L U c +. m ° a) O ° ° dom ° m ,2 ° O ca C n. 20 'Lob Q ° a � >, w 00 a) co cam. ENO U U � � c•o z = E14= ° m maa) •o aa)) ° c � 0 � � cc) > °' 0 - - Q0- po U) m -0 a) a -cEN ° o 'm 0012U ° � co U � c0a o ' .� Oa 0 �� 3 0 CO C o ° CO ai4— C 3 � L ° E _c o 0 _0 � W OU E -0 f m 2 C 2 L ° C p ° Y 'L ° a) C t O a O a a) L O N >, a) Q OU O. a C O C a) c o_ 6 (a C o ( i C 0) C O Q > ° ° 0 p C ° a) Q >+ .0 E ° a) - u) L 3 as O to c"E U) C -a Np uNi N ,rL- O O u. 0 N E . .O a) U a) ,- N 45 Q E U N > W U O 0 •C N ° cu . ._• Z ') O = N �- N N a) ° Uo0 ate ° m ° � ° ° > ° EO � � L ° -O '3 in o Oo � ,Fca � a) N NNE ° E a) -Oa) -0Ho � � °-.a) L 7, � O ° mo N — :� O aim •- H • •- w0co - w C aa)) > U) < En la o ° c°i c_' c°i c E o N C a -t Z N ° m a) a) > m ° -O U co N N O o I C `� -0 C co 'N a) ,_ 00 c OcCa ° o WOC 2 t � � ° ° 3 o � oC ° o0 Cl) m '� °' o) ° o O 0) N L fn p a) .-. co L C L ° C U -0 Co U ca a) Q E Q (� W a) N • 0 0 _c wc~ cn co °- _c CO E -Z o 0 oZ -dw as " 2 E oU >,1 o -� ix 'co Z C) C a) 00 o ° o O_ .0 H Q m C o N ••- U i > L o ° -O > o : - � cCa c ° 0 >>72 aa) mU 3 � E 0 Ce w 8 La CL O L 4-0 + +. Q >> Q O Q a) O Q N >> L L O er3O 11 O p p p) CO � CO D iss O �E QC C jZ Om O 'C CU N O > OC ° C ° < }' ,T a) � ° ml" & ° O (La +. a)` oQ - -- m0Z2OWQ U co ) WU >, ct N ' o E C L C O E O O j N O U ca .0 U 2 U co .6 Ci "a a) b o) L m := "O O 0 U 0E � n 1Ua .� om � '- °� ° ui Cm of C � U � � � 0 ° ° o -0 ° 2E7 Eccoo •54_ 0o = o ° ' O 0 c0a ° .DO E d a c_ 0)-0 - ti o c'i N 0 cYi 0 4 _a cci a H H . U) W IL E O 0 L 0MIC\l .L E w O a) O u) "= ,14 o (o 0 >co .- o V U -0 o s w L > a L co 0 c >, W v p C Q a) OQ C CO O 'C = o c� E c W o U cu z 0 oa Lo U a) = co Cco -- U C o Q a, 0 c a) a) C a ca U s. — Q o > O E co ai a) >' o O c 0� m 7 o C O � O p __ J a) = >O j ._ U _ c u) o)� E ! CO z �, � >— .� oocn coo w1— v) a) o c o W 0 c V L W o 2 L c u) -o o 0 O O O 0 c c a) Z � p U o t W � Z p � o .� � UU oa 00 y � O I- - 0 0 � y c _ W ~ >m O c o > o o cm m CC 'C m ' F— Q \ U O C O O E p OZ G O W a) N — c 0 o Z UCO N U (Z rnW _ m .E � a) a) Cf C(I) LL a-' w e v -0 n Z r. C.) 15 co W Z a) m i W-0 O .- O TZ i Z 7 . - iac I— a) o 0 a) Z� ow mg ~ L � o ° � a'° Z � i z WZ a. ° L O Lli o o ' 2 o> ao U >' Q- La, oo-i . o u) � � Q t CO a o o � oom V c' o � ocw , cem - aE O -cu o W c cnN U) +' LLW v mm tea) ° U i aE O) oc a) cCd c0 Zm dE W 0TD .5 o ,- a .2o .gi c6 Cc Z cr 7u' , Ce 2oU) a LLmQOp c a U U c E inco mo c o (v 00 0 = o m � W 2 O c a .) a) a) u' —I>' O co U W O m 4- (a EC O CO e Q •' o •CZ Lw 20 F- 00 . E 0 — +' oI— C VUc 0 0 LW a)U W >, CO CV Q JCr-) i O o o ZU Lii ct (0 a 3 Oa) 0 cn ' as O 7 E m L E > >� N U oE � c ...- CZ in _c a 0 a) o O a) __ L- c ° o 0 � - rn � r CAF r L � o Lri5 F- >,o co a) c ,�O C 0 W) .- co Y2 ' U W ) a Q ON (Q ~ c m ( (n 1_ J0- O , �-� : a O c - � U te � OZ Q W c a) W 'a 4.-0zro O W O > 0 r(411 a) E (13o U cv .1a5) a) a) E` ,�c E m aa o ' O a U)a) a a , oU Z U CD c c * E LETTER OF INTENT TO BID (MBEIWBE LETTER) According to the Current MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program - 2002, all MBE/WBE Contractors interested in submitting subcontractor quotes on construction projects with goals, MUST submit a LETTER OF INTENT 10 BID to the City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer at least seven (7) days prior to bid opening. The LETTER OF INTENT TO BID must list the specific items which the MBE/WBE Contractor is interested in bidding. Letter should include the following: Name of Project: Your Company Name: Address: Phone: Date: List of Specific items to be bid: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: (Subcontractor's Company Name and authorized signature) Return this LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board 620 Mulberry St. Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 291-4429 Form CCO-5 (06-20-2002) CONTRACT 983 12E - 1 5623 CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS CARTER ELECTRIC 725 Adams Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 232-9808 Pager: (319) 235-4021 Contact: Derrick Carter Specializing in: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR CULPEPPER ELECTRIC 1731 Cottage Grove Avenue Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319) 235-0885 Fax: (319) 236-8177 Contact: Martin Culpepper Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Licensed Electrician Specializing in: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR DANIELS HOME IMPROVEMENT 339 Albany Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 961-1659 Contact: Sammy Daniels Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK, POURED WALLS—ALL TYPES, FOOTINGS, LIGHT DEMOLITION D.C. CORPORATION 426 Beech Street Waterloo,IA 50703 Phone: (319)493-2542 FAX: (319)236-0515 Contact: Terry Phillips Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Iowa DOT, TSB Certified Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTIAL DEMOLITION, CONCRETE PAVING, DRIVEWAYS, TRUCKING (ALL TYPES), GENERAL CONSTRUCTION MBE AND WBE CONTRACTORS CONTRACT 983 13 - 1 5623 GREER'S WORKS 2003 Plainview Street Waterloo,IA 50703 Phone: (319)233-4701 Contact: Willie Greer Specializing in: DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CARPENTRY, ROOFING, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION OLD GREER'S WORKS 2309 Springview Street Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319) 233-2150 Contact: David L. Greer, Sr. Specializing in: ROOFING& GENERAL CONSTRUCTION QUICK CONSTRUCTION 217 Bates Street Waterloo, IA 50703 -- Phone: (319)215-4166 Contact: Leroy Harrington Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION D & D CONSTRUCTION 1124 West Donald Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 961-4208 _ Contact: Darrell E. Caldwell, Sr. Specializing in: ROOFING AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION E. CASTRO ROOFING 702 Riehl Street _ Waterloo, IA 50701 Phone: (319) 215-5683 Contact: Emillio Castro Specializing in: ROOFING, SIDING, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION MBE AND WBE CONTRACTORS CONTRACT 983 13 -2 5623 CERTIFIED WBE CONTRACTORS ATLAS PAINTING, INC.* 911 Sycamore Street P.O. BOX 65 _ Waterloo, IA 50704 Phone: (319)232-9164 Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTING PETERMAN & HAES CARPET ONE* 4003 University Waterloo, IA 50701 Phone: (319)233-6131 Fax: (319) 233-6133 —' Certified: City of Waterloo WBE Email: JR11486@cfu.net Contact: Carol Reese Specializing in: FLOOR COVERING *DENOTES WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE MBE AND WBE CONTRACTORS CONTRACT 983 13 - 3 5623 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS (To be submitted by the Bidder only upon the specific request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa.) All questions must be answered and the date given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Bidder may submit an/ additional information he desires. 1. Name of bidder. 2. Permanent main office address. 3. When organized. 4. If a corporation, when incorporated. 5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm or trade name? 6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing amount of each contract and the appropriate anticipated dates of completion.) 7. General character of work performed by your company. 8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and why? 9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why? 10. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the approximate cost for each, and the month and year completed. 11. List your major equipment available for this contract. 12. Experience in construction work similar in importance to this project. 13. Background and experience of the principal members of your crganization, including the officers. _ 14. Credit available: $ 15. Give bank reference: STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS CONTRACT 983 14 - 1 5623 16. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that may be required by the City of Waterloo, Iowa? 17. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm, or corporation to furnish any information requested by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in verification of the recitals comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. Dated at , this day of , 2020. (Name of Bidder) By: Title: State of ) ) ss: County of ) , being duly sworn deposes and says that he is of (Name of Organization) and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 2020. �- Notary Public My commission expires , STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS CONTRACT 983 14 -2 5623 GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The work covered by this contract consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials and performing all operations, in connection with the FY 2021 LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION PROJECT NO. 5623, Contract 983, as shown on the contract drawings and in accordance with these specifications. The contract drawings, which accompany and form a part of ?:his contract and specifications They have the general title of FY 2021 LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION PROJECT NO. 5623, Contract 983. The drawings are numbered and separately entitled as follows: SHEET NO. PLAN SHEET DESCRIPTION A.01 TITLE SHEET A.02 SYMBOLS, LEGEND, AND GENERAL INFORMATION B.01 QUANTITIES AND REFERENCE INFORMATION B.02 SWPPP B.03 SWPPP DETAILS C.01 OVERALL LAYOUT PLAN C.02 GRADING PLAN C.03 SANITARY PLAN AND PROFILE D.01-D.02 TYPICAL DETAILS E.01 ELECTRICAL LAYOUT E.02 ELECTRICAL LIFT STATION PLAN VIEW E.03 BUILDING ELEVATIONS E.04 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULE E.05-E.06 ELECTRICAL DETAILS S.01 ELECTRICAL LIFT STATION PROFILE The standard specifications of the City of Waterloo are to be used along with the special provisions described herein and shall be considered as part of the contract documents. 2. CONFLICTING SPECIFICATIONS All requirements of other specifications contained in the contract documents which conflict with the provisions of the special provisions will be considered void. 3. DUMPING AREAS Excess material resulting from construction operations shall be he uled to the County Landfill or other area secured by the Contractor and approved by the City Engineer. Rubble, rubbish, trees, brush, and other unsuitable backfill material, as designated by GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 983 15 - 1 5623 the City Engineer, shall be hauled to the County Landfill. All Landfill charges are to be considered incidental to the contract and are the responsibility of the Contractor. 4. CONSTRUCTION DAMAGE The Contractor shall exercise care during construction operations to ensure the safety and protection to existing features located near or within the limits of construction. Damage caused by negligence or poor workmanship, as determined by the Engineer, shall be considered the Contractor's responsibility. 5. REMOVED MATERIALS All materials removed as part of this Contract shall remain the property of the City unless the City determines that the materials are not salvageable and the City does not want to retain ownership of the materials. Materials designated in the field by the Engineer as non-salvageable shall be hauled and disposed of by the Contractor at no cost to the City. All other materials shall be transported to locations as directed by the Engineer. No separate measurement or payment will be made for hauling or disposing of removed materials and it shall be considered incidental to applicable items. 6. OVERHAUL Overhaul will not be paid for "surplus material" obtained from any of the items of construction under this contract. The cost of overhaul will be considered as incidental to the items to which it applies. 7. MAILBOXES/STOP SIGNS The Contractor shall notify the United States Postal Department of mailboxes, which interfere with any part of the work before removing them, and the Contractor will relocate them as required by the Postmaster. The removal and replacement of mailboxes will not be considered for direct payment, but will be considered incidental to the item to which it applies. The removal and replacement of stop signs will not be considered for direct payment, but will be considered incidental to the item to which it applies. 8. PAY ITEMS All pay items are listed in the proposal and shall include the purchase of all materials, delivery of these materials, and furnishing all labor, plant and miscellaneous work needed to make the item complete. All such cost shall be incidental to the proposed item to which it applies and shall not be considered for separate payment. �. 9. BREAKDOWN OF LUMP SUM CONTRACT PRICE ITEMS The Contractor shall, immediately upon execution and delivery of the contract, before the first estimate for payment is made, deliver to the City Engineer a detailed estimate giving a complete breakdown of the lump sum contract prices. The submitted breakdown shall be approved by the City Engineer prior to any payment of any lump sum price item. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 983 15 - 2 5623 10. PERMISSION TO HAUL OVER STREETS, RAILROADS AND HIGHWAYS The Contractor will be required to secure, from the proper authorities, permission or permit which may be required to haul over streets, highways, railroads or private property, and any hauling operations of the Contractor shall be subject to the requirements of such permits, permission, and to all applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances governing hauling and movement of equipment over streets, railroads, highways and private property. Any costs or inconvenience caused by obtaining any necessary permits or permission shall be considered completely covered by the price bid for the items in the proposal. 11. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING The City Engineer shall approve Contractor's work schedule pricr to starting. All revisions shall also be approved. The City Engineer may change; the schedule to accommodate changing construction conditions. The Contractor shall coordinate the work under this contract with contractors performing work under other contracts which may be performed conc,irrently. The Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Police, Fire, Street and Engineering Departments of the closing and opening of streets. The Contractor shall commence work within ten (10) days after receipt of the "Notice to Proceed" and diligently execute the work of the contract to completion. 12. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Before any work is started, the Contractor shall arrange with the City Engineer to hold a pre-construction conference to discuss problems and schedules of contracts. 13. UNDERGROUND UTILITIES It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the location of gas lines, water lines, electric, telephone, and cable television cables or wires from the various utility — companies and the City electrician before starting any excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any underground utilities. The Contractor shall expose those utilities indicated on the plans so that elevations may be determined before beginning construction. This work shall be considered incidental to other items of work. If the Contractor believes that additional costs have been incurred due to a utility being improperly located, the resolution of the additional costs incurr- d shall be made between the Contractor and the respective utility company. 14. TRAFFIC SIGNS AND STREET SIGNS GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 983 15 - 3 5623 The Contractor shall contact the City of Waterloo Traffic Operations Department to have any street sign that will be affected by construction removed and replaced when the work has been completed. 15. TRAFFIC CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION The Contractor shall, at his own expense and without further or other order, provide, erect and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs or other adequate protection, as required by the latest edition of Part VI of the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" and shall provide, keep and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as may be required or as may be ordered by the Engineer, to ensure the safety of the public as well as those engaged on the work. All barricading plans shall be reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall determine, provide and obtain approval from the City Engineer on all detour locations for all street closings, barricades and posting prior to construction. These shall meet requirements of the City Police Traffic Department. The Contractor shall notify the City Engineer's Office and the Police, Fire and Street Departments when the street is closed for construction. All barricading shall be in accordance with the latest edition of Part VI of the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices." Encapsulated lens sheeting is not required on this project. 16. GRADES, LINES, LEVELS AND SURVEYS All necessary grades, lines, levels and surveys shall be established and maintained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as sown on the drawings, and shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the same to the City Engineer before commencing work. 17. SAFETY OF WORKERS AND PUBLIC The Contractor shall, at all times, take necessary precautions to protect the life and health of all persons employed on this project and the public. He shall provide necessary safety devices and safeguards in accordance with latest and best accident prevention practices. All such protections shall also be furnished to employees without cost. No direct measurement of payment shall be made for this protection, but shall be considered incidental to other items of work. The public shall be kept outside of any work area. 18. CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT Section IX "Construction Equipment" of the "Specifications for Concrete Paving, Widening, and Curb and Gutter" of the Standard Specifications for Municipal Public Works Construction, City of Waterloo, Iowa, shall be amended as follows: GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 983 15 -4 5623 Iowa Department of Transportation standard specification Section 2301.07 Construction Equipment For Portland Cement Concrete Pavement shall apply with the following exception to Section 2301.07.A.7.b Finishing Machine: The first sentence shall read as "A finishing machine will be required on all uniform width slabs ten (10) feet or more in width upon which a continuous line of forms more than one hundred fifty (150) feet in length may be set, except for intersections or otherwise approved by the Engineer." 19. WORKING ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing forty-eight (48) hours in advance if work on Saturday is planned. By noon the Friday before the planned Saturday work, the Contractor shall confirm the Saturday work schedule with the project inspector. Work on Sunday requires prior approval of the Engineer in accordance with the Waterloo Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall not work the following days in 2020 due to City holidays: November 26-27 (Thanksgiving), and December 24-25 (Christmas). The Contractor shall not work the following days in 2021 due to City holidays: January 1, January 18, May 31, July 5, September 6, November 11, November 25-26 (Thanksgiving), and December 24-25 (Christmas). GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 983 15 - 5 5623 SPECIAL PROVISIONS PAYMENT, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AND PENALTIES 1. TRAFFIC CONTROL The Engineer, or authorized representative, shall periodically review traffic control that has been put in place by the Contractor. If traffic control devices are found to be without proper maintenance, penalties shall be assessed Improper maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, the following situaticns: A. Less than 100 percent of lights in working order. B. Any barricade or sign moved or tipped over. C. Fencing not supported in a vertical position. D. Fencing not placed around excavations when workers/equipment aren't working. E. Lack of proper barricades or signage. Each incident is treated as a separate citation on an individual basis. It is not intended that minor deficiencies be price adjusted if corrected the day notification is given. In addition to a price adjustment, the Engineer may suspend work for irresponsible and/or repeated failure to construct the project using proper traffic control procedures. Penalties: 1st Offense Written warning given by City. 2nd Offense $ 100 3rd Offense $ 250 4th Offense $ 500 5th Offense $1,000 6th Offense Engineer's discretion (amount or more equal or greater than $1,000) 2. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to completion. If the work is not completed within the specified contract period, plus authorized extensions, the Contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount of $500.00 per day, for each day, as further described herein, in excess of the authorized time. Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages will be charged will be working days that the Contractor does, or could have worked from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be counted only if work s performed. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT 983 16- 1 Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not chargeable for Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sundays, if no work is done, and legal holidays. Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list items do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra work orders. When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract extends beyond the normal construction season for such work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing a request that working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed the following construction season. This amount is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the cost to the City of providing the required additional inspection, engineering and contract administration. MISCELLANEOUS 3. HAUL ROUTES Haul routes to and from the project site will be submitted for review by the Engineer. In general, the Contractor will request haul routes over the main streets in the area, staying on streets within the project as much as possible and should not include truck-embargoed streets. 4. MATERIAL STORAGE The construction area must be kept clear of all materials and equipment except those that are in use at any given time. Excess materials and equipment must be stored in an area approved by the Engineer, prior to being placed there. 5. PERCENT OF CONTRACT TO BE PERFORMED BY PRIME CONTRACTOR The Prime Contractor shall be required to perform at least 30 percent of the total contract amount of this project. Purchasing of materials for subcontractors will not be an acceptable method for the prime contractor to meet the 30 percent requirement. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT 983 16- 2 SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS TO THE SUDAS SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS AND COVENANTS 1010 — 1090 In lieu of SUDAS Division 1, GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS -=OR CONSTRUCTION, CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA, DEPARTMENT OF ENGINEERING shall apply, which are included in the contract documents for this project. DIVISION 2 — EARTHWORK 2010, 1.08, D, 1 Topsoil shall be stripped to a depth of 12". 2010, 1.08, E Excavation shall be Class 10 and a shrinkage factor of 1.3 v.as used in tabulating the earthwork values. 2010, 3.07, A, 2 Areas requiring subgrade treatment shall be determined by she Engineer. 2010, 3.08, B Subbase shall be a granular material at a depth of 6" under 'he street paving. 2010, 3.09, A Compaction testing shall be provided by the Engineer on all utility trenches. DIVISION 3 —TRENCH AND TRENCHLESS CONSTRUCTION 3010, 1.08, F Engineer shall provide trench compaction testing. SECTION 4010-SANITARY SEWERS — 4010, 1.08, A Testing and inspection will be performed by City of Waterloo:, Iowa, personnel. 4010, 1.08, A, 1, c The following are included in the pipe unit price or applicably-: items: • Removal and disposal of existing pipe when 4 (four) fee' or less horizontally from the existing pipe • Collars at any existing to new pipe connections (main or services) or at manholes. • Bypass pumping and traffic control related to bypass pumping • Installation of temporary storm sewer to reestablish storm sewer that has been removed/impacted by sanitary sewer construction • Record the location, depth and type of material for each water service crossed • Cleaning the sanitary sewer main prior to City televising as needed 4010, 1.08, E Sanitary sewer service connections to existing live services shall be connected to existing at a minimum of 5 (five)feet back of curb line. New stubs shall be extended to minimum of 5 (five) feet back of curb line and capped water tight. The end of the service stub shall be marked with a 5 (five) foot long standard metal T post. SUPPLEMENTAL SUDAS SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT 983 17 - 1 5623 4010, 2.01, A, 1 C. Corrugated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) shall be used for diameters 18" and larger. E. Polyvinyl Chloride Composite Pipe (truss type PVC) shall be used for diameters 8"-15". 4010, 2.04, A PVC Main 1.a and 1.c apply. No Inserta Tees®, or equal, may be used. 4010, 2.04, B PVC Composite Main 1 a. applies. 4010, 3.02, B ADD THE FOLLOWING ITEMS 8. Where the new service line meets the existing, the Contractor shall install a FERNCO (or equal) coupling and construct a concrete collar. Backfill of the coupling and collar shall not occur until the concrete collar has hardened sufficiently to prevent deformation of the concrete. 9. When connecting to existing truss pipe, a truss to truss double bell fitting shall be used. 10. Provisions shall be made for maintaining sewerage flow in all "upstream" sections of the system 11. The contractor shall take appropriate measures to prohibit ground water, rain water, etc. from entering the pipe. If this does occur and the pipe becomes dirty, the contractor shall be required to clean the pipe at his expense prior to the City televising the line. 12. If the City needs to clean the line prior to televising, the contractor will be billed for the same, with payment for pipe withheld until the City is paid. 13. The contractor shall install temporary storm sewer to reestablish the storm sewer that is removed/impacted by the sanitary sewer construction, which is incidental to applicable items. 14. The Contractor constructing the main shall be responsible for locating and marking the locations of existing service lines. Dye testing or tracing may be required to determine service line locations or the existence of shared service lines. Dye testing and tracing, if required, will be paid on a per each basis. 15. The permanent connection of the sanitary sewer service lines shall be constructed with the sanitary main construction so that the service connections (tap and tee or wye construction) and a minimum of five (5)feet of the service line are constructed as the sanitary main is constructed. The Contractor may reconstruct the entire required length of the service line at the time of main construction. If any existing water services are damaged or broken while performing work under this item, renewal shall be at Contractor's expense. SUPPLEMENTAL SUDAS SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT 983 17 - 2 5623 — 16. Services to all properties adjacent to and/or served by the sanitary sewer reconstruction, must be verified by the Contractor(s). Upon completion of the sanitary sewer reconstruction, the Contractor shall contact the City Waste Management Department (291-4553) to request televising of the sewer. Any service connections missed shall be reconnected by the contractor with the City paying for only those items originally needed for the installation. 4010, 3.02, B Trenched sanitary sewer shall use a laser system for line ar i grade with hubs a minimum of 50 (fifty) feet to check line and grade. 4010, 3.06, A Premade Tees and Wyes are required on 8 inch diameter through 15 inch diameter sanitary mains. Connect to existing sanitary services a minimum of 5 (five) feet from the back of curb or as directed in the field by the Engineer depending on the depth of the service. New siubs are to be extended to a minimum of 5 (five) feet from the back of curb or as directed in the field by the Engineer depending on the depth of the service, to a location to prevent undermining of the paving vA hen service is extended in the future. DIVISION 4— SEWERS AND DRAINS SECTION 4060-CLEANING, INSPECTION AND TESTING OF SEWERS 4060 Cleaning is required by the contractor and is incidental to applicable items. Testing and Inspection will be done by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, Engineering Department. DIVISION 5 -WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES 5010, 2.07, B Water services shall be Class 52 ductile iron pipe. -- 5010, 3.01, A, 3 All water main shall be installed at a minimum of 6.0 feet bury depth as shown on the plan sheets. DIVISION 6— STRUCTURES FOR SANITARY AND STORM SEWERS SECTION 6010 - STRUCTURES FOR SANITARY AND STORM SEWERS 6010, 1.08, D Casting Extension Rings will be considered incidental to manhole and intake construction. 6010, 1.08, E Manhole or Intake Adjustment, Minor will be considered inci:iental to manhole and intake construction. 6010, 1.08, G When connecting to an existing manhole, core or cut in the existing manhole or intake, pipe connectors, grout, and waierstop (when required). SUPPLEMENTAL SUDAS SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT 983 17 - 3 5623 6010, 2.05, B, 2, b 6010, 2.05, B, 1 a is acceptable; Engineering Fabric Wrap shall not be used. DIVISON 11 - MISCELLANEOUS SECTION 11,030 —TEMPORARY SERVICES DURING CONSTRUCTION 11,020 1.08, A The movement of personnel, equipment, and supplies to the project site; the establishment of offices, buildings, and other facilities necessary for the project; and bonding, permits, and other expenses incurred prior to construction. SUPPLEMENTAL SUDAS SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT 983 17 - 4 5623 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Department of Engineering SECTION A - Definitions of Terms SECTION B - Scope of work SECTION C - Control of Materials and Work SECTION D - Procedure and Progress SECTION E - Measurements and Payments SECTION F - Legal Relations and Responsibility SECTION A - DEFINITIONS OF TERMS 1. CITY. The City of Waterloo, Iowa, which is the Party cf the First Part of the accompanying contract, acting through its authorized representative. 2. COUNCIL. The duly elected Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. 3. ENGINEER. The City Engineer of Waterloo, Iowa, or his authorized representative. 4. INSPECTOR. The authorized representative of the Engineer, assigned to the detailed inspection of the work or materials therefor aid to such other duties as may be delegated to him in these specifications. 5. CONTRACTOR. The Party of the Second Pat in the accompanying contract for the improvement covered by these specifications, or his authorized representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR. Any person, firm, or corporation who has, with the approval of the Council, contracted with the Contractor to e>:ecute and perform in his stead all or any part of the contract. 7. BIDDER. Any individual, firm, or corporation submitting a proposal for all or a part of the work provided for in these specifications. 8. PROPOSAL GUARANTEE. The security designed in the Notice of Bidders or Proposal to be furnished by the bidder as a guarantee of good faith to enter into a contract and furnish an acceptable bond for the work contemplated if it be awarded him. 9. SURETY. The corporate body bound with and for the Contractor for the acceptable performance of the contract. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 1 10. PROPOSAL. The written Proposal, submitted by the bidder in the prescribed manner and on the standard form, for the improvements covered by these specifications. 11. SPECIFICATIONS. The documents that set forth the manner in which the proposed work is to be accomplished which have been prepared by the Engineer and approved by the City Council, official copies of which are now on file with the City Clerk. 12. SPECIAL PROVISIONS. Clauses or memoranda not contained herein, applying to the contract of which these specifications are a part, which change or supplement these specifications. 13. CONTRACT. The agreement entered into between the City and the Contractor, setting forth the terms under which the work covered by the plans and specifications is to be performed. The contract includes all conditions, definitions, and instructions set forth in the official publications relating to the work, the official contract and specifications, the Proposal, official plans, and all supplemental agreements entered into by the parties to the contract. 14. NOTICE TO BIDDERS. The notice called attention of bidders to the time and place for receiving bids, containing a brief description of the work, and briefly setting forth the requirements and conditions for submission of Proposals. 15. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. The clauses setting forth in detail the information relative to the proposed work and requirements for the submission of Proposals. 16. PLANS. The plans for the improvement covered by the specifications and approved by the Council, official copies of which are on file with the City Clerk. 17. CONTRACT BOND. The bond executed by the Contractor and his surety in favor of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, guaranteeing the complete execution of the contract in accordance with the plans and specifications, the payment of all debts pertaining to the work, and maintenance of the work as provided by law or by the specifications. 18. CONTRACT PERIOD. The period from the specified date for beginning the work to the specified date of completion, both dates inclusive. The contract period may be extended by the Council, as provided in these specifications, in which event the contract period includes the new date of completion. 19. OFFICIAL PUBLICATIONS. The official publications are the formal resolutions and notices relative to the proposed improvement that are required by law to be published in a prescribed manner and that have actually GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 -2 been published in accordance with the statutes relating thereto. Attention is directed to the fact that these official publications are by statute vested with all of the force and effect of contract obligations. 20. A.S.T.M. Abbreviation for American Society for Testing Materials. 21. WORK. The term "Work" of the Contractor and Subcontractor includes labor or materials or both, equipment, transportation, or other facilities necessary to complete the contract. 22. TIME. All time limits stated in the contract documents are of the essence in the contract. SECTION B - SCOPE OF WORK 1. CORRELATION AND INTENT OF DOCUMENTS. The Contract documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. The intention of the documents is to include all labor, materials, equipment, and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the work. Materials or work described in words which, so applied, have a well-known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standard. 2. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. Unless otherwise provided in the contract documents, the engineer shall furnish to the Contractor, free of charge, all copies of drawings and specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the work. The Contractor shall keep one (1) copy of all drawings and specifications on the work available to the Engineer and to his representatives. 3. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature, character and location of the work, the conformance to the ground, the character, quality, and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of the equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can, in any way, affect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the City, either before or after the execution of the Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4. REPORTING ERRORS AND DISCREPANCIES. If the Contractor, in the course of the work, finds any discrepancies between the plans and the physical conditions of the locality, or any errors of omission in plans or in the layout as given by said stakes and instructions, it shall be his duty to inform the Engineer immediately, in writing, and the Engineer shall promptly :affect the same. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 3 5. ALTERATION OR CORRECTION OF PLANS. The plans are made up from surveys that are presumably correct and represent the foreseen construction requirements. Any modification of the plans which may be required by the exigencies of the construction or any corrections made necessary because of errors in the original surveys, will be made by the Engineer. Should corrections or modifications of the plans or specifications require a different quality or class of work than that upon which the unit prices in the Proposal are based, or if the modifications or corrections are required in parts of the work partially completed and such modifications result in an increased cost to the Contractor, the amount to be paid for work resulting from such changes shall be agreed upon in writing at the time the changes are ordered and before the work is begun by the Contractor. No allowance will be made for anticipated profits on work not performed. 6. CHANGES IN THE WORK. The City, without invalidating the contract, may order extra work or make changes by altering, adding to, or deducting from the work, the contract sum being adjusted by agreement or arbitration before such changed work is undertaken. All such work shall be executed under the conditions of the original contract, except that any claim for extension of time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change. 7. INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES. The right is reserved without impairing the contract, to order the performance of such work of a class not contemplated in the Proposal or to increase or decrease the quantities as may be considered necessary to complete fully and satisfactorily the work included in the contract. However, when the work is completed without change in the plans, and the measured quantity of any item of work varies by more than twenty percent (20%) from the estimated quantity specified in the contract, an adjustment in price may be made for such item of work by agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor, subject to the approval of the City Council. Either party to the contract may request such an adjustment. 8. LANDS AND RIGHT OF WAY. The City shall provide the lands upon which the work under this contract is to be done, except that the Contractor shall provide land required for the erection of temporary construction facilities and storage of his material, together with the right of access to same. 9. CITY WATER. The Contractor shall be allowed to use City Water but before any water is used, he shall make application to the Waterloo Water Works for a temporary water connection from a fire hydrant or by some other connection method. Water usage will be charged at the rate for temporary water service. The rules, regulations, and water rates are available at the Waterloo Water Works offices at 325 Sycamore Street or their telephone number is 319- 232-6280. 10. RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS. Whenever work being done by the City's forces or by other Contractors is contiguous to work covered by this GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 -4 contract, the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be established by the Engineer to secure the completion of the various portions of the work in general harmony. 11. CLOSING STREETS TO TRAFFIC. The Engineer shall be the judge of how many streets or parts of streets it is necessary for the Coltractor to close at any time and may refuse to permit the closing of additional streets until such of the work is finished and opened to traffic as he may direct. 12. OBSTRUCTION OF STREETS. The work is to be carried on in such manner as to obstruct the streets, highways, and alleys as little a , possible. The Contractor shall carry on the different parts of the work so as to complete the whole, as nearly as practicable, at the same time. In doing the work, the Contractor shall follow the directions of the Engineer as to the place or places where work shall be started or be carried on and the direction in which it shall be done. 13. SHANTIES AND BUILDINGS. Shanties or other buildings shall not be erected in or upon any street, highway, or alley without permission of the Engineer. If such permission be granted, it may be upon any reasonable terms prescribed by the person or body granting such permission. 14. SANITARY CONVENIENCES. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary sanitary conveniences, properly secluded, for the laborers on the work, and these shall be maintained in a manner that will be inoffensive to the public. 15. CLEANING UP. The Contractor shall, as directed by the Engineer, remove from the City's property and from all public and private property, at his own expense, all temporary structures, rubbish, and waste materials resulting from his operations before work can be considered completed. The Contractor shall also renew or replace any and all fences, sidewalks, or other property damaged or disturbed by his work. 16. OMISSION OF PARTS OF GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. Parts of the General Specifications deemed not to apply to some particular work may be omitted by special reference in other parts of the contract documents. SECTION C - CONTROL OF MATERIALS AND WORK 1. SUPERVISION AND INSPECTION. The Engineer shall have supervision of the construction provided for in this Contract and shall decide any and all questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of materials - furnished, work performed, manner of performance, rate of progress on the work, and all questions regarding the acceptable fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. Materials and construction work shall, at all times, be subject to the inspection of the Engineer or his representatives. The Contractor shall be held strictly to the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 5 true intent of these specifications as regards the quality of materials, workmanship, and the diligent prosecution of the work. The Engineer and his representatives shall, at all times, have access to _ the work wherever it is in preparation of progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspection. If the specifications, the Engineer's instructions, law ordinances, or any public authority require any work and/or materials to be especially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Engineer timely notice of readiness for inspection. If the inspection is to be made by authority other than the Engineer, the Contractor shall notify the engineer of the date fixed for inspection. Inspections by the Engineer will be promptly made and, where practicable, at the source of supply. If any work should be covered up without the approval or consent of the Engineer, it must, if required by the Engineer, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense. Re-examination of questioned work may be ordered by the Engineer, and, if so ordered, the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be found in accordance with the Contract, the City shall pay the cost of re- examination and replacement. If such work be found not in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay such cost unless he shall show that the defect in the work was caused by another Contractor, and, in that event, the City shall pay the cost. 2. AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF INSPECTORS. Inspectors may be stationed on the work to report to the Engineer as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is being performed; also, to report whenever it appears that materials furnished and work performed by the Contractor fail to fulfill the requirements of the specifications and Contract, and to direct the attention of the Contractor to such failure or infringement; but such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligations to furnish acceptable materials or to provide completed construction that is satisfactory in every particular. In case of any dispute arising between the Inspector and the Contractor as to materials furnished or the manner of performing the work, the Inspector shall have the authority to reject materials or suspend the work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. Inspectors are not authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, relax, or release any requirements of these specifications. The Inspector shall, in no case, act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor, or interfere with the management of the work by the latter. 3. STATUS OF THE ENGINEER. The Engineer shall have general supervision and direction of the work. He has authority to stop the work GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 6 whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the Contract. He shall also have authority to reject any work and/or materials which do not conform to the specifications, to direct the application of forces to any portion of the work as, in his judgment, is required, and to order the force increased or diminished, and to decide questions which arise in the e>ecution of the work. 4. ENGINEER'S DECISIONS. The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time, make decisions on all claims of the Contractor and cn all other matters relating to the execution and progress of the work or the intern,retation of the contract documents. All such decisions of the Engineer shall be final except as to the element of time and financial consideration involved, which, if no agreement in regard thereto is reached, shall be subject to arbitration. 5. STAKES AND INSTRUCTIONS. The Contractor shall provide reasonable and necessary opportunities and facilities for setting stakes and making measurements. The Contractor shall not furnish stakes or men to set them. He shall not proceed until he has received from the Engineer such stakes and instructions as may be necessary to the progress of the work. The Contractor shall carefully preserve bench marks, reference points, — and stakes, and in case of willful or careless destruction, he shall be charged with the resulting extra expense and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be caused, by their loss or disturbance. 6. SUPERINTENDENCE. The Contractor shall keep on his work during its progress a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Engineer. The Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Engineer, unless the Superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence, and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important decisions shall be confirmed in writing to the Contractor. Other directions shall be so - confirmed on written request in each case. The Contractor shall give efficient supervision to the work usir g his best skill and attention. He shall carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications, and other instructions, and shall report at once to the Engineer any error, inconsistency, or omission which he may discover. 7. REMOVAL OF UNAUTHORIZED WORK. Work done without lines and grade being given, work done beyond lines shown on the plans or as given, except as herein provided, or any extra or additional work done without authority, will be considered as unauthorized and at the expense of the Contractor and will not be paid for under the provisions of the Contract. Work so done may be — ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 7 8. REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORK. The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all materials condemned by the engineer as failing to conform to the Contract; whether incorporated in the work or not, and the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute his own work in accordance with the contract and without expense to the City, and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. If the Contractor does not remove such condemned work and materials within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice, the City may remove them and may store the material at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expense of such removal within a reasonable time thereafter, the City may, upon ten (10) days' written notice, sell such materials at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs and expense that should have been borne by the Contractor; or, if the net proceeds of such sale are insufficient to pay the expenses of removal, the City may deduct the balance from any amounts due the Contractor. 9. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, APPLIANCES, AND FACILITIES. Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, water, tools, equipment, light, power, transportation, and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work. Materials shall be of the quality specified for each particular part of the work. Whenever, in construction of the work or in the manufacture of any article of appliance necessary for the construction or operation of the work, it is necessary to use any material that is not fully specified in these specifications, it shall be of good quality and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. Any appliance that is necessary for the construction or operation of the work and is commonly recognized as a part of the work, shall be furnished by the Contractor as part of the work, whether or not it is specifically called for in the plans and specifications, and such appliance shall be of good quality and standard make and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. 10. MATERIAL SAMPLES. Before the contract is awarded, the bidder may be required to furnish a statement of the origin, composition, and manufacture of any and all materials proposed for use in the performance of the Contract, together with samples of the material. These samples will be considered as representative and typical of the material to be obtained from any particular source. 11. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN AND EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall employ competent and efficient workmen for every kind of work. Any person employed on the work who shall refuse or neglect to obey the directions of the engineer or Inspector, or who shall be deemed incompetent or disorderly, or who shall commit trespass upon public or private property in the vicinity of the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 8 work, shall be dismissed when the Engineer so orders, and shall not be re- employed unless express permission be given by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce discipline and good order among his employees. The methods, equipment, and appliances used on the work, and the labor employed, shall be such as will produce a satisfactory quality of work and shall be adequate to complete the contract within the specified time limit. 12. HIRING CITY EMPLOYEES. The Contractor shall not employ and hire any of the City's employees without the permission of the Engineer 13. LABOR. Local labor shall be given preferences ,,o far as practicable. 14. THE CITY'S RIGHT TO DO WORK. If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this Contract, the City of Waterloo, after three (3) days' written notice to the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor, provided, however, that the Engineer shall approve both such action and the amount charged to the Contractor. SECTION D - PROCEDURE AND PROGRESS 1. ORDER OF COMPLETION - USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS. The Contractor shall complete any portion or portions of the work in su,:.h order or time as the Engineer may require. The City shall have the rig.it to take possession of and use completed or partially completed portion of the work at any time, but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of work so taken or used, or any part thereof. If suchprior use increases the cost of or delays the work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as the Eng leer may determine. -- 2. WEATHER. During stormy or inclement weather, all work shall be suspended, except such as can be done in an acceptable manner. Permission to work during freezing, stormy, or inclement weather shall in no way be construed as a release of the Contractor's responsibility regarding the quality of the finished work at such time. 3. SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS. Except for such work as may be required to properly maintain or protect completed or partially completed construction or to maintain lights and barricades, no work will be permitted on — Sundays or legal holidays without specific permission of the Engineer. 4. DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME. If the Contractor be delayed in the completion of the work by an act of neglect of the City, or its GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 -9 employees; or by any other Contractor employed by the City; or by changes ordered in the work; or by strikes, lockouts, fire, unusual delays in transportation, unavoidable casualties, or any cause beyond the Contractor's control; or by delay authorized by the Engineer pending arbitration; or by any cause which the Engineer shall decide justifies the delay, then the time of completion shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Engineer may decide will compensate for such delay. No such extension shall be made for delay occurring more than thirty (30) days before claim therefor is made in writing to the Engineer. In the case of a continuing cause of delay, only one claim is necessary. This article does not exclude the recovery of damages for delay by either party under provisions in the contract documents. 5. TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK. The Engineer shall have authority to suspend the work, wholly or in part, for such period or periods of time as he may deem necessary, due to unsuitable weather or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for the suitable prosecution of the work, or for such time as is necessary due to the failure to the Contractor to carry out orders given or to perform any or all provisions of the Contract. 6. NOTICES - HOW SERVED. Any notice to be given by the City to the Contractor under this contract shall be deemed to be served if the same be delivered to the person in charge of any office used by the Contractor or foreman or agent at or near the work, or deposited in the post office, postpaid, or emailed, addressed to the Contractor at his last known place of business. 7. PROGRESS OF WORK. The progress of the work shall be such that, at the expiration of one-fourth (1/4) of the contract period, one-eighth (1/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of one-half (1/2) of the contract period, three-eighths (3/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of three-fourths (3/4) of the contract period, the work shall be three-fourths (3/4) completed, and the whole work shall be completed at the expiration of the contract period. If, at any time the above schedule is not being maintained, the Council may give written notice to the Contractor and his sureties that the specifications are not being complied with. Such notice shall state what action on the part of the Contractor is required to bring the work within the requirements of the specifications. If the Contractor fails, within ten (10) days, to proceed as directed in the said notice, then the Council shall have authority to annul this contract without process or action at law and take over the prosecution and completion of the work, as provided under the article covering City's right to terminate contract. 8. CITY'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT. If the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt; or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of this creditor; or if a Receiver should be appointed on account of his GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 10 insolvency; or if he should persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough skilled workmen or proper materials; or if he should fail to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor; or if he should persistently disregard laws, ordinances, or the instructions of the Engineer; or if he should otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the contract, then the City, upon the certificate of the Engineer that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedy, and after giving the Contractor seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools and appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever method he nay deem expedient. In such cases, the Contractor shall not be entitled to rE-ceive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the e)penses of finishing the work, including compensation for additional managerial and administration services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractoy. If such — expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the City. The expense incurred by the City as herein prcvided and the damage incurred through the Contractor's default shall be certif ed by the Engineer. 9. REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT. In the case of annulmtmnt of this contract before completion, from any cause whatsoever, the Contractor, if notified to do so by the City; shall promptly remove any part or all of his equipment and supplies from the property of the City, failing which, the City shall have the right to remove such equipment and supplies at the expense of the Contractor. SECTION E - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT 1. STANDARD OF MEASUREMENT. All work completed under the contract shall be measured by the Engineer according to the Uni:ed States standard measures. 2. SCOPE OF PAYMENTS. The Engineer's measurements of quantities shall be the basis for final payment for the work performed under this Contract. After the work is completed, the Engineer will make measurements and computations of the number of units of each of the various items of work completed, and the Contractor will be paid for the actual amount of work performed at the rates specified in his Proposal. Before final settlement is made, the Council may require the Contractor to submit a list of all persons furnishing labor or materials, with evidence that such persons have been paid in full. -- Payment shall be made in the manner set forth in official publications and Council Proceedings relative thereto. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 11 3. PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK. Such extra work as may have been ordered by the Engineer and performed by the Contractor shall be compensated for as provided herein. If work is to be done or materials are to be furnished by the Contractor which cannot properly be classified under unit prices included in the Proposal, the Contractor shall be paid therefor the actual reasonable cost of the labor and materials entering permanently in such work, plus fifteen percent (15%) of the cost thereof. In computing the labor cost on such extra work, the following items shall be included: (a) Actual payroll expenditures for labor at the current rate therefor, and cost of materials. (b) Pay of foreman and timekeepers for actual time required on the extra work. (c) Liability insurance, prorated, for the extra work. Labor cost items on extra work shall be furnished in duplicate by the Contractor to the Inspector daily. The Inspector shall check the items, and if he finds them to be correct, he shall so certify on the statement of cost, returning one copy to the Contractor and filing one copy with the Engineer. The Engineer shall determine the cost of materials entering into extra work from the materials and receipted freight bills for the same. For any special machine, power tools, or equipment, including fuel and lubricants, but not including small hand tools, which may be deemed necessary or desirable to use, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable rental thereon, to be agreed upon in writing by the Engineer before such work is begun, and to which sum no percentage is to be added. The item of cost shall not include repairs or replacement of equipment or overhead expenses of any character. The fifteen percent (15%) allowed is considered to cover the use of hand tools and all overhead expenses except liability insurance. In no case will a claim for extra compensation be allowed unless the work upon which the claim is based has been ordered in writing, except as provided hereinafter. 4. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST. If the Contractor claims that any instructions, by drawings or otherwise, involved extra cost under this contract, he shall give the Engineer written notice thereof within ten (10) days after completion of the work. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 12 5. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COMPENSATION. If the Contractor deems that extra compensation is due him for work and/or materials that he considered is not clearly covered in the items for which he submitted unit prices in his bid and that were not ordered in writing by the Engineer as an extra s heretofore provided, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, of his intention to make claim for extra compensation for work and/or material before starting construction. If such written notification is not given or the Engineer is not afforded proper facilities by the Contractor for keeping strict account of actual cost as defined herein, then the Contractor hereby agrees to waive the claim for extra compensation. Such notice to the engineer and the fact that the Engineer has kept account of cost as aforesaid, shall not in any way be construed as proving the validity of the claim, which must be passed upon by the Council. In the event that the Council finds the claim to be just, it shall be allowed and paid for as extra work as provided herein. 6. COMPLETION REPORT AND OBJECTIONS THERETO. Within ten (10) days after the full completion of the work to be done under this contract, the Engineer shall make a written statement of all the work done by the Contractor hereunder, stating the quantity of each item as found by him and including a statement of all credits for extra work and all credits or debits for changes, alterations, omissions, and defects, and shall forthwith deliver a copy of such statement to the Contractor. The Contractor shall compare such statement with his own records and shall then, in writing, either approve such statement or point out any claimed errors or omissions. If any of such claims are found correct, the Engineer shall, within ten (10) days, prepare a new statement, a copy of which shall in like manner be delivered unto the Contractor. The Engineer will not file a formal completion report with the City until the Contractor has approved the same. If the figures of the Engineer and the Contractor cannot be reconciled, or there is a difference of opinion regarding some item or items, then such difference of opinion shall be submitted to arbitration as hereinafter provided, and the decision of the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and the Engineer shall, within a period of five (5) days, file his completion report. Before action by the City Council upon such completion report, the Contractor shall also file a written statement of any claims he may have against the City, other than those shown by such completion report, growing out of this contract or the work done hereunder. The City shall retain ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Contractor on the completion report for a period o+ thirty (30) days. If no claims are filed against the Contractor within thirty (30) days, the final ten percent (10%) shall then be paid to the Contractor. 7. WAIVER. By the execution of this contract ,the Contractor agrees that any objections he may have to the statement of the amount of work done hereunder included by the Engineer in this completion report, and any claims of the Contractor against the City growing out of this contract and the work done hereunder which are not stated in writing in the manner and within the time GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 13 provided in Article 6, Section E hereof, shall be waived, and no such claim shall thereafter be asserted against the City. SECTION F - LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES 1. LAWS RELATING TO WORK. The Contractor is presumed to be familiar with all laws, ordinances, and regulations which may, in any manner, affect those engaged or employed upon the work or the materials or equipment used in or upon the work, and shall conduct the work so as not to conflict with such laws, ordinances, and regulations. 2. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY. The Contractor for any part of the improvement shall be held responsible for the care of materials and of partially completed and completed work until final acceptance of the same by the Council. He will be required to make good at his own expense any damage which the work may sustain from any cause prior to the filing of the engineer's certificate of completion. He shall take all risk from floods and casualties of every description and make no charge for delay due to such cause. He may, however, be allowed a reasonable extension of time on account of such delays. He shall correct or make good at his own expense all damages to adjacent property due to the acts or negligence of his employees of the prosecution of his work, and save the City harmless therefor. The Contractor shall be held liable and responsible for all damages done to water, sewer, drain, or other underground pipes and structures, and to sidewalks and private property. 3. RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCIDENTS. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damages sustained by persons or property due to the carrying on of his work until final acceptance thereof, or until released by the Engineer in writing. 4. LIABILITY INSURANCE. The Contractor shall carry liability insurance which shall save the City harmless and protect the public and any person from injury sustained by the reason of the prosecution of the work or the handling or storing of materials therefor, and said Contractor shall also carry liability insurance which shall meet the requirements of the Iowa Worker's Compensation Law. Before work shall be started on this contract, the Contractor shall furnish the City Clerk with proper affidavit or Affidavits executed by representatives of duly qualified insurance companies, evidencing that said insurance company or companies have issued liability insurance policies, effective during the life of the contract, or for a period of a least ten (10) days following the filing of written notice of cancellation, protecting the public and any person from injuries or damages sustained by reason of carrying on the work involved in the Contract. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 14 The affidavit shall specifically evidence the following forms of insurance protection: (a) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by persons directly employed by the Contractor. (b) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by any Subcontractor to whom a portion of the work may have been assigned. (c) Public liability insurance covering all work upon the project performed by any independent Contractor working under the direction of either the principal Contractor or a Subcontractor. (d) Motor vehicle bodily injury liability insurance and properly damage liability insurance on all motor vehicles employed on the work, whether owned by the Contractor or by other persons firms, or corporations. (e) The minimum protection shall be as follows: Comprehensive General Liability Insurance General Aggregate Limit $ 2,000,0i)0.00 Products—Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $ 5,000,000.00 Each Occurrence Limit $ 5,000,000.00 Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance $ 1,000,000.00 The Contractor shall have the City of Waterloo, Iowa, named as an "Additional Named Insured". A certificate, or a policy if requested, shall be filed with the Owner. All certificates and/or policies of insurance furnished by the Contractor to be filed with the City Clerk shall include the name and address of the agency issuing the same. It shall also be required that the City Clerk be notified by registered mail of the cancellation or expiration of the above insurance. 5. BARRICADES AND SIGNS. The Contractor shall, at his own expense and without further or other order, provide, erect, and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs, or other adequate protection, as required by the latest edition of the "Iowa Manual on �- Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways" and shall provide, GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 15 keep, and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as may be required or as may be ordered by the City Engineer, to insure the safety of the public as well as those engaged on the work. All barricading plans shall be approved by the City Engineer. 6. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the City harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the City shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or the product of a particular manufacturer is specified. _ 7. PERMITS AND REGULATIONS. Permits and licenses of a temporary nature for the prosecution of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Permits, license, and easements for permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and paid for by the City. 8. CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES. Any claim for damages arising under this Contract shall be made in writing to the party liable within a reasonable time of the first observance of such damage and no later than the time of final payment, except as expressly stipulated otherwise in the case of faulty work or materials, and shall be adjusted by agreement or arbitration. The Contractor shall be held for the payment of all just claims against him arising out of the prosecution of this contract, and his bond will not be released until such claims are paid for dismissed. 9. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT. The Contractor shall not sell or assign the contract or sublet any portion of the work provided for therein without the written consent of the City Council. 10. SUBCONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the signature of the contract, notify the Engineer in writing of the names of the Subcontractors proposed for the work and shall not employ any that the Engineer may, within a reasonable time, object to as incompetent or unfit. The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omission of his Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him. Nothing contained in the contract documents shall create any contractual relation between any Subcontractor and the City. 11. ARBITRATION. All questions subject to arbitration under this Contract shall be submitted to arbitration at the choice of either party to the dispute. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 16 The Contractor shall not cause a delay of the work during any arbitration proceedings, except by agreement with the Engineer. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the Engineer, in the case of an appeal from his decision, within ten (10) days of its receipt, and in any — other case, within a reasonable time after cause thereof, and in no case later than the time of final payment, except as otherwise expressly stipulated in the contract. If the Engineer fails to make a decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the part appealing. No one shall be nominated or act as an arbitrator who is in any way financially interested in the contract or in the business affairs of either the City or the Contractor. The general procedure shall conform to the laws of the State of Iowa. Unless otherwise provided by such laws, the parties may agree upon one arbitrator; otherwise, there shall be three--one named in writing by each party to this contract to the other party, and the third chosen by these two arbitrators, or, if they fail to select a third within ten (10) days, then he shall be chosen by the Comptroller of the State of Iowa. Should either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbitrators with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbitrators are empowered by both parties to proceed ex parte. If there be one arbitrator, his decision shall be binding; if Three, the decision of any two shall be binding. Such decision shall be a condition precedent to any right of legal action, and, wherever permitted by law it may be filed in Court to carry it into effect. The arbitrators, if they deem that the case demands it, are authorized to award to the party whose contention is sustained such sums as they shall deem proper for the time, expense, and trouble incident to the appeal, and, if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, damages for delay, the arbitrators shall fix their own compensation unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbitrators must be in writing, and it shall not be open to objections on account of the form of proceeding or the award, unless otherwise provided by the laws of Iowa. In the event of such laws providing on any matter covered by this article otherwise than as hereinbefore specified, the method of procedure :hroughout and the legal effect of the award shall be wholly in accordance with the laws of the State of Iowa, it being intended hereby to lay down a principle of action to be followed, leaving its local application to be adopted to the legal requirements of the place in which the work is to be done. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 17 12. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS. The Contractor shall, at the time of execution and delivery of this contract and before the taking effect of same, furnish and deliver to the City written bonds of indemnity to the amount required by law in form and substance, and with surety thereon satisfactory and acceptable to the City, to insure the faithful performance and payment by the Contractor of all the covenants and agreements on the part of the Contractor contained in this contract. These bonds shall remain in force and effect for the full amount of the Contract. 13. PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS. In carrying out any of the provisions of the Contract or in exercising any power or authority granted him thereby, there shall be no liability upon the Engineer or his authorized assistants, either personally or as an official of the City, it being understood that in such matters he acts as the agent and representative of the City. 14. JURISDICTION. Any action in Court against the Contractor or sureties on his bond because of damages to property or individuals by said Contractor or his workmen, or because of the violation of any provisions of the specifications, or on account of the failure of said Contractor to comply fully with these provisions, shall be brought in the District Court of the State of Iowa in and for Black Hawk County. 15. TERMINATION OF RESPONSIBILITY. The Contract shall be considered as completed and the Contractor released from further obligations except as to the requirements of his bond, after the work has been completed and finally accepted and final estimates have been allowed and the completion report of the engineer has been filed and approved by the Council. 16. CITY'S LEGAL RIGHTS. The City shall not be precluded by any measurements, estimate, or certificate made, either before or after the completion and acceptance of the work and payment therefor, from showing the true amount and character of the work performed and materials furnished by the Contractor, or from showing that any such measurement, estimate, or certificate is untrue or incorrectly made, or the work or materials do not, in fact, conform to the Contract. The City shall not be precluded, notwithstanding any such measurements, estimate, or certificate and payment in accordance therewith, from recovering from the Contractor and his surety such damages as it may sustain by reason of his failure to comply with the terms of the Contract. Neither the acceptance by the City or any of its representatives, nor any payment for or acceptance of the whole or any part of the work, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the City, shall operate as a waiver on any portion of the contract or of any power herein reserved, or any right to damages herein provided. A waiver of any breach of the contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 983 18 - 18 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 1. SUBCONTRACTS The contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the work to require compliance by each subcontractor with the applicable provisions of the contract for the improvements embraced in this contract. 2. REVIEW BY THE CITY OF WATERLOO The City of Waterloo, its authorized representatives and agents, shall at all times have access to and be permitted to observe and review all work, materials, equipment, payrolls, personnel records, employment conditions, material invoices, and other relevant data and records pertaining to this contract, provided, however, that all instructions and approval with respect to the work will be given to the contractor only by the City of Waterloo through its authorized representative or agents. 3. INSPECTION a. The contractor shall furnish promptly all materials reasonably necessary for any tests, which may be required. All tests by the City of Waterloo will be performed in such manner as not to delay the work unnecessarily and will be made in accordance with the provisions of the Technical Specifications. b. Inspection of materials and appurtenances to be incorporated in the improvements embraced in this contract may be made at the place of production, manufacture or shipment, whenever the quantity justifies it, and such inspection and acceptance, unless otherwise stated in the Technical Specifications, shall be final, except as regards (1) latent defects, (2) departures from specific requirements of the contract, (3) damage or loss in transit, or (4) fraud or such gross mistakes as amount to fraud. Subject to the requirements contained in the preceding sentence, the inspection of materials as a whole or in part will be made at the project site. 4. WARRANTY OF TITLE No material, supplies, or equipment to be installed or furnished under this contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT 983 19 - 1 5623 conditional sale, lease-purchase or other agreement by which an interest therein or in any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier. The contractor shall warrant good title to all materials, supplies, and equipment installed or incorporated in the work and upon completion of all work, shall deliver the same together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by him to the City of Waterloo free from any claims, liens, or charges. Neither the contractor nor any person, firm, or -- corporation furnishing any material or labor for any work covered by this contract shall have any right to a lien upon any improvement or appurtenance thereon. Nothing contained in this paragraph, however, _. shall defeat or impair the right of persons furnishing materials or labor to recover under any bond given by the contractor for their protection or any rights under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the contractor in the hands of the City of Waterloo. The provisions of this paragraph shall be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts and notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the work when no formal contract is entered into for such materials. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT 983 19 -2 5623 SUPPLEMENTAL LIFT STATION SPECIFICATIONS INDEX SECTION DESCRIPTION 01005 DETAILED GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01300 SUBMITTALS 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 02005 EQUPMENT AND MATERIALS SUBMITTALS 02020 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING: 02230 DEWATERING 03001 CONCRETE 04810 UNIT MASONRY ELECTRIC CONTROL BUILD NG 07191 MASONRY WATER REPELLENTS 07413 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15950 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCES 16000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16160 PANELBOARDS 16170 SAFETY SWITCHES 16910 PUMP CONTROL SYSTEMS 17900 DEMONSTRATION, TRAINING AND COMMIS ;ZONING 263213 ENGINE GENERATOR 263623 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SUPPLEMENTAL LIFT STATION SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT 983 20-1 SECTION 01005 DETAIL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Description The Work to be performed to fulfill the intent of the project consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials and equipment, and the performance of all work included in this contract. B. Work Included The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, material, plant, temporary power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, staging areas, supplies and other means of construction necessary for proper performance, completing and commissioning of the project. Contractor shall perform and complete the work in the manner best managed to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall clean up the work and maintain it during and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all work and pay all costs incidental to all pay items within this project. The Contractor shall repair or restore all structures, surfaces, property and pavements public or private that may be damaged or disturbed during the performance of work. The cost of incidental work described in these General Requirements, for which there are no specific Contract Bid Items, shall be considered and it eluded as part of the general cost of doing the work and shall be included in the pri ,es for various Contract Pay Items. No additional payment will be made therefore, The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the work required by this Contract. Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his workmanship, materials and equipment, prior review of the Engineer notwithstanding. C. Public Utilities and Structures Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all poles, tracks, roads, paths, trails, sidewalks, curbs, ditches, control structures, pipes, wires, conduits, service connections, vaults, manholes and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether owned or controlled by the City, other governmental bodies or privately owned by individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the public with transportation, traffic control, gas, electric, telephone, communication, entertainment, advertisement, sewerage, -- drainage, water or other public or private property which may be affected by the work shall be deemed included hereunder. The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from damage during the work, except those specifically designated to be removed or relocated or modified. Access across any buried public utility nstallation, or structure, shall be made only in such locations and by means approved by the 01005-1 public Utility. The Contractor shall so arrange his operations as to avoid any damage to these facilities. All protective devices shall be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities damaged by the Contractor which are shown on the Plans or have been located in the field by the utility or their designated locate service shall be repaired by and at the Contractors expense. No separate payment shall be made for such protection or repairs to public or private utility installations or structures. Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the City or other governmental body which are shown on the Plans to be removed, relocated, replaced, rebuilt or modified by the Contractor shall be considered as part of the general cost of doing the work and shall be included in the prices bid for the various contract items unless a bid item is available for the required work. No separate payment shall be made therefore for any non bid item work. Where public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the City or other governmental body are encountered during the course of the work, and are not indicated on the Plans or in the Specifications, and when, in the opinion of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement, modification, or rebuilding is necessary to complete the work under this Contract, such work shall be �. accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, or such work may be ordered, in writing by the Engineer, after approval by the City for the Contractor to accomplish. If such work is accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete the removal, relocation, replacement, modification, or rebuilding as required. If such work is accomplished by the Contractor, it will be in accordance with the utilities requirements, General and Supplemental General Conditions. The agreement for paying for same is between the Contractor and the Utility. Any separate agreements between the City and the Utility are not part of the work described herein. In addition to the general notice given by the Engineer, the Contractor shall give written notice to City and any other governmental utility departments and other owners of public utilities of the location of the proposed construction operations, at least seventy-two hours in advance of breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the work. The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation or rebuilding of public utility installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein provided, shall be approved by the Public Utility ahead of the work performed. If the Public Utility Reports to the City that non performance of the above described work is not accomplished by the next pay application, then the value the Utility assesses for the afore stated action shall be deducted from the Pay Request submitted to the City until said Utility has in writing stated it is satisfied with work. D. Contractor's Use of Premises All project construction work will be accomplished on owned property, right-of-way, or easements, and the Contractor shall confine his activities to those designated areas. The Contractor shall not enter upon private property for any reason without securing prior permission from the property owner. Such permission, including any stipulations, shall be in writing and a copy shall be delivered to the Public Works Supervisor and City Clerk prior to the Contractor's entry or occupation of the subject property. This requirement will be rigidly enforced. 01005-2 The Contractor shall perform his work in such manner that he will not damage adjacent public or private property. Any damage to existing phys cal structures, surfaces, property, or utility services shall be repaired or restored promptly at no expense to the City. The Contractor shall avoid damage to and preserve all existing vegetation (grass, shrubs, trees, etc...)on or near the work area which do not, within reason, interfere with construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for and required to replace or restore all such vegetation damaged or destroyed at no cost to the City. The Contractor will also be responsible for any unauthorized cutting or damage to trees, shrubs, etc. This also includes damage caused by the operation of equipment, storage of materials and rutting or tracking of equipment. During the progress of the work the Contractor shall keep the work site free from an accumulation of rubbish, waste materials or any type of debris resulting from the construction. Upon completion of all the work, equipment, excess materials, etc., shall be removed from the project site and legally disposed of at a contractor supplied location as soon as is practicable, and the Contractor shall restore the entire project work site to its original condition, apart from any area(s) designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 1.2 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Drawings When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, dimensioned or shop drawing reviewed figures shall be used in preference to scaled dimensions, and large scale (detail) drawings in preference of small scale (overview) drawings. B. Specifications The Detailed Specifications consist of three parts: General, Products and Execution. The General Section contains General Requirements that govern the work. Products and Execution modify and supplement these by detailed requirements for the work and shall always govern whenever there appears to be a conflict. These specifications are occasionally supplemented by the measurement and payment specification contained in these specifications. C. Disagreements The Engineer shall employ the more restrictive or conservative standard, specification, drawing or method, in the opinion of the Engineer, to resolve any disagreements between the plans and specifications. This shall also include all industry standards and specifications listed at the end of this section and referenced in the specifications. The Engineer shall make all final determinations between any conflicting drawings, standards and specifications. D. Copies Furnished to Contractor:(5) Five sets of Plans and Specifications after Contract signed.The Contractor shall furnish each of the subcontractors, manufactures, and suppliers such copies of the Contract Documents as may be required for the shop drawing submittal, manufacturer, and supplier for the proposed work (see paragraph H). The contract documents include but are not limited to the specifications, bid documents, addendums, construction plans, and revisions. Additional copies of the Drawings and Specifications, when requested, may be furnished to the Contractor by the Engineer at Engineer's cost to produce. 01005-3 E. Supplementary Drawings: When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show further detail, which may be required to better clarify to the Contractor the Project. Drawings known as Supplementary Drawings, with Specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the Engineer and five paper prints thereof will be given to the Contractor and a copy to the City. F. Contractor to Check Drawings and Data: The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, with Specifications or other data received from the Engineer and shall notify the Engineer of any errors, omissions, conflicts and discrepancies found therein. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Request for Information (RFD, consecutively numbered, detailing all perceived errors, omissions, conflicts and discrepancies. Engineer shall provide a response to all written or emailed RFIs submitted by the Contractor. Contractor will not be allowed to take advantage of an error or omission, as full instructions will be furnished by the Engineer, should a discrepancy be discovered. G. Intent: All work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like effect as if shown or stated in both. Work not specified in either the Drawings or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out the intent or in the complete and proper execution of the work, is required and shall be performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or described. If this work is not a direct Bid Item, then this work will be considered incidental to the total project cost. The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be performed and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the best quality is to be used, and interpretation of these Specifications shall be made upon that basis. The inclusion of the Related Requirements (or work specified elsewhere) in the General part of the specifications is only for the convenience of the Contractor, and shall not be interpreted as a complete list of related Specification Sections. H. Project Submittals: All existing utilities, structures, property or other items shown on the plans are from best available data provided by the facility, property records and their elevation, direction, material and location could not always be confirmed by the Engineer's surface engineering topographic survey. Prior to the submission of any shop drawings, the Contractor shall expose or pothole all existing utilities, structures, facilities, property or other items as necessary; or as specified in the plans or specifications to confirm or determine the locations, directions, elevations and materials necessary for creation of the of the shop drawings for Engineer review. The contractor shall confirm exposure of the existing utilities, structure, property or other items in writing on the shop drawings submitted to the Engineer for review. In addition to the shop drawing requirements provided in other sections, the Contactor shall submit a minimum of five (5) copies of the manufactures' shop -- 01005-4 drawings, descriptive literature and appropriate certified test reports on all materials to be used on this project. The manufacturer, material supplier or service supplier shall state what specification section and when it applies, which plan sheet(s)the submittal applies. The official submittal of all shop drawings shall be in paper copy. Emailed copies shall not be accepted for the final submittal, but may be used for clarifications in preparation of the final shop drawings or to supplement the official paper copies. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings submittal schedule and Project work schedules Ninety-Six (96) hours in advance of Pre-construction conference meeting requirements to provide adequate time for review. In no case, shall this be less than Seventy-Two (72) hours. The Engineer makes no guarantee on the schedule of shop drawing reviews, however will work to complete reviews within two weeks if and after all pertinent items have been provided by the Contractor. 1.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer: The names of all the proposed manufactures, suppliers and dealers who are to furnish materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances or other fittings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. Specification Section(s) and plan sheet(s) shall be referenced on cover sheet of submittal. Such review must be obtained before shop drawings can be used to order and receive materials on site, to determine proper handling and installation, testing and commissioning. No manufacturer will be reviewed for any materials to be furnished under this Contract unless they shall be of good reputation. Contractor shall be required to submit evidence that the manufacturer of a "or equal" product to the one specified and that it has been previously used for a like purpose for a sufficient length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory performance. This also includes providing contact information for references of the Project Engineers who have specified same and the Owners of said items for the referenced projects. All communications with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through the Contractor. Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type or classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall b made by the same manufacturer. All materials and equipment shall be new, unless otherwise provided. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the type and quality of materials or equipment to be furnished and installed on this project. Materials of fabrication and construction to be furnished and permanently installed in the project shall be of the best quality. The workmanship of construction fit and finish on the project shall be equal to the highest standards of the industry. As indicated above, all materials and equipment and/or components thereof shall be new and shall not have been in service at any other installation. B. Delivery: The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to ensure that most speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work to complete the work within the reviewed scheduled allotted time. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any related Sub- Contractor. The Contractor shall replace, at his own expense, all such material(s) found to be damaged in shipment or handling or defective in manufacture. The 01005-5 cost of the replacement material and labor of installation for the replacement of previously installed material found to be defective prior to the final acceptance of the work shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor. All materials and equipment to be incorporated into the project shall be loaded and unloaded by a method that will provide maximum protection against damage and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent damage or injury to the equipment and materials during transporting, handling and storage; and manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed. Proper and suitable power equipment shall be used in the loading or unloading process. Under no condition shall any items of equipment be dropped or rolled from a truck or dragged over the ground after being unloaded. When a crane or similar type equipment is being used in loading or unloading a suitable lifting sling, hooks or other lifting apparatus and safety equipment shall be used. C. Storage It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to store delivered materials or equipment in a secure area in compliance with the manufacture's recommendations. The City will not be responsible for any damages resulting from vandalism, weather, exposure or other reasons. Replacement of materials or equipment lost, stolen, damaged or destroyed due to careless or improper storage will be the Contractor's responsibility. All stored materials shall be easily and readily accessible for inspection by the City's Representatives during normal working hours. D. Tools and Accessories The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, furnish with each type, kind or size of equipment, one complete set of suitably marked high grade special tools and appliances which are described by the manufacturer as needed to adjust, operate, maintain or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances shall be furnished in approved cases, properly labeled and equipped with good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, serial number, weight and principal rating data. Operations and maintenance information shall match equipment provided. E. Installation The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient proper equipment and machinery of -- ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all construction emergencies encountered in work of this character. The work shall proceed in a neat and workmanlike manner at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer during installation. All work shall be correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for satisfactory operation, use and shall be installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made. The Contractor shall furnish, install and protect all necessary anchors and attachment bolts and all other appurtenances needed for the installation of the sewer mains specified. Retaining glands shall be as reviewed by the engineer and made of ample size and strength for the purpose intended. Shop drawing 01005-6 submittals of all retaining glands or retaining mechanisms shall be reviewed prior to installation. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish all materials anc labor for, and shall properly install all pipes, fittings, retaining glands, thrust blocks yard hydrants assembly valves, tracing wire and backfill to AWWA, SUDAS and DNR and any additional Engineer's requirements. 1.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General Inspection and testing of all materials will be performed by the Contractor's independent laboratory or the equipment manufacturer's representative unless otherwise specified. The testing personnel shall make the necessary inspections and tests and the reports thereof shall be in such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract Documents. Three copies of the reports shall be submitted, and authorities' certification thereof must be furnished to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the review of any material, therefore recommending the payment for equipment tested, inspected and commissioned. If in the making of any test of any material or equipment, it is ascertained by test result that the material or equipment does not comply with the Contract, the Contractor and the Engineer will be notified by the testing firm. The Contractor will be directed to refrain from delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly from the site or from the work and replace it with acceptable material, without additional cost to the City. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with recognized codes of tne Iowa DOT, SUDAS, Ten States Standards, Iowa DNR Water Resources Stancards, AWWA, ASCE, SEI, ANSI, UL, NEC, ASTM, ASME, or the IEEE, except as nay otherwise be stated herein. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility for density testing of all backfill and embankment compaction to ensure that it meets the proper moisture density, as required. If, after observing the contractor's soils engineer's compaction methods and results, when the Engineer feels that the compaction is not meeting specifications, the Engineer will order density testing by an independent laboratory with the costs of the questioned testing paid for by the Contractor deducted from future pay requests before approval of remaining payment. If the results of the testing of the affected areas do not meet the minimum requirements, these areas will be re-consolidated by the Contractor. The area will be re-tested by the independent laboratory and provide follow up compaction reports to the Engineer. All re-consolidation and re-testing shall be at the expense of the Contractor. B. Costs: The cost of shop and field tests and of certain other tests specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the Contractor and such costs shall be deemed to be incidental to the total Contract price. C. Notice and Inspection of Materials: The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Engineer, sufficiently in advance of his intention to commence the manufacture or preparation of materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the permanent construction. Such notice shall contain a request for inspectior the date of 01005-7 commencement and the expected date of completion of the manufacture or preparation of materials. The Contractor must comply with these provisions before shipping any material. Such inspection shall not release the Contractor from the responsibility for furnishing materials meeting the requirements of the Contract -` Documents. D. Certificate of Manufacture: �. When inspection is waived or when the Engineer so requires, the Contractor shall furnish to him authoritative evidence in the form of Certificates of Manufacture that the materials to be used in the work have been manufactured and tested in conformance with the Contract Documents. These certificates shall be notarized and shall include copies of the results of tests, where required by specification that have been made directly on the product by the manufacturer. Certificates of manufacture shall explicitly state the Section of the specifications and page of plans that are in conformance with or the Reviewed Shop drawing number. E. Project Completion: The point at which all start-up and testing (commissioning) is complete and equipment operating within specification limits. All testing has been performed to meet or exceed the NPDES treatment limits as stated in the NPDES Permit attached to these specifications for measurement of treatment performance before Training and Final documentation time frame begins. F. Training and Final Documentation: Training for operation of the new treatment facility starts after Substantial Completion has occurred. Training is expected to take two days. All final O&M manuals shall be submitted for review. Three hard copies and an electronic copy shall be provided to the Owner. All spare parts shall be provided per specifications and in Owners possession. G. Final Inspection: During such final inspections, the site shall be completely restored. In no case, will the final pay estimate be prepared until the Contractor has complied with all requirements set forth and the Engineer has made his final inspection of the entire work and is satisfied that the entire project is properly and satisfactorily constructed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.5 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES A. Temporary Fences: If, during the work, it is necessary to remove or disturb any fence or part thereof, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide a suitable temporary fence which shall be maintained until the permanent fence is replaced. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the determination of the necessity for providing a temporary fence and the type of temporary fence to be used to provide project safety. Temporary Fences shall be required at any location, even without Engineer notification, if removal of an existing fence would remove a barrier the confines or protects various items. (Cattle and other husbandry animals, endangered species, school yards, day care facilities, churches, etc.) 1.6 TEMPORARY SERVICES 01005-8 A. First Aid: The Contractor shall always keep upon the site, at each location where work is progressing, a completely equipped first aid kit and shall provide ready access thereto when people are employed on the work. B. Temporary Sanitary Facilities: The Contractor shall provide adequate sanitary facilities for the use of those employed on the work site. Such facilities shall be made available prior to or on the date the first employees arrive on the work site, shall be properly secluded from public view, and shall be maintained during the progress of the work in such numbers and locations as may be required. 1.7 LINES AND GRADE A. Grade All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the Drawings, or as established by the Engineer. Except for any survey provided by the Engineer, the full responsibility for keeping alignment and grade rests upon the Contractor. Except for any survey provided by the Engineer, the Contractor, prior to commencing construction, shall notify the Engineer to established bench marks and base line controlling points. The Contractor shall so place excavation and other material as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the reference marks provided. Contractor shall remove any obstructions placed by the Contractor contrary to this provision. B. Surveys Except for any survey provided by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish and maintain, at his own expense, stakes and other such materials to establish all working or construction lines and grades, as required, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy thereof. The cost of all labor, materials and incidentals required for the performance of any survey and utility location work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and the cost of this work is to be incidental to the Contractor's total bid price. C. Safeguarding Marks The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments and bench marks made or established on the work, bear the cost of re-establishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without authorization such established points, stakes and marks. The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners, monuments and marks adjacent to but not related to the work and, if required, shall bear the cost of re-establishing them if disturbed or destroyed. 1.8 ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND LANDSCAPING A. The Contractor shall also be entirely responsible and liable for all damage or injury because of his operations to all other adjacent public and private property. structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto met with during the progress of the work. The cost of protection, replacement in their original locations and conditions or payment of damages for injuries to such adjacent public and private 01005-9 property and structures affected by work, whether or not shown on the Drawings or specified shall be included in the various Contract Items and no separate payments will be made therefore. Where such public and private property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto are not shown on the Drawings and when, in the opinion of the Engineer, to avoid interference with the remaining work, payment therefore could be made as provided for in the General Conditions. Contractor is expressly advised that the protection of buildings structures, tanks, pipelines, etc. and related work adjacent to and near to his continuing operations, wherever they may be, is solely his responsibility. Conditional inspection of buildings or structures in the immediate vicinity of the project which may reasonably be expected to be affected by the Work shall be performed by and be the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor shall, before starting operations, make an examination of the interior and exterior of the adjacent structures, property, buildings, facilities and record by noted, measurements, photographs, conditions which might be aggravated by open excavation and construction. Repairs or replacement of all conditions disturbed by the construction shall be made to the satisfaction of the City and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This does not preclude conforming to the requirements of the insurance underwriters. Copies of surveys, photographs, reports, etc., shall be given to the Engineer for project documentation purposes. Prior to the beginning of any excavations the Contractor shall advise the Engineer of all areas he intends to perform work or which performance of the project work will affect. B. Protection of Trees: All trees and shrubs shall be adequately protected by the Contractor with boxes and otherwise and in accordance with ordinances governing the protection of trees. No excavated materials shall be placed to injure such trees or shrubs. Trees or shrubs destroyed by the Contractor, his employees, and subcontractors shall be replaced by him with new stock of similar size and age, at its proper season and at the sole expense of the Contractor: 1. Beneath trees or other surface structures, where possible, pipelines may be built in short tunnels, backfilled with excavated materials, except as otherwise specified, or the trees or structures carefully supported and protected from damage. 2. The City may order the Contractor, for the convenience of the City, to remove trees along the line or excavation. If so ordered, the City will obtain any permits required for removal of trees. No separate payment shall be made for tree removal and/or replacement. Removed trees shall not be buried on site and shall be legally disposed of at a Contractor provided location. 3. The Contractor shall be required to notify the tree Owner, the City, seventy-two (72) hours in advance of any removal of trees on the project, that are not noted for removal in the Drawings. No clearing shall occur and no earth moving equipment shall be placed on site until after the notice has been issued. The Contractor shall provide maintenance of the tree barricades and other preventative measures to protect the trees that are to remain. This may include but is not limited to limb and root pruning under the supervision of an approved arborist. 01005-10 C. Grass Areas: Grass areas shall be left in as good condition as before the starting of the work. Where sod is to be disturbed or removed, it shall be carefully removed, and later replaced, or the area where sod has been removed or damaged shall be restored with new sod. The cost of this work is considered incidental to the work and shall be included within the various applicable pay items at the time of the Bid. Seeding and mulching is allowed as long as ultimately (within contract time) a good stand of grass is established. D. Restoration of Fences: Any fence, or part thereof, that is damaged or removed during the course of work shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor and shall be left in as good a condition as before the starting of the work. The manner in which the fence is repaired or replaced and the materials used in such work shall be subject to the — approval of the Engineer. The cost of all labor, materials, equipment, and work for the replacement or repair of any fence shall be deemed included in the appropriate Contract Item or items, or if no specific Item is provided therefore, as part of the overhead cost of the work, and no additional payment will be made therefore. 1.9 CUTTING, PATCHING, REMOVE/REPLACE: The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his portion of the work that may be required to make the several parts thereof join and coordinate in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and in accordance with the drawings and specifications. The work must be performed by competent workmen skilled in the trades required by the restoration. All Pavement Removal shall be in accordance with SUDAS 2017 Section 7040, 3.01 and 3.02 or Engineer approved equal. All work incidental to completion of the work shall be included in the pay items within the Bid. No additional payment will be made for all incidental work related to the completion of any pay item of the work or pay items in total. 1.10 CLEANING: A. The Contractor shall, always, keep the site of the work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and rubbish as is practicable and shall remove the same from any portion of the site if, in the opinion of the Engineer, such material, debris, - or rubbish constitutes a nuisance or is objectionable. The Contractor shall remove from the site all surplus materials and temporary structures when no further need therefore develops. B. Final Cleaning: After the conclusion of project, all tools, temporary structures and materials belonging to the Contractor shall be promptly taken away, and he shall remove and promptly and legally disposed of off-site at a Contractor provided location all water, dirt, rubbish or any other foreign substances. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials removed by him and shall deliver such materials and equipment undamaged in a bright, clean, polished and operating condition. C. If timely clean up and site restoration of the job site is not accorr plished to the satisfaction of the City, then the City shall make arrangements to affect the 01005-11 necessary clean up by others. The Contractor shall be charged for these costs through deductions in payment due the Contractor. If such action becomes necessary, the City shall not be responsible for the inadvertent removal from the work site of materials which the Contractor would not normally have disposed of -" had he affected the required clean up. D. Upon completion of the project, and prior to a final inspection, the Contractor shall examine the project construction area to be certain all excess soil, debris and other unsightly materials have been removed and disposed of in a satisfactory manner. All areas of construction disturbed by the project work shall be restored as specified, and any areas outside the limits of construction and not designated for alteration shall be restored, as near as practicable, to their original or better condition. All this work will not be paid as a separate pay item but considered incidental to the applicable pay items involved. 1.11 MISCELLANEOUS: A. Protection Against Siltation and Soil Erosion 1. The Contractor shall arrange his operations to minimize siltation and soil erosion on construction sites and on existing or proposed water courses, drainage ditches and other areas of concern. Lagoon berm edge. 2. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove any siltation deposits and correct any erosion on construction sites or proposed water courses, drainage ditches, slopes, water attenuation sites and other areas of concern without additional cost to the Owner. 3. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any fines resulting from the encroachment of any environmentally protected areas, siltation or water bodies or adjacent property, City's properties, or other local, state, or federal infractions resulting in fines related to the construction. B. Protection of Floodway Areas: The Contractor shall properly dispose of all surplus material, including soil, in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. Under no circumstances shall surplus material be disposed of in wetland and the 100-year flood boundary areas as defined by the Iowa Department of Natural Resources, US Army Corps. of Engineers, etc. C. Temporary Driveway Closure Coordination: Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor shall be required to notify the City and the private property owner of all temporary driveway closures seventy-two (72) hours in advance of any temporary closures to complete the scheduled construction. Without written authorization by the City, the closure shall not take place until after the 72-hour period following delivery of the notice. Copies of the notice shall be provided to the Engineer. The Contractor shall reinstate access to all driveways as soon as possible. D. Existing Facilities: The work shall be so conducted to maintain existing facilities in operation insofar as is possible. Requirements and schedules of operations for maintaining existing facilities in service during construction shall be as described in the specific �. provisions. E. Use of Chemicals: 01005-12 All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for prc ject operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of other classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions and shall be a certified chemical applicator. F. Storm Sewer Structures and Ditches: The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the satisfactory treatment of storm sewer structures and ditches in substantial conformance to the reviewed Drawings. G. Related Permits: The Contractor recognizes that the City has applied for, and may have received, certain permits pertaining to the work. At the sole discretion of the City, the City assigns construction ramifications of said permits to the Contractor and the Contractor shall accept said assignments upon delivery of same from the City. H. All work near open waters, wetlands, or any jurisdictional area is tc be performed in strict accordance with any environmental permits and their condHons. Erosion barriers, as defined in SWPPP, to be maintained by the Contr lctor, are the minimum required. If the Contractor's construction methods require that additional erosion control is necessary to satisfy these permits, such controls shall be supplied, installed and maintained throughout the construction process by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to submit, in a timely manner, any information, data, etc. which is required as a condition of a permit. Required information, data, etc. shall be submitted directly to the permitting agency by the Contractor with copies to the City and the Engineer. The Contractor will be held responsible for any fine(s) or other action(s) resulting from a violation of permit conditions. I. Contractor and by association sub contractors are responsible for all means, methods, and procedures, including but not limited to safety pncedures and methods. J. Before initiating any construction or submitting shop drawings, contractor shall be responsible for locating or confirming location of existing utility lines and structures. Incorrect, inaccurate, or inadequate information concerning location of utilities or structures shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for damage thereto caused by his operation. During locating, contractor shall also confirm size, direction, depth and material of utility and immediately alert the Engineer of any potential utility or construction conflicts. K. Utility Services: Make temporary service connections as necessary for maintaining utility service during the course of work. Shorten and cap existing abandoned utilities and service connections. Plug all abandoned wells. Coordinate all temporary utility service interruptions with the Municipal Utility. Contractor to provide a minimum 72-hour written notice to the Municipal Utility and any affected utilities. Notice can be given by distribution of door notices, letters, or other effective verifiable methods to affected users. L. Drainage Tile: 01005-13 All sub drains or tile drains encountered during construction shall be survey located by the Contractor and repaired by the Contractor. If they conflict with the proposed construction, the tile information shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Engineer, and the tile shall be rerouted around the proposed improvements. The new route shall be survey located so that the new location can be added to the construction as-built drawings. M. The transportation of all construction material and waste shall be routed on County or State transportation facilities, and shall not be transported on local streets except where allowed by the City in writing. Contractor shall submit a haul route to the City for approval one week prior to initiation of any hauling operations. Submittal of same is not approval. City shall approve use of City Streets in writing. N. The Contractor has the option of using private property staging area(s). The area(s) available for the Contractor are for staging construction and temporary material storage. Prior to use by the Contractor, the Contractor shall provide proof of insurance to the City and hold the City and Engineer harmless for any injuries or damage to the City, Engineer, Inspectors, Sub-Contractors, or any other parties. After use by the Contractor, the site shall be restored to its original pre- construction condition as described in the detailed specifications. The site(s) shall be secured by the Contractor and the City shall not be responsible for any theft, damage, or liability within the staging area. 1.12 RESTORATION OF PROPERTY A. Responsibility: All damage because of construction work to existing structures, roadway pavement, driveways, sidewalks, other paved areas, fences, mail boxes, utilities, traffic control devices and any other obstruction not specifically named herein, shall be repaired, restored or replaced by the Contractor unless otherwise specified at no additional cost to the City. B. Temporary Repairs: All damage as described in Paragraph A above shall be at least temporarily repaired, restored or replaced immediately following construction efforts at that location. Temporary restoration shall mean putting the affected area back into a safe usable condition. In no case shall trenches remain open overnight unless specified written approval is granted by the City. C. Permanent Repairs: All types of damages named in Paragraph A above shall be permanently repaired, restored, or replaced not later than the 30th calendar days following the completion of construction at that location unless otherwise stipulated by property owner, City _. or Engineer. Permanent repairs will be accomplished in a professional workmanship like manner in accordance with Specifications contained herein, or as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor may be relieved of the 30-day time limit above only by specific written agreement with the City. D. City Repair Resolution: If in the event that the Contractor fails to make the permanent repairs within the time specified in Paragraph A above, then the City, at its option, will, with its own resources or by contract with others, cause the repair, restoration, or replacement of the affected area to be accomplished. The costs of such work will then be deducted either from the next pay request or from any other monies owed the 01005-14 Contractor by the City. The above action by the City in no wa. releases the Contractor from completing all remaining contract work. E. Restoration: In all areas disturbed by work, the Contractor shall grade and restc e the site to a condition as good as or better than existed before construction in the opinion of the Engineer. Sodded areas shall be sodded with sod matching the existing adjacent sod. Likewise, unseeded and unsodden areas need only be graded and leveled with existing soil except as directed by the City Representative. Any drives, walks, pavements, structures, survey monuments, property corner markers, trees, shrubs, or any other public or private property damaged or destroyed by the work shall be restored or replaced at the Contractor's expense. Contractor shall provide positive drainage for all areas to be restored unless otherwise directed in writing by the Engineer. All roadway, sidewalk and driveway surfaces shall be restored to pre-construction conditions. Restoration work shall follow related SUDAS specifications, plan details or included specifications. All aggregate (gravel) surfacing shall have an 8-inch compacted depth using IDOT approved road stone. All materials used for restoration shall be reviewed by Engineer before construction. All subbase and aggregate base materials shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor Density with moisture content not less than two percent below optimum and not more than three percent above optimum. The subgrade shall not vary more than 0.05+/- feet (1/2 +/- inch) from the grade indicated on the plan after satisfactory compaction prior to placing aggregate base. Contractor to secure an independent testing laboratory to conduct compaction and material testing wherever required to meet specifications. 1.13 MEETINGS A. Responsibility: It is the responsibility of the Contractor to attend all project meetings called by the Mayor or Engineer. Unless specified by another part of the specifications, required meetings shall include but are not limited to pre-construction, project kick off, interim review and project coordination meetings (monthly). B. Multiple Project Coordination: There may be a number of additional public and/or private projects and existing facilities within the same area that will be having work being performed by others under separate contract. The Contractor's meeting representative shall be a project superintendent or above capable of agreeing to and adjusting project operations and schedule for coordination purposes. C. Project Specific Meetings: The Engineer, or his designated representative, will be available for up to one scheduled weekly meeting during the course of the project. This meeting should be used to discuss the proposed project schedule, to arrange proper inspections and necessary survey layout, discuss coordination challenges, requests for expedited shop drawing reviews, plan interpretations, paperwork transfer and address any other project specific concerns. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to set up any coordination meeting(s) during the project. The Engineer shall be notified at least one week in advance of any Contractor called meetings. 01005-15 1.14 REFERENCED STANDARDS These Specifications Reference Standards from various recognized organizations, as such: which are made part here of by such reference and shall be the latest edition of revision thereof. In case of conflicting requirements between these Specifications and the referenced Standards, these specifications shall govern. A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) �. C. Americans with Disabilities (ADA) D. American Insurance Association (AIA) E. American Gas Association (AGA) F. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards H. American Society of Civil Engineer (ASCE) Standards I. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Standards J. American Standards for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standards K. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards L. American Welding Standards (AWS) M. American Standards Association (ASA) N. Federal Specifications (FS) O. Hydraulic Institute (HI) Standards P. International Building Code (IBC) Q. International Standards Organization (ISO) Standards R. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Standards S. Iowa Administrative Code (IAC) T. Iowa Department of Natural Resources (IDNR) Standards U. Iowa Department of Transportation (IDOT) V. Iowa Wastewater Design Standards W. Iowa Water Supply Design X. Iowa Statewide Urban Design and Specification (SUDAS) and standards Y. Joint Industrial Council (JIC) Standards Z. Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) AA. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) BB. National Electrical Code (NEC) Standards CC. National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA) Standards DD. (NFPA) Standards EE. National Machine Builders Tool Builders Association (NMTBA) Standards FF. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) GG. Structural Engineering Institute (SEI) Standards. HH. Ten-State Standards; Recommended Standards for Sewage Works II. 2007 Edition of the Ten State Standards; Recommended Standards for Water Supply Standard Details JJ. Uniform Building Code (UBC) KK. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards LL. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) MM. US Army Corps of Engineers (US ACOE) NN. Standards and Codes of the State of Iowa and applicable local standards and codes of the City(ies) and County(ies) where the project is(are) located. 00. Iowa Statewide Urban Design and Specifications SUDAS 2017 PP. Other Standards and Codes which may be applicable to acceptable standards of the industry for equipment, materials and installation under the Contract 01005-16 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor shall prepare and submit detailed progress schedules, schedule of values and shop drawing and sample submittal schedules. The Project schedule shall be in bar graph form and shall include, as a minimum, the following separate activities: 1. Physical construction (identifying mobilization, demobilization, setup time, lags, etc.). 2. Requested Issuance date by Contractor of purchase orders for materials and equipment to meet proposed schedule and submittal of shop drawings and samples to the Engineer. 3. Review by Engineer for each submittal of samples and shop drawings. Unless otherwise reviewed by the Engineer, allow ten (10) calendar days for Engineer to review each submittal. 4. Fabrication time for materials and equipment. 5. Delivery of materials, equipment and preliminary Operat on and Maintenance manuals. 6. Installation of materials and equipment. 7. Equipment Testing, start-up, commissioning and training fur individual pieces of equipment for the entire system. 8. Weather affected activities. The Contractor's schedule snould explicitly indicate how many days are allocated to downtime due to inclement weather within each major activity. Weather affected downtime shall not push contract passed due date of contract unless very special circumstances for the weather is being concurred by all weather authorities in Iowa. 9. Anticipated or planned Interruptions of Existing Wastewater Treatment Plant required to perform work shall be approved by operator 72 hours -- prior to interruption. 10. Schedule for Demolition or removal of work under this Contract. Access road remove/replace and sanitary sewer pipe installatior. remove and replacement. B. Activity durations shall represent the best estimate of elapsed time considering _ the scope of the Work involved in the activity and the resources planned for accomplishing the activity expressed in calendar days. C. Construction Activity descriptions shall clearly define the scope of work associated with each activity. D. Detail each construction component of work so the schedule and progress can be readily monitored on a weekly basis. In general, the construction work shall be detailed such that no individual construction activity shall have duration greater tha fifteen (15) calendar days. As a minimum, each activity shall be coded by: 01300-1 1. Activity type (i.e., submittal, Engineer's review, material order material delivery, testing, etc.). 2. Responsibility (i.e., Contractor, subcontractor A, subcontractor B, City, Engineer, etc.). 3. Area (i.e., site work, building, equipment, piping, commissioning etc.) E. Develop the construction schedule as necessary to properly control and manage the project. The above schedule development requirements are a minimum. F. The progress schedule shall be submitted in a bar graph format and shall include, as a minimum, a graphic representation of all significant activities and events involved in the construction of the project. The graphic representation and statement must clearly depict and describe the sequence of activities planned by each Subcontractor, their interdependence and the times estimated to perform each activity. An updated schedule shall be submitted with each pay request. 1.02 FINALIZING SCHEDULES A. Present and discuss at the preconstruction meeting, the schedules submitted in accordance with this specification. Unless additional information is required to be submitted by the Contractor, the Engineer will, within 5 calendar days of the preconstruction conference, provide comments to the Contractor. Then the Contractor shall resubmit the affected schedules addressing the Engineer's comments. B. Review of the final schedules by the Engineer is advisory only and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for accomplishing the work within the Contract Time. Omissions and errors in the reviewed schedule shall not excuse performance. Review by the Engineer in no way makes the Engineer an insurer of the success of those schedules or liable for time or cost overruns flowing from shortcomings in the execution of such schedules. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS FOR CONFORMING TO SCHEDULE A. Contractor will be held responsible to take such steps as will be necessary to improve progress, if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor falls behind the progress schedule. Engineer may require Contractor to submit for re-review of such supplementary schedule or schedules as may be deemed necessary to demonstrate the manner in which the agreed rate of progress will be regained, all without additional cost to the City. An updated cash flow schedule submittal will be required in this occurrence and will be provided with the supplementary schedules referenced above. 1.04 UPDATING SCHEDULES A. Submit to the Engineer monthly updates of the schedules required per this specification section. Be prepared to discuss the monthly update at the subsequent monthly job meeting. 01300-2 B. Progress and shop drawing schedule updates shall reflect the progress to date by providing actual start dates for activities started, actual finish dates for completed activities, and identifying out of sequence work, schedule logic changes and any circumstances or events impacting the current schedule. The updates shall also contain the Contractor's best estimate of th remaining duration for activities not complete as of the date of the update. All graphic presentations and other information required per the initial submittal of these schedules shall be provided with each update. C. The cash flow schedules shall be updated with each pay request:. 1.05 ADJUSTMENT OF PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND CONTRACT TIME A. If the Contractor desires to make changes in the method of operating which affects the approved progress schedule, notify the Engineer in writing stating what changes are proposed and the reason for the change. If the Engineer reviews these changes, revise and submit for final review, without additional cost to the Owner, all of the affected portions of the schedule. B. Shop drawings and samples which are not reviewed on the first -submittal or within the schedule time shall be immediately rescheduled, as well as any work which fails to pass specified tests or has been rejected. C. The Contract Times will be adjusted only for causes specified in the General Conditions. In the event the Contractor requests an adjustment of the Contract times, Contractor shall furnish such justification and supporting evidence as the Engineer may require necessary for a determination as to whether the Contractor is entitled to an adjustment of Contract Time under the provisions of the General Conditions. The Engineer will, after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence, make findings of fact and will advise the Contractor in writing. If the Engineer finds that the Contractor is entitled to any adjustment of the Contract Time, the Engineer's determination as to the total number of days adjustment shall be based upon the currently approved progress schedule and on all data relevant to the adjustment. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that actual delays in activities which, according to the progress schedule, do not affect the Contract completion date shown by the critical path in the schedule will not be the basis for an adjustment of Contract. D. From time to time it may be necessary for the progress schedule and/or Contract Times to be adjusted by the City to reflect the effects of job conditions, weather, technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the City, and other unforeseeable conditions which may indicate schedule and/or Contract Time adjustments. Under such conditions, the Engineer shall direct the Contractor to reschedule the work and/or Contract Time to reflect the changed conditions. Revise the construction schedule accordingly. No additional compensation shall be made to the Contractor for such changes except as provided in the General Conditions. Unless otherwise directed, take all possible actions to minimize any extension to the Contract Time and any, additional cost to the City. 1.06 PERFORMANCE EXECUTION PLAN (PEP) 01300-3 A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Project Execution Plan that provides specific details as to how all SUBCONTRACTORS intend to perform their proposed scope of work. At a minimum, the PEP will provide the following details: 1. A brief description of the proposed sub contractor's work. 2. A narrative detailing the sub Contractor's responsibilities and services. 3. A narrative detailing the tasks that are the responsibility of the Contractor. 4. Details of any proposed deviations from the project standard specifications and details. 5. List of Contractor's exclusions. 6. Key assumptions and clarifications. 7. Project administration, including a communications plan that provides details on how meetings, outage notices, change orders, and payment requests will be communicated. 8. Project submittals 9. Design and engineering plan, including permitting requirements. 10. Construction plan. 11. Vendor and subcontracting plan. 12. Project schedule and preliminary milestone dates. 13. Operational considerations, including system shut downs. 14. Project budget. 15. Safety considerations. 16. Project risks, including operational constraints, construction risks, safety risks, schedule risks, process risks, and cost overrun risks. 17. Commissioning, and training plan. 1.07 QA/QC PLAN A. Contractor shall prepare and submit a Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) Plan that provides specific details as to the process involved to monitor and evaluate the project to ensure compliance with the project plans and specifications. The QA/QC plan shall be project specific and shall include, but not be limited to, the following key elements: 1. Quality Management and Responsibilities. 2. Qualified Employees. 3. Project Quality Plan. 4. Inspections and Testing. 5. Control and Prevention of Nonconformance. 6. Training, Commissioning. 7. Project Documentation. 8. Project Closeout. B. The QA/QC Plan may be submitted as part of the PEP. 1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall prepare and submit a Submittal Log for review. B. Promptly supply to the Engineer for review, shop drawings with details and schedules for all items as noted in the Drawings and/or Specifications and/or required by the Engineer. Submittals are required for all equipment and 01300-4 materials to be installed on the job. Contractor shall assume that all submittals will be reviewed and returned within 10 calendar days. C. Six (6) copies of all drawings, schedules and brochures shall be submitted for review. Each submittal shall State the job name. Final Shop drawings may also be submitted to Engineer electronically. D. Submittals smaller than 8-1/2 by 11 inches shall be secured to paper 8- 1/2 by 11 inches. 1.09 SAMPLES A. When required by the Engineer or where noted in other Sections of these Specifications, samples of materials shall be submitted for review. 1.10 PRE-CONSTRUCTION VIDEO/ELECTRONIC PHOTOS A. Prior to mobilization at the site, furnish to the Engineer on a flash drive a video recording of all planned construction areas, material storage areas, areas adjacent to these areas, including but not limited to, streets, driveways, sidewalks, curbs, ditches, fencing, railing, visible utilities, retaining structures and adjacent building structures. The purpose of the video is to document existing conditions and to provide a fair measure of required restoration. Care should be taken to record all existing conditions which exhibit deterioration, imperfections, structural failures or situations that would be considered substandard. Notify the Engineer 72 hours in advance of when the video is to be taken to provide the Engineer an option to be on site during the documenting of the project area. B. The video shall be high quality, color and in an reviewed electronic format (Microsoft Media Player software). Temporary lighting shall be provided as necessary to properly video areas where natural lighting is insufficient (indoors, shadows, etc.). The video shall include an audio soundtrack tc provide the following information: 1. Detailed description of location being viewed referenced :o Contract Drawings (i.e., building designation, pipeline route etc.) 2. Direction (N, S, E, W, looking up, looking down, etc.) of camera view 3. Date, time, temperature, environmental conditions during recording. 4. Electronic photographs of specific operationally important locations shall be provided to supplement the electronic video. C. Any areas not readily visible by video/photo methods shall be described in detail. Unless otherwise reviewed by Engineer, video shall not be performed during inclement weather or when the ground is covered partially or totally with snow, ice, leaves, etc. D. As many recordings or photos as are necessary to satisfy the requirements of this section shall be prepared. The original documents shall be submitted to the Engineer accompanied by a detailed log of the contents of each appropriately sized flash drive. The log should include location descriptions with corresponding to file stored on flash drive will be maintained by the Engineer during construction and may be viewed at any time by Contractor upon request. Upon final acceptance, the final flash drive may be copied for City, Engineer and Contractor. This flash drive information does not replace paper As-Builts to be submitted by the Contractor for final operational As-Built condition. 01300-5 1.11 PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. The detailed arrangement for submittal of progress payments shall be discussed �. at the preconstruction meeting. In general, progress payments shall be submitted monthly to the Engineer by the 25th of each month as the project progresses. The progress payment request shall be based on the unit prices and should �- provide the percentage of completion, total dollar value completed, dollar value completed prior to the current payment, and the amount requested for this progress payment for each line item contained in the schedule of values. Progress payment requests for material and/or equipment suitably stored but not yet incorporated into the work shall be permitted. Payment will not be made to the Contractor if, upon inspection by the Engineer, it is determined that the material and/or equipment does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents including proper storage, receipt of reviewed shop drawings, receipt of any special guarantees, bonds, insurance coverage, any evidence of damage or imperfections, etc. 1.12 CONTRACTOR'S DAILY REPORTS A. Contractor to prepare and submit daily reports containing the following information: 1. The number of craftsmen and hours worked of each subcontractor, 2. The number of hours worked by each trade, 3. The number of hours worked by each type of equipment, 4. A basic description of work activities performed, 5. A description of any material or equipment deliveries associated with said work, 6. Description of obstructions encountered and how resolved, 7. The temperature and weather conditions. 8. Downtime due to equipment failure or equipment preparation for work, 9. Detailed descriptions for the causes of work delays. B. The daily reports shall be submitted on a daily basis, by the end of the next calendar day electronically or by paper report submitted. C. Information provided on the daily report shall not constitute notice of delay or any other notice required by the Contract Documents. Claim for a notice of project delay shall be documented as required herein. 1.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUALS A. Prepare complete written maintenance and operating instructions covering all equipment provided under this Contract. Divide the operating instructions into basic sections according to type of equipment. B. Instructions shall describe all equipment and controls, their purpose, and their operation and use. Include maintenance checklists for use by the City's personnel and a complete listing of replacement parts supplied as part of the 01300-6 contract and other pertinent information relative to ordering suc parts that will eventually need ordering for replacement or repair. C. Submit instructions in duplicate draft form for review by the Engineer at least eight weeks prior to initial operation and in final form within thirty days after return of one copy of the draft with the Engineer's notations. D. Prior to release of Final Payments, revise and resubmit copies of the instructions in accordance with any changes in procedures or equipment made during start-up or Commissioning. Re-submittals are also required for changes made during the maintenance bond period. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 TESTING DATA CERTIFICATES A. Product testing shall comply with all applicable SUDAS 2017, lo.va DNR standards and these specifications, B. Certificates of compliance shall be electronically scanned and s._abmitted by email to the Engineer. For final payment the hard copy original, originally signed by required signatory shall be submitted to the Engineer. PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) (END OF SECTION 01300) 01300-7 SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Section includes the submittal process for the operation and maintenance - manuals. The manuals shall contain the technical information requ red for proper installation, operation and maintenance of process, electrical ar d mechanical equipment and systems supplied for this project. 1.2 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Operation and Maintenance Manual Schedule 1. Initial submittal with initial submittal of equipment Shop Drawings. 1.3 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Materials are provided for City's use, reproduction and distribution as training and reference materials. 2. Applicable to hard copy or electronic media. 3. Applicable to materials containing copyright notice as well a: those with no copyright notice. 4. Notify manufacturer of this intended use of materials provi led under the Contract. 5. Number each Operation and Maintenance Manual transmittal with the original root number of the associated Shop Drawing. 6. Identify resubmittals with the original number plus a suffix letter starting with "A." 7. Submittal format: a. Interim submittals: Submit three (3) paper copies with manual is reviewed. 8. Final submittals: a. Within 30-days of receipt of final review, submit three (3) additional paper copies and two (2) electronic copies on Compact Disc (CD- - ROM) or USB drive in Portable Document Format (PDF). 9. Compact discs to be secured in jewel cases or USB drives placed into a clear pocket type holder inside the Manual. 10. Electronic copies will be reviewed for conformance with the aJproved paper copy and the electronic copy (PDF) requirements of this Specification. 11. Non-conforming CDs or USB drives will be returned. 12. Provide final CDs or USB drives within 30-days of receipt of final comments. 13. Paper copy submittals: a. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals printed on 8-1/2 inch x 11-inch size heavy first quality paper with standard three-hole punching and bound in appropriately sized three-ring (or post) vinyl 01730-1 view binders with clear overlays front, spine and back. b. Provide binders with titles inserted under clear overlay on front and on spine of each binder. c. As space allows, binder titles shall include, but not necessarily be limited to: i. Project Name ii. Related Specification Number _4 iii. Equipment Name(s) and iv. Project Equipment Tag Numbers d. Provide a Cover Page for each manual with the following information: i. Manufacturer(s) ii. Date iii. Project Owner and Project Name iv. Specification Section v. Project Equipment Tag Numbers vi. Model Numbers vii. Engineer/ Manufacturer viii. Contractor/ applicable subcontractor e. Provide a Table of Contents or Index for each manual. f. Use plastic-coated dividers to tab each section of each manual per the manual's Table of Contents/Index for easy reference. g. Provide plastic sheet lifters prior to first page and following last page. h. Reduce Drawings or diagrams bound in manuals to an 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch or 11 inch x 17 inch size. i. Where reduction is not practical to ensure readability, fold larger Drawings separately and place in vinyl envelopes which are bound into the binder. j. Identify vinyl envelopes with Drawing numbers. k. Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts and data applicable to the installation for the Project. I. Delete or cross out information that does not specifically apply to the Project. s_ B. Electronic copy submittals: 1. Electronic copies of the approved paper copy Operation and Maintenance Manuals are to be produced in Adobe Acrobat's Portable Document Format (PDF) Version {5.0} or higher. 2. Do not password protect and/or lock the PDF document. 3. Drawings or other graphics must be converted to PDF format and made part of the PDF document. 4. Scanning to be used only where actual file conversion is not possible. 5. Rotate pages that must be viewed in landscape to the appropriate position for easy reading. 6. Images only shall be scanned at a resolution of 300 dpi or greater. 7. Perform Optical Character Recognition (OCR) capture on all images. 8. Achieve OCR with the "original image with hidden text" option. 9. Word searches of the PDF document must operate successfully to demonstrate OCR compliance. 10. Create bookmarks in the navigation frame, for each entry in the Table of Contents/Index. 01730-2 11. Normally three levels deep (i.e., "Chapter," "Section," "Sub-:.ection"). 12. Thumbnails must be generated for each PDF file. 13. Set the opening view for PDF files as follows: a. Initial view: Bookmarks and Page. b. Magnification: Fit in Window. c. Page layout: Single page. d. Set the file to open to the cover page of the manual with bookmarks to the left, and the first bookmark linked to the cover page. e. All PDF documents shall be set with the option "Fast Web View" to open the first pages of the document for the viewer while the rest of the document continues to load. 14. File naming conventions a. File names shall use a"ten dot three"convention (XXXXX-YY-Z.PDF) where XXXXX is the — b. Specification Section number, YY is the Shop Drawinc. Root number and Z is an ID number used to designate the associated volume. i. Example 1: Three (3) mechanical belts & RAB module equipment submitted as separate Shop Drawings under the same Specification Section: Module 1 = 11061-01-1.pdf. Module 2 = 11061-02-1.pdf. Module 3 = 11061-03-1.pdf. ii. Example 2: Skimmer/ sludge structure system submitted a: one (1) Shop Drawing. (1) O&M volumes: Volume 1 = 13440-01-1.pdf. 15. As a minimum, include the following labeling on all CD-ROM discs and jewel cases: a. Project Name b. Equipment Name and Project Tag Number c. Project Specification Section d. Manufacturer Name e. Vendor Name f. Binding i. Include labeled CD(s) in labeled jewel case(s). ii. Bind jewel cases in standard three-ring binder Jewel Case Page(s), inserted at the front of the Final paper col y submittal. iii. Jewel Case Page(s)to have means for securing Jewel Case(s)to prevent loss (e.g., flap and strap). 1.4 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for equipment and systems is applicable but not necessarily limited to: 1. Major equipment; 2. Equipment powered by electrical, pneumatic or hydraulic systems; 3. Specialized equipment and systems including instrumentation and control systems and system components for process system control; 4. Valves and water control gates; 01730-3 5. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, limiting operations; 6. Assembly, disassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions; 7. Operating instructions for start-up, normal operation, control, shutdown, and emergency conditions; 8. Lubrication and maintenance instructions; 9. Troubleshooting guide; 10. Parts lists; a. Comprehensive parts and parts price lists; b. List of spare parts provided as specified in the associated Specification Sections; 11. Outline, cross-section, and assembly Drawings; engineering data; and electrical diagrams, including elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, word description of wiring diagrams and interconnection diagrams; 12. Test data and performance curves; 13. As-constructed fabrication or layout Shop Drawings and wiring diagrams; 14. Instrumentation or tag numbers assigned to the equipment by the Contract Documents are to be used to identify equipment and system components; 15. Additional information as specified in the associated equipment or system Specification Section. 1.5 ENGINEER'S REVIEW ACTION A. Engineer will review and indicate one of the following review actions: 1. REVIEWED 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED 3. RESUBMIT 4. RETURNED B. Refer to General Specifications and Project Forms (Book 2 of 2; SUBMITTALS Part 1.06 Engineer Duties C. Final Reviewed paper copy submittals will be retained with the transmittal form returned with a request for one (1) additional paper copy and two (2) electronic copies. END OF SECTION 01730-4 SECTION 02005 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL SUBMITTALS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings covering project equipment, co itrols and structures. Operational and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided with equipment shop drawing submittals. PART 2 — MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 2.1 Six (6) copies of shop drawings for the following items will be submitted tc. the Engineer for review. Equipment shall not be ordered until final review has been prop, ded. 2.2 Lift Station structural submittals shall be sealed by an Iowa Structural Engineer having current standing with the State of Iowa. The Structural Engineer shall rely upon a sealed Iowa Geotechnical Engineer's report supplied by the Contractor to recommend to the Structural Engineer the soil support available to the Structural Engineer. Copy of Geotechnical report shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. IBC 2009 shall be reference for Structural design. 2.3 Equipment submittals: Each item of equipment or system shall be submitted by an Iowa Professional Engineer in the appropriate discipline showing all dimensions and electrical requirements per applicable specifications. A. Lift Station Pumps/ shoe/ rails/ pump removal crane B. Lift Station precast structure, valve vault control, air release and metering structure C. Structures Bilco doors/vents D. Check Valves, Gate Valves, Fittings E. Magnetic flow meters F. Controls hardware/ software G. Sump pumps H. Concrete Mix/Mortar Mix/ Non-Shrink grout Aggregates J. Concrete Structural blocks K. Roofing frame and sheathing L. Metal Standing seam roof/facia/vents/ soffit M. Metal Door/ lock set and hardware N. Sealants/ Paint O. Fencing/poles/gates/ grounding materials P. Refer to Electrical Sections for all materials and equipment to submit 2.3.1 Valves including gate valves, check valves 2.3.2 All electrical equipment: see all electrical sections for materials and Equipment for submittal. 2.3.3 Paints, doors, hardware and door frames. All locks and keys shall from the same manufacturer Process control system and components, 02005-1 2.3.4 All heaters, plumbing and ventilation equipment, 2.3.5 All generator equipment including automatic transfer switch; underground conduits, conductors, disconnects and breaker boxes. 2.3.6 All equipment including piping, heaters, insulation, controls and support structures and site work elements. 2.3.7 All underground utilities and structures including electrical, sanitary sewer, and site non potable water mains. 2.3.8 Complete footings, foundations, sill plates, walls, roof, siding, facia, doors, painting, �. electrical, including heating and cooling, lighting, electrical with VFD with ATS for generator and site lighting controls. 2.3.9 Structural concrete submittals for footing, foundation, floor, equipment pads, non-shrink -� grout with all reinforcing and sealants necessary to complete construction. 2.3.10 Piping, rock backfill, and aggregate for access drive. 2.3.11 All other materials or equipment not listed but required to complete project shall be submitted. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 (NOT USED) (END OF SECTION 002005) 02005-2 SECTION 02020 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to perform all excavation, backfill, fill, and grading for structures, berms, embankments, and other items required to complete the work shown on the Drawings and specifications herein. The work shall include, but not necessarily limited to, clearing and grubbing, excavation for structures, footings, all backfilling and fill; embankment and grading for structures; disposal of waste and surplus materials; and all related work such as sheeting, bracing and dewatering. B. The information, recommendations and/or requirements of the contractor's geotechnical engineer shall provide guidance. Any recommendations of the geotechnical engineer can take precedence in any conflict between these plans and specifications unless otherwise instructed, in writing, by the Engineer and contingent upon there not being a request for a contract change or der for cost or time. C. Any unused excess fill shall be legally salvaged /disposed of by the Contractor on site. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Soil Testing 1. Prior to the general placement of embankment (fill), and during such placement, the Engineer may select areas within the limits of the fill for testing the degree of compaction obtained. The Contractor shall cooperate fully in obtaining the information requested. 2. Material testing shall be completed by a certified independent geotechnical testing laboratory and shall be paid for by the Contractor. All testing shall be in accordance with the referenced SUDAS 2020 specifications. Copies of all test results shall be sent directly to the Engineer from the independent testing laboratory. The reports shall show satisfactory or unsatisfactory _ compliance with the SUDAS 2020 standards. Certifications shall only be made by Professional Engineers licensed in the State of Iowa. 3. If test results are unsatisfactory, all costs involved in correcting deficiencies in compacted materials to the satisfaction of the Engineer, shall be borne by the Contractor. Repeating testing costs due to constructic n deficiencies shall also be paid for by the Contractor within the total la 1 price of the project. B. Reference Standards 1. Standard Building Code 2. AASHTO Standards, Latest Edition a. AASHTO M231 b. AASHTO R90 c. AASHTO T99 02020-1 d. AASHTO T180 e. AASHTO T217 f. AASHTO T231 g. AASHTO T255/T265 3. Iowa Department of Transportation Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, 2015 edition, applicable sections 4. Iowa Statewide Urban Design and Specification, Latest Edition (SUDAS) 2020 5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM, latest edition) a. ASTM C136/C136M b. ASTM D75 c. ASTM D 1556/D1556M d. ASTM D 1557 e. ASTM D 2167 f. ASTM D 2487 g. ASTM D 2937 h. ASTM D 2972 i. ASTM D 698 j. ASTM E 11 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certified testing laboratory shall prepare reports showing that material for controlled fill meets requirements of this section, or by the Contractor's project geotechnical consultant. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Lateral support of Excavation of Structures: Furnish, put in place, and maintain sheeting and bracing, or alternate support for excavation, required to support the sides of the excavations, to prevent any movement which could in any way diminish the width of the excavation below that necessary for proper construction, and protect structures, pipe, and utilities from ... damage due to lateral movement or settlement of ground. If the Engineer at any point believes sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, he may recommend additional supports put in at the expense of the Contractor, and compliance with such recommendation shall not relieve or release the Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. 1.5 ALTERNATE SPECIFICATIONS A. Special attention is called to the fact that certain portions of the work for this project are described by references to the Standard Specifications. The term Standard Specifications referenced standard #4 shown in Item 1.2.B above, in this Specification. Where specific details regarding materials or method of construction have been omitted in the specifications or plans, such work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the SUDAS 2020 Standard Specifications. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS FOR CONTROLLED FILL A. General 02020-2 1. Unless a source is shown on the Drawings or identified in these specifications, materials shall be furnished, as required from on or off-site sources, hauled to the site and placed at the location required at no additional cost to the City. 2. For each on-site or off-site material proposed, the Contractor shall notify the Testing lab of the source of the material at least ten (10) calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such material. 3. The Contractor shall limit all construction operations within the identified construction easements and property where applicable. The Contractor shall restore all areas and property to preconstruction conditions prior to acceptance and resultant final payment. B. Embankment (Fill) 1. The embankment shall only be placed on acceptable materi 11 prepared as recommended by the Geotechnical Engineer. This induces but is not limited to stripping topsoil, over excavation of unsuitable naterials, and other preparations required or recommended in the geote chnical report and by the project geotechnical testing consultant. 2. Material shall be handled as recommended by the geotecl-nical report, if provided, and by the project geotechnical testing consultant cn site at time of activity being performed. 2.2 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL Highly Organic soil ASTM D 2487 Group PT, topsoil, roots, vegetable matter, trash and debris, SUDAS 2020 specifications, or as determined by the project geotechnical testing consultant. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND COMPACTION PROCEDURES - GENERAL A. Excavation shall be made to such widths as will give suitable room fir construction of the structures, for bracing and supporting, pumping, and drainage, and the bottom of the excavations shall be rendered firm and dry and in all respects acceptable to the Engineer. B. Excavation and aewatering shall be accomplished by methods which preserve the undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Subgrade soil which becomes, soft, loose, "quick", or otherwise unsatisfactory for support of structures as because of inadequate excavation, dewatering or other construction methods shall be removed and replaced by structural fill as required by the Contractor's Geotechnical Engineer at the Contractor's expense. C. Excavation equipment shall be satisfactory for carrying out the work in accordance with the Specifications. In no case, shall the earth be plowed, scraped or dug with machinery so near to the finished subgrade as to result in excavation of, or disturbance of material below grade D. During final excavation to subgrade level, take whatever precautions are required to prevent disturbance and remolding of the subgrade. Material which has become softened and mixed with water shall be removed. 02020-3 E. All structure areas shall be stripped, cleared and grubbed of all surface vegetation and root laden top soils. The contractor will be required to separate all available organic topsoil from other trench material. The top soil shall be used to top-dress the backfill to a minimum depth of 6-inches to provide suitable soil for seed growth. Excess topsoil shall be spread on areas adjacent to the new construction. F. After stripping per the Contractor's geotechnical engineer's recommendations, the structure areas should be leveled sufficiently to permit equipment traffic and then proof-rolled with a vibratory roller with at least a 20-ton static weight, or equivalent. Careful observations should be made during proof rolling of the stripped subgrade area to identify any areas of soft yielding soils that may require over excavation and replacement. G. Compaction should continue until a minimum density of 95% of material standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698) is achieved. Structure backfill within the building area and under access drive should consist of aggregate backfill. H. All temporary sedimentation and erosion control measures shall be installed and operational prior to initiating any dewatering, clearing and grubbing, excavation and replacement. 3.2 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION A. Using large mechanized compaction equipment, fill shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 9-inches (4-inches for small mechanized compaction equipment) and should be completed to a moisture controlled minimum of 95% of material standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698). B. Embankment next to the building, structures, utility trenches shall follow the recommendations of the Contractor's Geotechnical Engineer. This shall include - but is not limited to benching, excavation, fill heights, embankment material, moisture content, and alternate embankment materials. C. Backfill with granular aggregate material, shall be used as a minimum at the following locations 1. Voids caused by removing existing underground utilities or utility support apparatus that are under existing streets, driveways, or slabs having permanent concrete or seal coat surfaces. 2. Voids caused by excavation for proposed, relocated, or temporary underground utilities or utility support apparatus that are under or within five feet of existing streets, driveways, or slabs having permanent concrete or seal coat surfaces. 3. Pipe envelope backfill material. 4. Areas within five feet of an existing or proposed building or structure. D. Materials placed in fill areas shall be deposited to the limits shown on the Drawings making due allowance for settlement of the material and for the placing of topsoil thereon. E. The surfaces of filled areas shall be graded to smooth true lines, strictly conforming to grades indicated on the Drawings or reviewed shop drawings, and no soft spots or non-supportive soil areas will be allowed in the work. 02020-4 F. No compacting shall be performed when the material is too wet either from rain or from excess application of water. At such times, work shall be suspended until the previously placed and new materials have dried or been modified sufficiently to permit proper compaction and is within 3% of optimum moisture ontent or soil report listed value. G. All excavations for construction items specified not requiring granular backfill shall be backfilled with moisture controlled select subsoil backfill material compacted to 95% of maximum standard proctor density. 3.3 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL A. Unsuitable excavated materials shall become the property of the Contractor and removed and disposed of by him off the project site. B. Suitable excavated material may be used for fill or backfill if it meets the specifications for common fill and is approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. Excavated materials so approved may be neatly stockpiled at the site, where there is an area available that will not interfere with the operation of the plant or inconvenience traffic or adjoining property owners. If space limitations do not permit stockpiling on the site, the Contractor will be required to offsite stockpiling at no additional cost to the City. Transport of such material from and to the immediate site, including any stockpiling agreements, shall be entirely at the Contractor's expense and shall not constitute grounds for additional payment. C. Surplus excavated material shall be used to fill depressions or other purposes as the Engineer may direct. Otherwise, it shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed and legally disposed of by the Contractor off the project site at a Contractor provided location. D. If a location to place surplus material is identified, by the Engineer s direction, or shown in the Drawings, the contractor shall transport the material to that site. The disposal site shall be treated as the proposed project site. The site shall provide erosion and sedimentation control, be cleared and grubbed, and stripped of top soil before placing and compacting, or stockpiling, the surplus material. Upon completion, or during intermediate breaks in construction, the site shall be stabilized in accordance with SWPPP requirements. This work will not constitute — grounds for additional payment. E. Excess borrow or surplus material shall be moved along designated haul routes. If a haul route has not been designated in the Drawings or specifications, a haul route should be reviewed with the Engineer before use and avoid residential streets except where allowed by the Engineer in writing. Contractor shall submit a haul route to the Engineer for approval one week prior to initiation of any hauling operations. The truck haul route should primarily use collectors and arterial roadways whenever possible. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the necessary permits or authorization for use of the truck haul route by the project. These permits and work will not constitute grounds for additional payment by the City. 3.4 GRADING A. Grading in preparation for placing of topsoil, planting areas and drives, and appurtenances shall be performed at all places that are indicated on the Drawings, to the lines, grades, and elevations shown and otherwise as directed by the 02020-5 Engineer. Such work shall be performed in a manner that the requirements for formation of slopes, lines, and grades can be followed. All materials encountered, of whatever nature, within the limits indicated, shall be removed and legally disposed. During the process of grading, the subgrade shall always be maintained in such condition that it will be well drained. Temporary drains and drainage ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert surface water which may affect the progress or conditions of the work. B. If, at the time of grading, it is not possible to place any material in its proper section of the permanent structure, it shall be stockpiled for later use. No extra payment will be made for the stockpiling or double handling of excavated material. Such material should be immediately stabilized and surrounded with a silt fence or compost sock (as determined by the Engineer) if it is to remain undisturbed during the next 14 calendar days. C. The right is reserved to make minor adjustments or revisions to lines and grades, if found necessary as the work progresses, due to discrepancies on the Drawings -° or to obtain satisfactory construction. D. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4-in their greatest dimensions will not be permitted in the top 12-in of the finished subgrade of all fills or embankments. This condition will not be allowed in pipe backfills as well. E. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be jarred loose or otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and fill slopes shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross section, and alignment shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. F. No grading is to be performed in areas where there are existing pipe lines that may be uncovered or damaged until such lines have been located and it has been determined if such lines must be maintained are relocated, or where lines are to be abandoned, all required valves are closed and remaining pipes plugged. (END SECTION 02020) 02020-6 SECTION 02230 DEWATERING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to perform all dewatering activities required to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. If required, the contractor shall obtain the necessary permits associated with the dewatering method proposed for construction. The work shall include, but not necessarily limited to, permitting, mobilization, clearing and grubbing for site(s), excavation for dewatering, disposal of waste, materials, mobilization; accommodating site conditions, and all related work such as sheeting, filtering and pumping. B. The requirements of the site, and the Contractor's project geotechnical engineer, shall provide recommendations that shall take precedence in any conflict between these Specifications and any other agency unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. C. All dewatering shall be considered incidental to all pay items that ma,j require such work and no additional costs shall be paid by the City for such work 1.2 JOB CONDITIONS A. Dewatering General Furnish, install, maintain, operate, and remove a temporary dewatering system, as required, to lower and control the groundwater level, or divert after proper treatment to an open waterway conveyance so that structures and piping can be constructed and areas can be graded in the dry. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, correct all damage resulting from inadequacy of the dewatering system or from flooding of the construction site from other causes at no additional cost to the City. B. Dewatering System 1. The dewatering system shall be sized to adequately drain any excavated area or accommodate open waterway conveyance flows, to maintain the water at such a level as to permit construction in the dry, and to maintain the lowered water table or bypass diversion until the structures, piping and grading have been completed to the required stages above the water table or outside the open waterway conveyance banks. 2. Continuously maintain excavation in a dry condition to prevent damage to the subsoil or fill during interruptions due to weather, labor strikes, power failures, heavy storm water flows, or other delays. Provide and or have at ready for immediate use a diesel or gasoline powered standby pumping units to serve the system in case of failure of the normal pumping units. 3. Piping and boiling, or any form of uncontrolled seepage in the bottom or sides of the excavation shall be prevented. If for any reason the dewatering system is found to be inadequate to meet the requirements set forth herein, 02230-1 the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make such additions, changes and/or replacements as necessary to provide a satisfactory system. C. Control of Ground Water Level 1. For Structures, maintain the ground water level at or below subgrade of the structure until the concrete structures are up high enough to (1) prevent .... flooding the structure, (2) support both bottom and top levels of walls, and (3) prevent floatation. 2. After any structure has been completed in its entirety, backfill as described hereinafter. 3. Floatation shall be prevented by maintaining a positive and continuous operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable for all damages which may result from failure of this system. 4. Disposal of drainage water shall be in an area allowed by the required permits. Precautions shall be taken to prevent the flow or seepage of drainage back into the area of work. Efforts shall be taken to prevent the discharge of unsuitable drainage to a water supply or surface water body. 5. Removal of the dewatering system shall be accomplished after the �x dewatering system is no longer required. 1.3 ALTERNATE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS A. Special attention is called to the fact that certain portions of the work for this project are described by reference to the "Standard Specifications". The term "Standard Specifications" refers to the Iowa Department of Transportation Standard Specification for Highway and Bridge Construction, latest edition and the SUDAS 2020 Standard Specifications, Latest Edition. In any case, where a specific detail regarding materials or method of construction has been omitted in the specifications, such work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Standard Specification. B. SUBMITTALS If applicable, Contractor shall submit permit to the appropriate reviewing agency for the method of dewatering. Contractor shall provide forms, fees, and technical data as required. A copy of said permit, if attained, shall be submitted to the Engineer for project documentation purposes. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — DEWATERING PROCEDURES 3.1 GENERAL A. Dewatering shall be accomplished by methods which preserve the undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Subgrade soil which becomes soft, loose, "quick", or otherwise unsatisfactory for support of structures or piping, structure or embankment because of inadequate dewatering or other construction methods shall be removed and replaced by structural clean aggregate or flowable fill as required by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. -- 02230-2 B. Dewatering shall be such as to prevent boiling or detrimental under seepage at the base of the excavation as specified herein. The Contractor shall install such means as required to preserve the stability of the base of operation C. All temporary sedimentation and erosion control measures ar d backup or supplemental equipment and materials shall be installed and operftional prior to initiating any dewatering, clearing, and grubbing, excavation, or embankment operations. D. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform all incidental work required to install and maintain the dewatering and drainage system he proposes for handling ground water or surface water encountered. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the adequacy of the methods, materials, and equipment employed. Construction shall not begin until the Engineer is assured that the proposed method will be satisfactory. Requirements for a stable subgrade are indicated below, and the Contractor must alter his drainage methods, if, in the opinion of the engineer, the bottom of the excavation is unsatisfactory. E. The Contractor shall provide pumping equipment and devices to properly bypass, remove and/or dispose of all water entering the trenches and excavation, or being bypassed around excavation. The grade shall be maintained acceptably dry until structures, pipes and bottom grading therein are complete. All drainage shall be performed without damage to the trench, pavements, pipes, electrical conduits, or other utilities. F. Pipe and masonry shall not be laid in water or submerged within 24 hours after being placed. Water shall not flow over new masonry within four days after placement. G. In no set of circumstances shall water rise to cause unbalanced pressure on structures or piping until the concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours. The Contractor shall prevent floatation of the structure(s) or pipe by promptly placing backfill, concrete encasement with rock backfill or flowable fill. H. If the Contractor elects to use underdrains for handling water, he shall furnish and install pipe and crushed stone graded from course to fine, and shall furnish and install all pumps and equipment necessary to maintain the water level continuously at the required elevation. This work if performed will be performed with no expectation of additional cost to the City. The invert of the underdrain shall be 12-inch below the bottom of the footing of a structure or the flow line of any site process or drainage pipe. Pipe underdrains shall have no permanent outlet and shall be sealed at the completion of the work. The length of continuous underdrain to be used shall be limited as conditions require. An impervious bulkhead of clay or concrete shall be constructed in the trench bottom between 100-feet lengths of the underdrain system to obstruct the free flow of ground water after construction is completed. All excavation below normal grade for installing underdrains, the crushed stone and underdrain pipe shall able considered part of the drainage work to be done under the pipe items. The Contractor shall continually guard against the loss of earth through sub-base or the underdrain. Should loss of either take place, the Contractor shall alter the stone size to provide a satisfactory barrier or filter. 02230-3 J. Where other methods of handling water prove inadequate, the contractor shall furnish, install, operate, and remove proper well point facilities, additional pumps or other measures as required to allow for dry construction. (END OF SECTION 02230) 02230-4 SECTION 03001 CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Concrete Tanks, footings, foundations, walls, and precast strucrjres, B. Formwork, shoring, bracing, and anchorage, C. Concrete reinforcement and accessories, D. Cast-in-place concrete. E. Non-shrink grout and other cement-based materials. 1.2 STRUCTURES REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT A. Section 04200 Electrical Equipment Structure B. Section 04200 Pump Station 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 01005 — Detailed General Specification B. Electric Controls building foundation and floor C. Precast Concrete materials (manholes) 1.4 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specifications of Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ASTM A1064 — Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire aid Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. C. ASTM A615 — Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain C irbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement D. ASTM C33 — Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. ASTM C94 — Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete E. ASTM C150 — Standard Specification for Portland Cement. F. ASTM C260 — Standard Specification for Air-Entraining AdmixtL res for Concrete. G. ASTM C309— Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forrling Compounds for Curing Concrete. H. ASTM D2103 — Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting. ASTM C618 — Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. J. IDOT Standard Specifications for Construction - Current Edition 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301 and SUDAS 2019 Standards. 03001-1 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for type of structure being constructed. 1.7 TESTS A. Testing and analysis of concrete will be performed under provisions of Section 01400 - Quality Control. B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to Engineer for review prior to commencement of work. C. Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests in accordance with SUDAS Standards. D. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 40 or less cu yds. of each class of concrete placed each day. E. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather, air and ground temperature 40 degrees or lower and be cured on site under same conditions as the concrete it represents. F. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. 1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each structure shall have structural shop drawing submitted of reinforcing steel and formwork under provisions of Section 01300 Submittals. Each Submittal requires an Iowa Structural Engineers seal on submittal. B. Indicate reinforcement sizes, spacings, locations and quantities of reinforcing steel, and wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, splicing, and supporting and spacing devices. C. Indicate formwork dimensioning, materials, arrangement of joints and ties. D. Prepare shop drawings for tank module foundation structure under seal of Engineer registered in State of Iowa. Iowa structural Engineer to reply upon Contractor retained Iowa Geotechnical Engineer to make such soils examinations and soils reports to support recommendations as required by Contractor selected Iowa Structural Engineer. The Iowa Geotechnical Engineer shall submit as shop drawings, written reports made to Contractor. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Conform to ACI 301 and SUDAS 2019 Standards. B. Plywood Forms: 5 Ply Douglas Fir species; solid one side; sound undamaged sheets with clean true edges. C. Lumber: Pine species; No.2 grade; with grade stamp clearly visible. D. Steel Forms: Smooth, true and undamaged; stiffened to support weight of concrete with minimum deflection. E. Glass Fiber Reinforced Resin Type: Preformed shape, stiffened to support weight of concrete with minimum deflection. 03001-2 F. Tubular Column Type: Round, spirally wound laminated fiber m aerial; inside surface treated with release agent. G. Form Ties: Snap-off metal, of fixed length. 2.2 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade billet steel de crmed bars; uncoated finish. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ASTM A1064; in flat sheen; uncoated finish. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, moderate - Type II Portland, with air entraining admixture, grey Color.Fine Aggregates: ASTM C33 and IDOT 2NS. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33 and IDOT 6AA. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Fiber Reinforcement: 1/2-inch polypropylene fibers by Iowa DO— MAPLE approved provider, or engineer approved equivalent. B. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260; manufactured by W. R. Grace an Company or Axim Concrete Technologies or engineer approved equal. C. Chemical: ASTM C494, Type A -Water Reducing admixture; manufactured by W. R. Grace and Company or Axim Concrete Technologies or engineer approved equivalent. D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618. E. Chloride base admixtures are prohibited in all reinforced concrete. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin; Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod manufactured by Sika Corp.; Concressive 1001 LPL 3007 manufactured by Structural Bonding Company or engineer approved equivalent. B. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days; Five Star Grout manufactured by U.S. Grout Company or engineer approved equivalent. C. Epoxy Adhesive: Two component epoxy resin adhesive; Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod LV manufactured by Sika Corporation, Glendale Hts., IL (708) 924-7900, or engineer approved equivalent. D. Adhesive Anchors: Hilti HVA adhesive anchoring system. Hilti adhesive anchors shall be comprised of an HEA capsule with an ASTM A193, Grade B7, HAS stainless steel rod assembly with stainless steel ASTM F594 nuts and ANSI 03001-3 B18.221 (1965), Type A, plain washers under the turned element. Install per manufacturer's specifications. E. Waterstops: Polyvinylchloride; 4 inches wide; heat sealed joints; manufactured by B.F. Goodrich, W.R. Meadows, or engineer approved equivalent. 1. Bentonite Waterstops: Continuous 1-inch x 3/4 inch strips containing 75 percent bentonite by weight. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Waterstop- RX, manufactured by American Collard Company or equal. 2. Construction Joints: ANSI/ASTM D1751 type; 1/4 inch to 1 inch thick, manufactured by A.C.D. International or engineer approved equivalent. 3. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete: manufactured by W.R. Meadows or engineer approved equivalent. 4. Corners: Chamfered, wood strip type 1" x 1" size. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Water: Clean and drinkable. B. Absorptive Mats: ASTM C171, cotton fabric or burlap-polyethylene, 8 oz./sq. yd., bonded to prevent separation during use. C. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309 Type 1, Class B, liquid acrylate type, clear for interior or exterior use in areas that may receive subsequent finishes manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products, W.R. Meadows or equal. D. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 2, Class B, white pigmented finish for exterior use, manufactured by W.R. Meadows or engineer approved equivalent. 2.7 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Class A; recommended standard or as deemed necessary by structural engineer: 1. Compressive Strength days: *+ 2600 psi Compressive Strength 28 days: *+ 4000 psi Slump: *+ 4-2 inch C. All concrete exposed to weathering shall be air entrained with 3.5% to 6.5% total air content by volume. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK ERECTION 03001-4 A. Verify lines, levels, and measurements before proceeding with t=work. B. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms; remove loose dirt. C. Align form joints. D. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces receive special finishes or applied coatings which may be affected by agent. E. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. F. Install chamfered wood strips at all exposed corners unless stated otherwise. G. Install and secure formwork prior to placing concrete. 3.2 REINFORCEMENT A. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement B. Locate reinforcing splices at locations indicated on the reviewer shop drawings. C. Notify Engineer three working days prior to placing concrete. D. Per Contract all steel to be American made steel. See Exhibit 7 A American Iron and Steel front end specification. 3.3 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with SUDAS Standards. B. Notify Engineer three working days prior to concrete placement C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fill~ rs, joint devices and accessories are not disturbed. D. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion control and construction joints. E. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. F. Thoroughly compact concrete immediately after placing by means of mechanical vibrators or other suitable tools approved by the Engineer. F. Concrete transported in a truck mixer, agitator or other transportation G. device shall be discharged at the job within 1 1/2 hours after the water has been added to the cement or aggregates. The time batched and the amount of water, in gallons or weight, shall be noted on each batch ticket. When applicable the ounces of air entrainment added shall be noted on the ticket. H. When hand mixing is authorized, it shall be performed on a watertight platform and in such a manner as to ensure a uniform distribution of the materials throughout the mass. Mixing shall continue until a homogeneous mixture of the required consistency is obtained. Re-tempering of partially hardened concrete or mortar will not be permitted. 3.4 EXISTING WORK 03001-5 A. Where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete insert steel dowels and pack with non-shrinking grout or approved epoxy. Epoxy to be used on this project shall be submitted with mix design(s) for the project. B. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Formed Surfaces. 1. As a minimum, all formed surfaces shall receive a plain finish and a rubbed finish. 2. Plain Finish: Immediately after removal of forms, all fins and loose mm material shall be removed and all holes, voids, aggregate pockets and depressions shall be cut out to solid concrete. All such defective areas shall be cleaned and wetted. Portland Cement grout finished, flush with the adjacent surfaces. Patch work shall be damp cured for a period of 48 hours and, when exposed, it shall be finished to match adjacent surfaces. 3. Rubbed Finish: All form marks and other such irregularities shall be removed by rubbing the surface with a Carborundum stone and water as soon as practical after form removal on outside of module. 4. Bagged Finish: All formed surfaces which are not earth backfilled shall receive a bagged finish. All air and water voids shall be finished flush with the wall surface. The wall shall first be moistened with water. Portland cement grout matching the color of the base concrete shall be worked into the voids using burlap or sponge rubber finishing pads. B. Unformed Surface Finishes 1. Troweled finish: After a floated finish, provide a smooth surface, free of defects with a steel trowel. Follow the first troweling with a second troweling after the concrete has hardened sufficiently to produce a ringing sound as the trowel is moved over the surface.The finish surface shall be essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and shall be plane to a 1/8 " in 10 ft. tolerance. 2. Broomed Finish: After receiving the floated and troweled finishes, apply a broomed finish with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to the line of traffic. 3. Floated finish: Place, consolidate, strike off and level concrete. After the concrete has stiffened sufficiently, floating shall begin using a hand float, power trowel with float shoes or powered disc float. Cut down high spots and fill low spots to a 1/4" in 10 ft. tolerance. Float to a uniform sandy texture. 03001-6 4. Scratched finish: After the concrete has been placed consolidated, struck off and leveled to a 1/4" in 2 ft. tolerance, roughen with stiff brushes or rakes before the final set. C. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. D. Provide a troweled finish for base slabs. E. Provide a floated finish for slabs as directed by the Engineer. F. Provide a broom finish for exterior landing. G. Maximum variation of surface flatness for exposed concrete flocrs 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Submit methods for curing for review by the Engineer with structure and flat work submittal, B. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature setting, C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. D. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with SUDAS 2019 Standards. E. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply curing compound in accor Jance with manufacturer's instructions. Curing compound shall not contain any ingredients which might stain or otherwise injure the concrete or prevent god bond for subsequent coatings or finishes. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL — A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance wit's SUDAS 2019 Standards. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with contractor's te5 ting firm. C. Notify Engineer 3 working days in advance of any scheduled placement of concrete. 3.8 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained suffic ent strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Results of tests may be used to verify the strength gain of the concrete prior to removal of forms. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of and — payment for additional test cylinders necessary or requested by the Engineer for this purpose. C. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or t(.iols against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. D. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact w,th fresh concrete will not be damaged. Do not use damaged forms. 3.9 PATCHING 03001-7 A. Allow Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Engineer upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301. 3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances, strength or other specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Engineer. Replacement of defective concrete shall not affect overall schedule of project or justify a change order for additional cost to City. (END OF SECTION 03001) 03001-8 SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ELECTRIC CONTROL BUILDING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Statement giving source and material certificates, and proportions by weight of cement, fine and coarse aggregates, and admixtures for mortar and grout. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's literature for decorative masonry unit. 2. Manufacturer's literature for wall reinforcing, anchors, and block reinforcing. C. Samples: 1. Decorative masonry unit. D. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Material certification for concrete masonry units. Test data shall r Dt be more than 1 yr old. E. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sample Panel: 1. 4 ft long 4 ft high for each type of decorative masonry unit. 2. Sample panel shall include following. a. Selected color range. b. Selected range of texture. c. Bonding. d. Mortar color. e. Tooled joints. f. Quality of workmanship. g. Typical reinforcement and ties. 3. Do not start Work until ENGINEER has accepted sample panel. 4. Use panel as standard of comparison for masonry work built of same material. Failure of masonry work to meet or exceed quality of workmanship depicted by sample panel shall be cause for rejection. 5. Do not destroy or move panel until Work is completed and accepted by CITY. B. Constructed masonry to meet requirements of local building code, and ACI 530 and 530.1. 04810-1 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units above ground on level platforms which allow air circulation under stacked units. B. Cover and protect against wetting prior to use. C. Handle units or pallets or flat bed barrows. -. D. Free discharge from conveyor units or transporting in mortar trays NOT ALLOWED. E. Deliver cementitious materials in manufacturer's standard packages. 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Protection: 1. When ambient temperature falls below 40° F or when temperature of masonry units is below 40°F: a. Temperature of masonry units shall not be less than 32°F when laid in masonry. Remove visible ice on masonry units before unit is laid in masonry. b. Heat mortar sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40°F and 120°F at time of mixing. Maintain mortar above freezing until used in masonry. c. Use heat sources where ambient temperatures are between 20°F and 25°F, on both sides of masonry under construction and install wind breaks when wind velocity is in excess of 15 mph. d. Where ambient temperatures are below 20°F, provide enclosure for masonry under construction and use heat sources to maintain temperatures above 32°F within enclosure. e. Where mean daily temperatures are between 32°F and 40°F, protect completed masonry from rain or snow by covering with weather resistive membrane for 24 hrs after construction. f. Where mean daily temperatures are between 25°F and 32°F, completely cover completed masonry with weather-resistive membrane for 24 hrs after construction. g. Where mean daily temperatures are between 20°F and 25°F, completely cover completed masonry with insulating blankets or equal protection for 24 hrs after construction. h. Where mean daily temperatures are below 20°F, maintain masonry temperature above 32°F for 24 hrs after construction by enclosure with supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared heat lamps, or other -- acceptable methods. B. Hot Weather Protection: 1. When ambient air temperature exceeds 100°F, or 90°F with wind velocity greater than 8 mph: 04810-2 a. Do not spread mortar beds more than 4 ft ahead of masonry. b. Set masonry units within 1 min of spreading mortar. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Materials: 1. Aggregates: a. Mortar: ASTM C144, acceptable in color, 10% passing No. 1 C 0 sieve. b. Grout: ASTM C404. 2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. 3. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type S. 4. Lime: Hydrated lime, ASTM C207, Type S. 5. Water Repellent Mortar Admixture: a. Dry-Block by W.R. Grace & Co. 6. Water: Portable. 7. Use no antifreeze compounds. 8. Coloring Pigments: Provide coloring pigments of iron oxide, manganese dioxide or chromium oxide along with either grey or white cement as required to achieve color of mortar selected by ENGINEER. B. Proportions: 1. Mortar: ASTM C270, property specification: Type S (1,800 psi). 2. Masonry Grout: ASTM C476 (2,500 psi minimum). 3. Measure materials by volume. Use within 1 hr. 4. Use water repellent mortar admixture for CMU exposed to earth (:r weather in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) A. Hollow Lightweight Concrete Block: ASTM C90. B. Hollow Standard Weight Concrete Block: ASTM C90. C. Solid Block: ASTM C90. Standard weight. Concrete filled hollow star lard weight concrete blocks may be substituted. D. Water Repellent Concrete Block: Hollow, standard weight, concrete Hock with water repellent mortar admixture added to concrete mix. E. Decorative Concrete Masonry Units (Full Face Split): 04810-3 1. Manufacturers: a. Truss, Ladur, Ladur Tri-Rod, CRT, or Dur-O-Tab by Dur-O-Wall, Inc. b. Ladder Type or Truss Type by Heckmann Building Products, Inc. c. Ladder-Mesh, Truss-Mesh, Cavity Ladder-Tri-Mesh, Ladder-Box-Mesh with drip, or Truss-Box-Mesh by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. 2. Two parallel, longitudinal, 9 ga, galvanized, rods weld-connected to 9 ga galvanized cross-rods, spaced at 16 in. oc, conforming to ASTM A82 for single wythe construction or for cavity wall construction when cavity ties are used. Three parallel, longitudinal, 9 ga, galvanized, rods weld-connected to 9 ga galvanized cross-rods, spaced at 16 in., oc, conforming to ASTM A82 for cavity wall and multi-wythe construction. 3. Provide special manufactured corner and wall intersection pieces. 4. Electronically weld cross-ties. 5. Zinc Coated a. Interior Walls: ASTM A641 Class I. b. Exterior Walls: ASTM A153 Class B2. 2.04 WEEPHOLE MATERIAL A. Vertical Cell Vent: 3/8 in. W x 2-1/2 in. Id x 3-3/8 in. L; gray polypropylene, multi-cell construction. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL _. A. Lay masonry true to dimensions, plumb, square, in bond, and properly anchored with courses level and joints uniform. B. Provide full mortar beds for solid and hollow units to be filled with mortar or grout. Other hollow masonry units shall have face-shell mortar beds. C. Tool joints on exposed walls concave, 1/8 in. maximum depth unless otherwise noted. Wipe joints with burlap or brush with soft brush to remove mortar projecting beyond face of block after joints are tooled. Cut mortar flush with surface of concealed block. D. Provide reinforced concrete masonry lintels over doors, windows, and other openings where noted and wherever steel lintels not provided. Form lintels by using lintel or bond beam units. Place reinforcing steel and fill with masonry grout. Texture of lintels shall match wall texture. Lintels shall have minimum 8 in. bearing on masonry beyond edges of opening except noted on Drawings. Openings less than 4 ft in width not having lintels scheduled shall have 8 in. high reinforced masonry lintels or double 04810-4 steel angle lintels. Reinforce masonry lintels with two No. 5 bars. Fill cores under lintels with masonry grout. E. Provide control joints. Conform to details shown. F. Unless otherwise shown, provide continuous bond beam around top of buildings at roof bearing elevation. Reinforce with two No. 5 bars. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Dimension of Elements: 1. In Cross-Section or Elevation: -1/4in. to +1/2 in. 2. Mortar Joint Thickness: ±1/8 in. B. Elements: 1. Variation from Level: a. Bed joints: ±1/4 in. in 10 ft. ±1/2 in. maximum. b. Top surface of walls: ±1/4 in. in 10 ft. ±1/2 in. maximum. 2. Variation from Plumb: ±1/4 in. in 10 ft. ±3/8 in. in 20 ft. ±1/2 in. maximum. 3. True to a Line: ±1/4 in. in 10 ft. ±3/8 in. in 20 ft. ±1/2 in. maximum 4. Alignment of Columns and Walls (bottom versus top): ±1/2 in. C. Location of Elements: 1. Indicated on Drawings: ±1/2 in. in 20 ft. ±3/4 in. maximum. 2. Indicated in Elevation: ±1/4 in. in story height, ±3/4 in. maximum. 3.03 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Use lightweight or standard weight concrete block for interior partitions. B. Use water repellent concrete block where exposed to weather or earth. C. Exposed inside face of concrete block surfaces shall form finished wall surfaces. Painted walls or special coatings on wall are considered exposed walls. D. Provide special blocks for corners, control joints, jambs, sills, lintels, and bond beams. E. Provide bull nose edges where shown and at all interior exposed vertical corners, including door and window openings. F. Fill cores of hollow units with mortar or grout where bolts, anchors or similar items occur within hollow units. G. Flashing: 04810-5 1. Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections which might puncture or otherwise damage flashing material. 2. Place through-wall flashing on bed of mortar. 3. Cover flashing with mortar. H. Provide weepholes by omission of 1 in. of mortar head joints or provide tubes or sash cord at base of flashings, steel lintels, and base of walls. Space not over 2 ft 8 in. with minimum of 1 weephole between openings. Keep weephoels and area above flashing free of mortar droppings. I. Bond Patterns: 1. Decorative CMU: running bond. 2. Other CMY: running bond. 3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORS A. Provide submittal masonry anchors, ties, reinforcement, and inserts. B. Bond intersection of exterior walls and interior load bearing walls by use of horizontal joint reinforcement, extend into wall at least 30 in. Conform to details shown. C. Bond intersection of interior non load bearing walls by use of horizontal joint reinforcement, extend into wall at least 16 in. D. Reinforce concrete block walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcement. Lap reinforcing minimum of 6 in. and stagger splices 32 in. or more. Space reinforcement not over 16 in. oc. E. Provide additional bonding ties spaced not more than 8 in. apart around perimeter of and within 12 in. of openings. F. Provide vertical reinforcement in fully-grouted cores. 3.06 INSTALLAION OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Install steel lintels that bear on masonry. Build into masonry rough frames, bucks, and metal frames for openings in walls and partitions. Fill cores under lintels with masonry grout. B. Build in items such as anchors, anchor bolts, inserts, sleeves, brackets, bearing plates, furnished under this or other sections. C. Build in items of mechanical, heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and electrical work including anchors and anchor bolts. Point-up joints between masonry, cabinets, outlet boxes, and metal work. D. Set units plumb, square, true, and level before building into masonry. 04810-6 - E. Avoid loosening or disturbing temporary bracing holding frames. Set masonry tightly against inside of frames and slush full voids with mortar. Build anchus into joints and fill masonry cores adjacent to frame with grout. 3.07 GROUTING A. Conform to requirements of ACI 530.1. B. Spaces to be grouted shall be free of mortar dropping, debris, loose; aggregates, and material deleterious to masonry grout. C. Reinforcement and ties shall be in place prior to grouting. D. Cleanouts: When grout pour exceeds 5 ft in height, cleanouts shall be provided in bottom course of masonry. 1. Cleanouts shall be provided adjacent to each vertical bar. 2. Size of cleanout openings shall be of sufficient size to permit removal of debris. Minimum opening dimension shall be 3 in. 3. After cleaning, close cleanouts with closures to match adjacer t wall surface and brace to resist grout pressure. E. Place grout in lifts not exceeding 5 ft. F. Consolidate grout at time of placement 1. Consolidate grout pours 12 in. or less in height by mechanical vibration or by pudding. 2. Consolidate pours exceeding 12 in. in height by mechanical vibration and reconsolidate by mechanical vibration after initial water los an :i settlement has occurred. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect masonry from damage. B. Cover freshly laid masonry and walls not being worked on to prevent rapid drying and to exclude rain and snow. - C. Cover items susceptible to damage with wood nosings or boxing. Us no lumber or materials susceptible to staining or defacing masonry. D. Brace walls until roof or floor system in-place. Bond beam grout at roof elevation shall be a minimum of 7 days old prior to removal of bracing. E. Do not apply superimposed loads until completed masonry reaches resign strength. 1. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hrs of er completing masonry. 2. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after comp ieting masonry. 04810-7 3.09 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut and patch to accommodate Work of other section. Patch around items such as outlet boxes, piping, and steel work. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean and point concrete block surfaces. Clean as units are set, daily, and upon completion. Acid shall not be used. B. Remove surplus mortar and leave surface of masonry clean and finished. Remove large particles of mortar before cleaning walls. Remove sharp burrs on exposed block mortar joints. ***END OF SECTION*** -- 04810-8 SECTION 07191 MASONRY WATER REPELLENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Masonry water repellent. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's product data including technical literature on materials and performance characteristics. 2. Manufacturer's recommended instructions for application of stain and clear water repellents. B. Miscellaneous: 1. Applicator's list of projects using waterproofing system submitted, 2. Submit certification stating water repellent material to be applied in compliance with federal, state, and local environmental Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) regulations. C. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Firm with no less than 10 yrs. experience in manufactl;ring products specified. B. Applicator's Qualifications: Firm with no less than 3 yrs. experience in application of products specified. Persons applying products shall be trained and approved by manufacturer for application of manufacturers products. Applicator shall provide equipment that is proper for intended use and that has been well maintained. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of pollution-control regulatory agency having jurisdiction in Project locale regarding VOC's and use of hydrocarbon solvents. D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain stain and water repellent produ:,ts from single manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 07191-1 A. Material Delivery: Deliver materials to job site in original sealed containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name, type of material, and color or color formula. Verify product matched that of original sample applied on mock-up wall. B. Storage and Protection: Store materials inside, if possible, away from sparks and open flame. Store in secure area to avoid tampering and contamination. Water based materials must be kept from freezing. Store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDTIONS A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application under any to following conditions, expect with written instructions of manufacturer: 1. Ambient temperature is less than 40°F (5°C) or below 98°F (35°C) unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 2. Masonry surfaces and mortar have cured for less than 28 days. 3. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 40°F (5°C). 4. Rain or temperatures below 40°F (5°C) are predicted within 48 hrs. 5. Application is earlier than 5 days after surface became wet. 6. Windy conditions exist that may cause water repellent or stain to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be coated. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Guarantee against defective materials and workmanship for 5 yrs. from Substantial Completion. �- B. Submit completed manufacturer's written "Request for Warranty Form" to manufacturer 10 days prior to application. C. After completion of specified material, submit manufacturer's written "5 Year Warranty Application" to manufacturer for processing. Upon receiving validated warranty, submit copy to City. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Notify Engineer not less than 48 hrs. before each application of stain and water repellent is applied. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER REPELLENTS 07191-2 A. Manufacturer's: 1. Prime-A-Pell 200, Chemprobe Technologies, Inc (1-800-760-677h). B. Solvent based siloxane penetrating water repellent, no filters, sterates, or paraffins. Product shall have a range of 3-7% solids. C. Compatible with joint sealers and water repellent admixture in CMU. D. Exterior breathable water repellent. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify joint sealants have been installed. B. Test for moisture content, according to repellent manufacturer's writt,-)n instructions to ensure surface is sufficiently dry. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Surface shall be free of cracks, dirt, oils, paint c r other contaminants which may affect appearance or performance of water repellent material. B. Protection: Follow manufacturer's recommendations for protection of adjacent materials and surrounding areas. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply water repellent in accordance manufacturer's with written instrU ctions. B. Water Repellent: 1. Apply using low pressure application equipment designed for water repellent application. 2. Apply material as supplied by manufacturer. Do not dilute or thin. 3. Apply treatment evenly until surface is totally saturated. Coverage rates and number of coats as recommended by manufacturer for specific surface. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Follow manufacturer's recommended field quality control procedures B. After water repellent has cured for 24 hrs. at low humidity and temperature between _ 70°F to 90°F or 48 hrs. at high humidity and low temperature between 50°F to 69°F, test surfaces with water spray. Recoat areas that indicate water absorption. 07191-3 3.05 CLEANING A. At completion of Work, remove protective coverings, excess material, debris, and waste from Site. Clean and repair damage caused by applications. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. B. Dispose of water repellent containers according to state and local environmental regulations. ***END OF SECTION*** 07191-4 SECTION 07413 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General end Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Factory-formed and field-assembled, concealed-fastener, 24 ga. standing- seam metal roof panels. Systems: Loc Seam 360 by AMS/American, BattenLoc HS by Star, VSR by Butler or equal. 2. Framing for roofing systems is to be performed by contractor 3. Matching trim and fascia. 4. Flexible sheet underlayment as required to maintain weather tight conditions on the Electrical Control Building roof. 5. Vapor retarder as required to maintain ASHRAE requirerients for DEW POINT 6. Parapet Flashings, which shall consist of Flash and Counter F lash conditions. 7. All Pipe Penetrations flashings shall be by the manufacture and warranted by the manufacturer. 8. All fasteners shall be by the manufacturer and shall :De as per the manufactures specification for "Premium" fasteners that sha be supplied by and warranted by the roof system manufacturer. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Standing Seam Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, secondary framing, miscellaneous metal framing, metal trim and accessories necessary for a complete weather tight roofing system. Metal roof - system shall be provided by a single source manufacturer. A system shall be identified as providing materials (supplied and warranted by the roof manufacturer), un-faced fiberglass insulation, (supplied by and warranted by the roof manufacturer) ridge, eave, hip flashings, roof to wall flashings and pipe penetration flashings. System shall be identified as being supplied, approved and fully warranted by the manufacturer. Any substitutions by the contractor must be accompanied by a letter from the manufacturer as approved and as warranted by the manufacturer, without exception. All panel materials shall come with AISC certification from the manufacturer under category MB. Reference: www.aisc.org 1. Panel shall not be roll formed on site nor fabricated on a portable roll former. Provide manufactured roofing systems as specified. Manufactured roof system shall be identified as fixed equipment, operated by the manufacturer. 07413-1 1 .4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with performance requirements specified as determined by testing manufacturers' standard assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project, by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. B. Air Infiltration: Test Method ASTM E 1680 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: Results 0.0 SCFM/SF @ 12.0 PSF differential pressure C. Water Penetration: Test Method ASTM E 1646 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test- Pressure Difference: Results 0.0 Leakage @ 12.0 PSF differential pressure D. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with wind- uplift resistance class indicated. 1. UL (Underwriters Laboratories) Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies Class 90, UL CONSTRUCTION 580. E. Thermal Movements: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. G. Fire Testing: 1. ASTM E 108 Fire 2. FIRE & WINDSTROM CLASSIFICATION: Class IA-UL 90 1 .5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes for each type of metal roof panel and accessory and description of fiberglass insulation. B. Shop Drawings: Produced and engineered by the manufacturer to show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels (as submittal drawings for approval); details of edge conditions,joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, fiberglass insulation and accessories; and special details. Distinguish -� between factory and field assembled work. 1 Certification: Shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by an Engineer �- registered to practice in the State of Iowa and demonstrate proof of employment by the manufacturer of standing seam metal roof. 2 Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 11/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10): 07413-2 a. Flashings, eave trim, gutters, fascia trim, soffit trim, ridge cap/ventilation, anchors, roof to wall trim and drip edge. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for the following: 1. Metal Roof Panels: Include reports for air infiltration, water penetration, thermal performance and structural performance. As detailed by all ASTM Standard Test Methods, indicated under the appropriate titles made part of this specification. D. Contractor shall provide calculations demonstrating compliance with the performance requirements of this specification and all applicable Codes. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by an Engineer registered to practice in IOWA. Engineer shall be employed (full time) by manufacturer of the standing seam metal roof system, licensed in the state of IOWA. 1. Contractor Shall Provide: Calculations demonstrating holding strength of fasteners, to existing structure, in accordance with submitted test data, provided by fastener manufacturer, based on length of embedment and properties of materials. E. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer shall provide maintenance manua for the roof. F. Warranties: Applicable warranties as specified in this document. G. Materials: Submit approval data, test data on all materials that are part of the roofing system, as described within this bid document. Include within the submittals all manufacturers methods and standards for erection. H. Standard Colors: Contractor will submit the manufacturers' standard colors for selection by the owner. Colors shall consist of 70% PVDF Kynar 500/Hylar 5000. This request shall be identified in the body of the specifications for "Finish." I. Testing: Contractor shall submit all testing reports for ASTM E 1592-01, ASTM E 1646, ASTM E 1680 (air and water test) to meet the test results shown in this specification document. Contractor shall submit the appropriate documentation to prove IBC 2009 code design compliance to the Engineer. J. Roofer's Qualifications: Requirements for certification noted in Roofe 's Qualifications under Quality Assurance. Roofer shall also submit an affidavit unde r seal indicating that the roofing contractor is not currently in litigation within the US and has no claims or liabilities pending award of contract to the Engineer. K. Roofer Supervision: The project foreman shall have received specific training and certification from the manufacturer of the roofing system. Certification shall not be greater than 3 years from last validation. A roofing foreman shall remain on the job site at all times during roofing installation. L. Sub-Contractor Qualification: Should the project be awarded to a General Contractor, who chooses to sub-contract the roofing work, the sub-contractor Roofing Contractor shall be certified by the roofing manufacturer and be approved by the owner prior to 07413-3 working on this project. Exceptions: If the General Contractor elects to purchase the labor and materials direct from a certified roofing installer, licensed to warrant the entire roof assembly in accordance with the bid documents. The sub-contractor shall also provide certificates of insurance, with the same minimums as the general �. contractor to the Engineer. M. Roofing Contractor Insurance: See Insurance requirements in Article 5, Supplementary Conditions. �. 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panels through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: The roof system manufacturer shall meet and provide written certification stating: 1. The manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the fabrication of metal standing seam roof systems for at least ten (10) years, regardless of name change. Supply a brief list of similar projects with the shop drawings. 2. The manufacturer is a member of the Metal Building Manufacturer's Association (MBMA), Supply current membership certificate. 3. The American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) currently certifies the manufacturer for category MB, for both the structural steel and the roof panels. 4. The manufacturer maintains a certified installer program for its products and maintains up-to-date authorized roofing contractor list. Submit list with winning bid contractor or approved sub-contractor on list. 5. The manufacturer shall supply a written warranty covering durability, color and weather tightness of its roof system and shall include the INSULATION, CURBS AND FLASHINGS from the roofing manufacturer at completion and approval of project. Sample warranties shall be provided with the bid proposal. -_ 6. Manufacturer shall be identified as a provider of standing seam metal products and provide proof of financial strengths against warranty liabilities. 7. The City may retain the services of a professional roof consultant, independent of the General Contractor, roofing contractor/manufacturer. The sole purpose will be to provide full-time/part-time oversight with technical observation during the project. C. Roofer's Qualifications: 1. Installation of the metal roofing panel and roof related accessories shall be performed by roofers, preferred, certified and authorized by the manufacturer as trained and qualified to install the manufacturer's product. Certification of the contractor cannot exceed 3 years from date of original certification without proof of re-certification from the manufacturer. Roofing contractor must provide a certified project manager, full time, throughout the duration of the roofing installation. The Contractor's project manager will represent the certification program provided by the manufacturer, representing the correct standards and procedures as detailed by the manufacturer's specifications and designs. 2. Roofing contractor must submit a letter from the manufacturer of the standing seam metal roofing system, certifying the date of certification from the -- 07413-4 manufacturer and the dates and year the roofing contractor attf nded school for certification or re-certification. 2.1 Have no viable claims pending, regardless of negligent acts, defective workmanship on previously performed or current projects. 2.2 Have not filed for protection from creditors under any state or federal insolvency or debtor relief statues or codes. 2.3 Have installed five (5) projects of similar scope and magnitude that have been in service for minimum of 2 years with satisfactory performance of the entire roof system. 3. Installer must execute 100% of roof system installation, utilizing employees that are confirmed as full-time employees of the contractor. Second- and third-tier subcontractors for the installation of the work in this section shall not be permitted. 4. Installer shall be identified as "primary source of business" fo standing seam metal roof system. D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel assemblies including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with City, Engineer, City's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, metal roof panel Installer, meal roof panel manufacturer's representative. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availabi ity of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to ma I e progress and avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Examine purlins and rafter conditions for compliance wit., requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 5. Review structural loading limitations of purlins and rafters during and after roofing. 6. Review and examine all solid deck conditions. Contractor (roofer) shall be responsible for conditions of the new/existing deck. Contractor shall correct or reject deck conditions that may transfer those conditions to the new standing seam metal roof. Contractor shall notify the Engineer/City or City representative of any conditions that could affect the intent of the new standing seam metal roof system. 7. Review flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, rod penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will -affect metal roof panels. 8. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing and inspecting if applicable. 9. Review temporary protection requirements for metal roof )anel assembly during and after installation. 10. Review roof observation and repair procedures after metal roc panel installation. 11. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 07413-5 E. Design Criteria: 1. Design criteria shall be used to follow the standards established within the industry as listed below: a. Manual of Steel Construction, American Institute of Steel Construction (AISCCurrent Publication). NASPEC: [current edition] for cold-formed structural members and standing seam metal panels. b. Metal Building Systems Manual, Metal Building Manufacturers Association (current edition). c. Applicable Building Code for State, County and location IBC 2009. d. Test for Wind Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies (Current Edition). UL 9OUL 580 at wind speeds for State, County and location. F. Design Loads 1. Design loads shall be developed using the procedures contained in the Common Industry Practices section of the Metal Building Systems Manual, Metal Building Manufacturers Association (current edition). Design Loads shall follow the governing authority IBC 2009. As a minimum, the following data shall be provided in addition to dead loads: a. Vertical Live Loads: roof system shall be designed for a minimum of 35 PSF live load. b. Wind Speed: roof system shall be designed for a minimum of 90 MPH, as per IBC. c. Combination of normal load and auxiliary loads or design purposes shall be as prescribed and recommended in IBC 2009 as applicable for the state of installation. -_ d. Rainfall intensity: All exterior gutters and downspouts shall be designed for rainfall intensity, based upon a 5 year recurrence interval for 5-minute duration. All interior gutters, valleys and downspouts shall be designed for A. rainfall intensity based on 25-year recurrence interval, based on 5-minute duration. Rainfall intensity can be defined in the Metal Roofing Systems Design Manual of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. All Gutters shall be installed according to (SMACNA). All gutters shall provide the necessary design for expansion and contraction. Metal Building criteria for gutters, coping caps, roof to wall flashings, shall not be allowed. Manufacturer must comply with SMACNA or risk removal of details and replacement of all details, at the manufactures expense. Flashing details that require special break or field breaks shall be permitted if the manufacturer of the roof system provides the material and finish warranty required to meet the "total system" warranty. No substitutions. e. Design Calculations: (All Calculations noted below shall be reviewed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Iowa, employed full time by the manufacturer for the metal roof assembly): 07413-6 i. Submit engineering calculations defining cladding loads for all roof areas based on specified building codes, allowable clip loads, and required number of fasteners to secure the panel clips to the designated substructure. ii. Compute uplift loads on clip fasteners with full recognition of prying forces and eccentric clip loading. iii. Calculate holding strength of fasteners in a ,cordance with submitted test data provided by the manufacturer of the fastener, based on length of embedment and properties of n aterials. iv. Submit drainage calculations for gutter, and downspout design. v. Submit thermal calculations and details of floating clip, flashing attachments, and accessories, indicating the free movement in response to the expansion/contraction effects. 1 .7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, fiberglass insulation rolls, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bPnding, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weather tight and ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1. Do not load structure with panels in a manner that will cause fa ure of structural system. D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from expo:>sure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation. 1 .8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal roof panels to be perfc rmed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of roof framing and roof ope'sing dimensions by field measurements before metal roof panel fabricatior and indicate measurements on reviewed Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and 07413-7 proceed with fabricating metal roof panels without field measurements, or allow for field trimming of panels. Coordinate roof construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions. 1 .9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate metal panel roof assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, ridge vent, trim and other adjoining work to provide a leak proof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1 .1 0 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Final Inspection. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Final Inspection approval. C. Special Weather Tightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: The entire installation (sub-framing, clips, panels, insulation, fasteners, eave, ridge flashing conditions, roof to wall conditions as well as all materials specified as supplied by the manufacturer) shall be guaranteed weather tight for a minimum of twenty (20) years. Provide written warranty, signed by metal roofing manufacturer and his authorized installer, agreeing to replace/repair defective materials and workmanship during the warranty period. This warranty shall be identified as neither Non-Depreciating, Non-Pro-rated nor have exclusions that identify rigid board insulation, valleys, curbs and flashings. Warranty shall be limited to the value of the installed roof assembly, including all materials and labor. Warranty shall be signed by the manufacturer of the roofing materials and the authorized installer. Manufacturer may not exceed the 2 year time period associated with the last reported repair. Manufacturers indicating 10 year weather tight agreements between roofing contractor and the manufacturer shall not be accepted. Portable roll forming by the contractor, designated as the "roofer" or "manufacturer" shall not be accepted. Use of any portable roll former, other than by the manufacturer for special applications, shall not be accepted. Architect reserves the right to inspect, determine and ascertain -- the validity of the "manufacturer", listed as an AISC member and shall reject non- certified AISC products. 07413-8 1. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Final Con pletion of Total System. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION - A. System Description - The roof system is a concealed fastener interlocking standing seam system with fiberglass insulation, between the new and existing roof panels. 1. Roof panels shall be 24-ga. standing seam-interlocking desigr and secured to the supports with a concealed structural fastening system. 2. The concealed attachment system shall eliminate all through penetration of the exposed roofing surface into structural supports, except at fixed locations and - allow the roof covering to move independently of any differential thermal movement by the framing system. 3. The panel to structural clip shall be designed to provide thermal movement as required by Performance Requirements of this specification. 4. The standing seam shall have integral male and female interlc ,king ribs with a factory applied, non-hardening sealant, and the seams shall oe continuously locked or crimped together by mechanical means during installation. As described in the panel section of this document. 5. Roof panels shall be fastened to the support framing members with a concealed clip or backing device of steel having a protective metallic coating. Through penetration of the roofing surface by exposed fasteners shall occur only for nonstructural connection at panel termination and roof perimeter flashing location. Fasteners shall be specified by the Manufacturer's Engineer and be self-drilling carbon steel screws with a molded zinc alloy or capped stainless steel cupped hex washer head. Premium roof fasteners shall be on all warranted roofs and all prefinished roofs. Fasteners shall have EPDM washer head screws, for panel to secondary framing. 6. Panel termination and perimeter flashing (attached to roof panels) shall be sealed with sealant provided, supplied and warranted by the manufacturer. 7. Required closures shall be metal. Non-metal closures shall not be acceptable. 8. System installed over existing roofs and structure shall meet performance requirements of this specification and shall positively connect the metal panel roof system to the existing structure. 2.2 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Standing Seam Panel: The following manufacturers shall conform to the design criteria stated in the body of this specification. Basis of design shall be at the same quality level in a 16" panel. Panels shall be mechanically seamed to provide the ASTM criteria set forth in the body of this specification. Approved manufacturers for bid comparison shall be in compliance with the design requirements of this - specifications are: 1. BUTLER-VSR System 2. AMS/AMERICAN-Loc Seam 360 07413-9 3. STAR-BattenLoc HS 4. Or approved equal Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.3 PANEL MATERIALS A. The standing seam panel shall be 24-ga., 16" in width with a 2" high vertical rib,joined at the side-lap with an interlocking seam, mechanically locked by an electrical seam machine. The female panel seam shall have factory applied sealant. Composition of the sealant shall not be less than 85% solids by weight. Service temperature range is -60 ° F to +220 ° F. End laps, roof flashing laps, ridges, and eave closures are sealed with tape mastic, Sika-Tape TC-95 or equal. The material must be non- staining, non-corrosive, non-toxic and nonvolatile. Composition will be 100% solid ethylene propylene copolymer tape. Service temperature is -60 °F to +212 °F. 1. Surface: Pre-painted panels shall have manufacturers PVDF 70% Kynar 500@ or Hylar 5000 paint finish over 50,000 psi steel consisting of GRADE 50 (50 ksi yield strength) and (65 PSI Tensile Strength). Striations will be implemented to minimize the presence of "oil-canning". Or the use of "pencil ribs" may be implemented at the Engineer's request. 2. Concealed Finish: ASTM D 1005 Backer 0.5 mils minimum PVDF thickness. 3. Panel Clips: Panel clips shall be two-part assemblies. Tab portions shall be a nominal 3-1/4" in height and 3" in width, die formed 24 gage aluminum coated steel. The base shall be die formed 18 gage zinc-coated (galvanized)steel. The . self-centering clip shall provide a minimum of 1-1/4" movement in either direction from center. Entire assembly shall be tested in compliance with ASTM E 1646 and E 1680 with a rating of 0.0 SCFM/SF at 12.0 psf differential pressure. Panel Clips are to be manufactured by or supplied by the panel manufacturer. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fascia, corner units, ridge closures, clips, fleshings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels. Also provide ventilated closures as required to fully ventilate -- attic area without compromising weather tightness of the system. a. All closures shall be metal. 2. Closure Strips: Shall consist of metal formed from the same gage material as the standing seam panel, non-metal closures shall not be acceptable. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weather tight construction. 3. Thermal Blocks: Manufacturer's standard thermal block material, as required for fiberglass batt insulation. 4. Roof Jacks: Openings 8" in diameter or smaller may be flashed and sealed to the roof panel by jacks, which shall be supplied and warranted by manufacturer. a. Material shall be an EPDM material with aluminum sealing ring base. 07413-10 b. Jacks are acceptable providing attachment in flat of pane with no standing seam rib has been altered. If rib must be cut, a :;urb must be used. c. Installation of roof jacks must comply with manufacturer':. instructions. B. Flashing and Trim: 1. Drip Edges: Provide drip edges fabricated from material may:thing color and finish of metal roof panels. C. Flexible Sheet Underlayment: Provide rubberized asphalt sheet flash ng. (as required by the manufacturer of the roof assembly and warranted as a system) 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. Mira Dri - WIP 300 HT b. Grace Construction Products — Grace Ultra c. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing: CCW WIP 403HR d. Or approved equal 2.5 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have bf:,en corrected. 2.6 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including rem( ving projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment. B. Miscellaneous Framing: Install secondary framing, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 2.7 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge. Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, w th provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cutting of metal roof panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Install panel's perpendicular to purlins. 07413-11 3. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. 4. Provide metal closures at peaks, rake walls, and each side of ridge caps. 5. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 6. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 7. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. _. 8. Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material. 9. Install thermal blocks at all purlins and as required at edges, rakes and eaves. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by use of butyl tape, warranted and provided by the manufacturer, or by a bond breaker to separate the materials from coming in direct contact of one another, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2.8 FLEXIBLE SHEET UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Prepare roof deck surface by removing all loose objects, dirt, dust and debris. B. Install flexible roof underlayment directly over roof deck/or as designed by governing authorities for moisture control (as required, to meet ASHRAE and DEW POINT conditions, or to meet the requirements of the insulation provided by the manufacturer and their warranty). C. Install only when roof deck is dry and air temperature is 40 °F or higher. D. Cut the membrane into 10-15 foot lengths, unroll and lay flat on the roof surface. Position for installation, and peel back 1-2 feet of release paper. Press into position and place with heavy hand pressure. 2.9 PROVIDE OVERLAPS AS FOLLOWS: A. End laps: 6 inches (150 mm). B. Side laps: 3 1/2 inches (87.5 mm). 2.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. All debris and materials will be removed from the job site at the end of each business day. Materials shall be properly disposed of in the appropriate containers. B. Remove all protective coatings and strippable film upon completion of the roof assembly, panels or miscellaneous attachments. C. Upon completion of the installation the roof assembly, panels etc. shall be properly cleaned to provide a clean surface for all the panels. D. The area shall be policed for fasteners or nails that land on the ground during installation of the roof assembly. A general policing of the perimeter of the building shall be performed at the end of each business day to retrieve fallen objects to the ground. 07413-12 E. All panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful use, shall be replaced or repaired according to acceptability by thE- Manufacturer, Engineer or owner representative. END OF SECTION 07413 07413-13 SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, scaffolding, transport ton, permits, inspection certificates and temporary protection necessary to complete _ installation of all work as shown on Project Drawings and/or called for in these specifications. Drawings and specifications shall be considered mutually coordinate and any material included in one but not the other shall be furnished as though required in both. All material necessary to provide a complete working installation shall be furnished whether mentioned or not. B. Before turning equipment over to the City of Waterloo, the Contractor shall thoroughly test equipment and instruct the City of Waterloo or his representative in its operations and maintenance. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Comply with the latest applicable codes and standards as set forth by the following: AGA American Gas Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANSI American National Standards Institute, Inc. ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigera ion and Air �- Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials DNR Department of Natural Resources, State of I( wa EPA U.S. Environmental Protection Agency ISPC Iowa State Plumbing Code _ IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers MCA Mechanical Contractors Association MSS Manufactures Standardization Society NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association NBS National Bureau of Standards NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Associatior NFPA National Fire Protection Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contra,:tors National Association UL Underwriters= Laboratories, Inc. UPC Uniform Plumbing Code UBC Uniform Building Code Standard Local Codes and Ordinances B. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations hay ng jurisdiction over this installation and these specifications, the Engineer shall ,determine the 15010-1 method or equipment used. Obtain instructions before proceeding with work involved. C. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bidding, any parts of the drawings and specifications, which are not in accordance with applicable codes or regulations, he shall inform the Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there is insufficient time to follow this procedure, he shall submit with his proposal a separate price required to make the system shown on the drawings comply with the codes and regulations. D. All changes to the system made after the letting of the contract, in order to comply with the applicable codes or the requirements of the Inspector, shall be made by the Contractor without cost to the City of Waterloo. E. If there is a discrepancy between the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications, the manufacturer's recommendations shall determine the �x method or equipment used. 1.03 PERMITS, FEES, TAXES, INSPECTIONS A. Procure all applicable permits and licenses. B. Abide by all applicable laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of the State or Political Subdivision wherein the work is done, or as required by any duly constituted public authority. C. Pay all applicable charges for such permits or licenses that may be required. D. Pay all applicable fees and taxes imposed by the State, Municipal and/or other regulatory bodies. E. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections by the codes, permits, licenses or as otherwise may be required by an authorized body. 1.04 EXAMINATION OF DRAWINGS �. A. The drawings for the mechanical work are completely diagrammatic, ntended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and locations of equipment, outlets, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment. B. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of the equipment and rough-ins, and the exact routing of pipes and ducts so as to best fit the layout of the job. C. Scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient or accurate for determining these locations. D. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated arrangements and locations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City of Waterloo. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items, such as fittings, boxes, valves, unions, etc., may not be shown, but where such items are required by other sections of the specifications or where they are required for proper installation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed. 15010-2 F. The determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made by the Contractor from the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the specifications are completed as an aid to the Contractor but where discrepancies arise, the greater number shall govern. 1.05 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Before ordering any materials or fabricating any supports, etc, the Contractor shall verify all pertinent dimensions at the job site and be responsible for their accuracy. B. Arrange for required chases, slots, and openings. Contractor : hall verify all opening locations and is responsible for their accuracy. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Label or listing of the specified agency will be acceptable evidE-nce that units conform to the requirements. B. Where equipment is specified to conform to the requirements of thE- ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for Design, fabrication and installation shall conform to the code in every respect. C. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Any proposed deviations shall be requested from the — Engineer before installation. D. Where equipment or accessories are used which differ in arrangement, configuration, dimensions, ratings, or engineering parameters from those of the Base specification, the Contractor is responsible for all costs involved in integrating the equipment or accessories into the system and for obtaining the performance from the system into which these items are placed. This includes changes found necessary during the testing, adjusting, and balancing phases of the project. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S REFERENCES A. Where there is no indication to the contrary, the intent of this spe:;ification is to be open to all brand names of suppliers that offer equipment that complies with the stated requirements of capacity, function, quality, configuratior size, shape, and operating characteristics that are compatible with the desigr objectives of the system and interfacing equipment. B. Stated requirements are minimum in the case of unit output and m:3ximum in the case of input requirements. C. The perceived operational limitations and maintenance requireme its as well as the availability of suitable maintenance support will be evaluated n comparison — to competing equipment as an important factor in deciding f an item of equipment is acceptable or not acceptable. D. The usual sequence of brand names given as part of equipmE-nt or product identification will be the first named being the one that was used it preparing the 15010-3 drawings followed by the others believed to be producers of like equipment or materials and locally represented, with service capability and otherwise meeting the requirements of the contract documents. Reference to a brand name is not to be construed as a representation that the named supplier actually has available the equipment or materials that meet the detailed requirements of the contract documents. E. Details of construction, control, or operation that are proprietary and not significant to the City of Waterloo's utilization of the equipment will not be used as a basis for qualifying or disqualifying any equipment. 1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Cover and protect all materials and equipment stored on-site from weather. Support above ground on temporary basis. B. Protect all mechanical products and control devices from damage, dust and construction debris. After installation is completed, or while storing inside building, wrap and enclose all mechanical fixtures, equipment, and control devices with canvas or heavy mill plastic and secured with wire or cord. Fixtures may be protected with the factory applied heavy paper or carton they are shipped in. Do not remove protection device until room or area is cleaned and free of dust and debris. 1.09 WORK COORDINATION A. Each Contractor shall coordinate its work with adjacent work and shall cooperate with all other trades so as to facilitate the general progress of the work. Each trade shall afford all other trades every reasonable opportunity for installation of their work and for the storage of their materials. In no case, will any Contractor be permitted to exclude from the premises or work place any other Contractor in the executing or installation of their work. -a B. Each trade shall perform its work in proper sequence in relation to that of other trades and as approved by the Engineer. Any cost caused by defective or ill- timed work shall be borne by the installation Contractor. C. Each Contractor shall arrange its work and dispose of material so as not to interfere with the work or storage of materials of others. Each Contractor shall join their work to that of others in accordance with the intent of the Project Drawings and Specifications. D. All trades shall work in cooperation with each other, and fit their work into the structure as job conditions may demand. All final decisions as to right-of-way and run of pipes and ducts, etc. shall be made by the Engineer or the City of Waterloo's authorized representative. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to keep constant check on the progress of the work so each particular trade can insure proper preparation for installation of that trade's work and not cause delay in the progress of the work. It shall further be the responsibility of the Contractor to periodically make inspection of work in progress and to notify the Engineer when work is complete in compliance with the Project Drawings and Specifications. 15010-4 1.10 ACCESSIBILITY A. Provide access panels to valves, dampers, controls and equipment in walls or above inaccessible ceiling. 1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings, descriptive literature, and connection diagrams on all equipment to be furnished under this contract. Submittals shall plainly show all features that are pertinent to the design and specifications, including materials, weights, finishes, performance data, etc. B. Contractor shall check and verify shop drawings for shape, dimensions, connections, and details of attachment to the construction before submittal. Submitted shop drawings will be presumed to have been so checked by the Contractor. C. Make submittals as soon as practicable after the signing of the contract. Shipment shall not be released until shop drawings have been final y approved. D. Shop drawing submittals shall include drawings of equipment base: . E. Required number of copies of shop drawings will be the number rEquired by the Contractor plus three (3). F. Shop drawings (submittal brochures) are specifically required for all equipment with the mark (S) appearing on the specification heading. 1.12 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY A. Contractor warranties shall comply with the General Conditions < s well as the requirements of this section. B. Air conditioning refrigeration system(s) shall be covered by an extended warranty of five (5) years, non-prorated, from the date of beneficial occupancy or substantial completion, whichever occurs first. The extended warranty shall apply to compressor(s), evaporator and condenser coils, high and low side piping and piping specialties, which shall include expansion and solenoid valves, relief valve(s), filter-dryer(s), and sight glasses. Pressure gauges and pressure switches are not under the extended warranty except for loss of refrigerant and consequential damage to the system, which will be an exter ded warranty obligation. C. Defective material or installation becoming apparent within a two.year warranty period from the date beneficial occupancy or substantial completion shall be repaired by the contractor as directed by the City of Waterloo. D. The warranty shall not obligate the contractor to repair damage "esulting from accident or improper operation or care on the part of the City of Naterloo, and not due to defective material or installation. 1.13 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES 15010-5 A. The work of this contract will involve disturbing existing piping systems and other mechanical systems that are important to the operation of the Wastewater Treatment Plant. B. The contractor shall arrange and schedule his work to avoid unnecessary interruptions of mechanical system functions and to minimize the duration of those that are necessary. C. In case where the nature of the work is such that an interruption in service is necessary, the contractor shall make prior arrangements with the City of Waterloo's designated representative in regard to the scheduling of the interruption. The contractor will be required, as part of this contract, to provide and remove temporary connections if such work is necessary during an otherwise intolerable interruption of any service. The Engineer will adjudicate any disputes between the City of Waterloo and the contractor in the matter of tolerable and intolerable interruptions and their decision will be final and binding on both parties. 1.14 EXISTING COMPONENTS A. In bidding, assume that all components, in present systems, which interface with �. the work specified herein, are in suitable physical condition for continued use either in place or relocated as called for in each instance. Testing and adjusting of existing components, as required to establish and maintain proper functioning of the new work, is a responsibility of this contractor. 1.15 REBATES A. The project may include equipment, controls, or systems to be furnished and/or installed that qualify for rebate(s) under local utility company energy conservation and efficiency programs. B. In such instance(s), the contractor shall cooperate with the City of Waterloo by providing information and filings as necessary for the City of Waterloo to receive the rebate(s). 1.16 CLEAN-UP A. Remove all dust, plaster and construction debris from fixtures, equipment and control devices prior to painting or occupancy by City of Waterloo. B. Brush clean and apply one coat of rust-resistant paint to all new piping, pipe fittings and weld joints that have rusted during construction, prior to applying pipe insulation.C. All piping, pipe covering and ductwork shall be covered and protected from plaster, dust, paint droppings and other construction debris during construction. D. Paint all new equipment, which has rusted or had finish marred during construction to the satisfaction of Engineer. Replace if satisfactory restoration cannot be made. 1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 15010-6 A. Provide to the City of Waterloo six (6) hardbound Maintenance nd Operating Instruction Manual with replacement parts list for all fixtures a Id equipment specific to the project. B. Include a complete lubrication schedule for all new mechanical with type of lubricant and frequency recommended. C. Instruct and demonstrate to the City of Waterloo or his reprE-sentative the operation and servicing (normal maintenance) of all equipment and systems provided. Use qualified manufacturer=s representatives to explai heat or cold generation and temperature control equipment. — 1.18 SYSTEM START-UP COMMISSIONING A. The mechanical systems included in the construction documents are to be complete operating systems. The system start-up, testing, balancing, and satisfactory system performance is the responsibility of the contractor. This shall include all calibration and adjustments of controls, noise level adjustments and _ final comfort factor adjustments that may be required. B. The contractor shall adjust the mechanical systems and controls at season changes during the warranty period, as required, to provide satisfactory operation and to prove performance of system used in all seasons. — C. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be simulatf,d and tested during the start-up period. Testing shall also include all interlocks , safety shut- downs, damper position controls, and alarms. END OF SECTION 15010 15010-7 SECTION 15950 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Control sequences, as defined in this section, describe the mann€' and method by which automatic controls function. Requirements for each typ,} of operation are specified in this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 UNIT HEATERS A. Units shall be controlled to maintain room temperature of 4-5 degrees F (adjustable) through a programmable unit mounted thermostat. 01 call for heat, the unit shall start. When space heating requirements are satisfied the unit shall stop. 3.02 EXHAUST FANS A. Exhaust Fans shall be controlled by wall-mounted thermostat as indicated on the drawings. When the thermostat reaches the set point of 80 degrees F -- (adjustable), the air intake and exhaust air dampers shall open. B. When the dampers are open, the exhaust fan starts. C. When the thermostat drops between 2 to 12 degrees F below the set point, the exhaust fan stops and the air intake and exhaust air dampers shall :,lose. D. A small motor control relay, mounted in a housing, shall be proviced and wired together with the thermostat to accomplish the above sequence. END OF SECTION 15950 15950 - 1 SECTION 16000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section includes all materials, equipment and labor nece-;sary for the installation of electrical systems. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All materials supplied and all work performed shall comply with the latest revisions of applicable codes and standards of the following organizations: 1. National Electric Code (NEC) 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 5. American Society for testing and Materials (ASTM) 6. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 8. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 9. All state and local codes as they apply. 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK A. Contractor shall be responsible for providing complete raceway and wire systems in good operating condition, regardless of whether al incidental circuits and conduits are shown on the drawings. B. Contractor shall make all penetrations required for routing of conduit. Penetrations shall be made and sealed as appropriate. C. Contractor shall be responsible for providing concrete pads fog all electrical equipment as needed. D. Contractor shall visit the job site during the bid stage to fully u iderstand the scope of work involved. E. Where drawings and specifications may be in conflict, the more restrictive in quality or expansive in number shall apply. F. The scope of work shall include, but not limited to, new feeder and branch circuits and ground, power and control reconfiguration. 16000 - 1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. All shop drawings, product data and samples shall be submitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall coordinate all electrical work with all other contractors and with airport personnel. Contractor shall provide labor and materials for any temporary wiring required to maintain necessary functions throughout all construction phases of this project and for any temporary power required to maintain construction activities. B. Contractor shall provide mark-ups to one set of electrical design drawings depicting as-built wiring diagrams upon completion of project. END OF SECTION 16000 16000- 2 SECTION 16160 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section includes furnishing and installing all lighting and distrib_ation panelboards as shown on the drawings or required for energization of the lighting system. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards shall be the latest revisions, supplements, am amendments to the following: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). B. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Square D 2. Engineer Approved equal 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. All shop drawings, product data and samples shall be submitted in accordance with Division 1 - Submittals. B. Contractor shall submit catalog cuts on all panelboards to be proviced. C. Submittal for panelboards that are part of packaged unit shall be in :.luded in transformer submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall have main rating, main breaker, number of poles and branch breakers as shown by the panelboard schedules on the drawings. Panels shall be UL labeled. B. 240/120-volt and 120/208-volt panels shall have a minimum interrupting capacity of 22,000 amps RMS symmetrical, including all installed breakers. C. 277/480-volt panels shall have a minimum interrupting capacity of C 5,000 amps RMS symmetrical, including all installed breakers. D. All interior bussing, neutrals and grounds shall be copper. E. Panelboards (208-240V) shall accept both bolt-on and plug-on brar oh breakers, others shall be bolt-on. 16160 - 1 F. Panelboards shall be equipped with bolt-on branch breakers, unless the specified size or type is only available as a plug-on branch breaker. G. Panelboards shall be constructed of galvanized steel box with gray baked enamel covers and doors. Panels shall be suitable for surface mounting unless noted as being flush mounted. Panels shall have blank end walls (no knockouts). H. Where panel schedule calls for ground fault breakers, GFI breakers shall be installed. This shall include circuits for interior duplex receptacle circuits. Breakers shall not be of tandem design. J. Panels shall be equipped with full size neutral bars and ground bars and shall be bonded to box if required by the NEC for classification of use. K. Service Entrance Panels shall be labeled as service rated. L. Service Entrance Panels shall be protected by an internally mounted Surge �- Protective Device (SPD) and connected to the busway after the main circuit breaker. The SPD shall be a rate for 160 kA (min.) surge current per phase, 20 kA nominal discharge, 200 kA AIC and UL 1449 3rd or 4th edition listed. The SPD _. shall include a display with LED status indicators per phase, an audible alarm & dry contacts, and a surge counter. The SPD shall protect all panelboard modes (L-L, L-N, L-G, N-G) and shall be rated for the panelboard voltage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Contractor shall install panels where indicated on the drawings. Panel boxes shall be spaced a minimum of 1/4-inch from surface mounted to prevent entrapment of moisture behind box. B. Panels shall be grounded per the NEC. C. Breaker placement for panels is shown on the drawings for informational purposes only. Contractor shall place breakers in panel as required to most efficiently balance the panel loads between phases. D. Contractor shall provide a TYPEWRITTEN panel schedule on a schedule card at the end of the job. Cards shall accurately and clearly reflect the circuits serviced by the breakers. E. Panel nameplate identifying panel shall be attached to panel front box cover using aluminum pop rivets. Nameplate shall be black phenolic with white core, minimum size of 1-inch by 3-inch. 3.2 Labels shall be attached to panel front cover identifying the power system voltage, phases, and number of wires supplying each panelboard. 16160- 2 SECTION 16170 SAFETY SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section includes furnish and installing local motor control e luipment and manual transfer switches as specified or indicated on drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards shall be latest revisions, supplements, and al~iendments to the following: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Square D 2. General Electric 3. Siemens 4. Approved equal 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Compliance Submittals 1. All shop drawings, product data and samples shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. 2. Includes but not limited to: a. Catalog cuts PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Switches shall be fusible or non-fusible. Circuit breakers rated for specific load are suitable as substitution for fusible switch for motors. B. Switches shall be heavy duty type sized for load serviced. Provi:e the proper number of poles and solid neutral where required. C. NEMA classification shall be as indicated on drawings, or as required for the 16170- 1 service location. D. Switches shall be rated for load making and breaking operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All switches shall be securely mounted in place and located in accordance with NEC. Switches mounted on flat surfaces shall be mounted spaced 1/4-inch from mounting surface to prevent moisture entrapment. B. Nameplates shall be provided for each switch identifying the load served. Nameplates shall be white phenolic with black core and 1/2-inch lettering. Nameplates shall be placed on the enclosure cover. C. Labels shall be placed on the enclosure cover identifying the power system voltage supplying each switch. D. Mounting hardware shall be aluminum or stainless steel to match outdoor switch used. END OF SECTION 16170 16170- 2 SECTION 16910 PUMPS & PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. A complete Flygt Concertor DPN100-1950 duplex submersible pump system. Including; pumps, shoes, fittings, piping, nails, supports, cabling, trash collector, and all other appurtenances required to provide a complete pumping system. B. A complete duplex pump control panel shall be furnished. The control panel shall be designed to provide level controls and pump protections fo the specific pumps being utilized. All electrical controls shall be contained n a common enclosure. Controls shall be as described in these specifications an I plans. C. To match the existing Lift Stations, the pump control panel, effluE nt flow meter and radio communication system (SCADA) shall be as supplied by Automatic System Company (ASC), 2740 Ford Street, Ames, IA 50010 — PI-one 515-232- __ 4770 (Contact: Travis Moran). 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards shall be the latest revision, supplements, anc amendments to the following: 1. National Electric Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B. Workmanship and Experience: 1. The control panel shall be the product of a supplier who has been actively engaged in research, development and has supplied proven field installations of complete sewage pumping control system,; for not less than five (5) years. C. UL Listing: 1. The control panel units shall be the product of a manufacturer that is authorized by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to build products in compliance with UL Standard 698A (Enclosed Industrial Control Panel — Enclosure in Non-Hazardous area with extensions into ha;•ardous area). A UL label shall be affixed to the completed control panels. 16910-1 D. Submittals: 1. All shop drawings, O&M manuals, product data and samples shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300-Submittals and Section 16000 Part 1.04 Submittals. 2. Contractor shall submit catalog cuts on the following: a. Pump(s) cut sheets with performance curves, shoe, all fittings and piping with supports, cabling, trash collector, and all other appurtenances to provide complete pumping system. b. Effluent Flow Meter and cabling c. Radio Communication System d. Level transmitter e. Low voltage cabling PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSURE _ A. The Pump Control System shall be housed in a NEMA Type 12 (or NEMA 4) metal industrial control enclosure with hinged door as provided by ASC. A white painted 12-guage (min.) steel inner back panel shall be provided to mount control system components. 1. The enclosure shall house the pump control system components and the radio communication system. 2. The enclosure shall be equipped with vents, fans, heaters and/or other equipment to maintain normal operating temperatures and humidity- controlled conditions for all interior equipment. B. The "480V Gateway Control" panel shall be similar to Part A above. 1. The enclosure shall house the 480V Gateway DP controls for the Flygt pumps and the Volucalc unit at the discretion of the control system supplier, ASC. 2. The enclosure shall be equipped with vents, fans, heaters and/or other equipment to maintain normal operating temperatures and humidity- controlled conditions for all interior equipment. 2.02 TERMINAL BLOCKS: A. Line input and control system terminal blocks rated for 600 volt use shall be provided. Blocks shall be constructed of nylon and have insulating walls on all sides of the lugs. Blocks must be UL recognized. B. Terminal blocks shall be provided for motor input power and control system input power. 16910-2 C. Control system terminal blocks shall accept a wire range of #22-3 AWG or as specified by ASC. 2.03 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE(S): A. A DIN rail mounted surge protection device (120 VAC) with a minimum 20 kA surge current rating shall be shall be installed in the pump control panel(s) as specified and provided by ASC. B. An internal surge protection device shall be installed in the 480 V, 3-phase electrical service entry panelboard as specified in the panelboard section of this project manual. 2.04 MOTOR CIRCUIT BREAKER(S): A. Motor circuit breakers shall be as provided by the electrical cor tractor in the panelboard. B. The circuit breakers shall be provided with lockable latches to I( ck the circuit breakers in the off position. 2.05 INTERNAL ETHERNET NETWORK: A. The pump control panel shall be provided with an inte nal Ethernet communication network, including an industrial Ethernet switch. B. The network will provide a communication link between the contro system PLC, the system HMI touchscreen, the pump gateways, the pump HIV touchscreen and the SCADA radio system. 2.06 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES: A. Analog Instrument Cable (for outdoor use in conduit): 1-pair, 1€ AWG (7x24) Bare Copper, Overall Foil Shield, PVC Outer Jacket, 600V TC 15)V NPLF 90C Dryer/Wet, Sunlight Resistant, Direct Burial Rated. (Belden 1118A or equal) B. Ethernet (for outdoor use in conduit): CAT 6 (or 5e) Shielded Ethernet Cable, Gel-filled, Direct Burial Rated, ANSI/TIE 568-C.2, UL 444, GR-421 CORE (General Cable 5136101 or equal) 2.07 CONTROL SYSTEM PLC AND HMI: A. The pump control system logic shall be controlled by a Rockwe I Automation, CompactLogix or ControlLogix PLC as specified by ASC. B. A 12" touchscreen HMI (human machine interface) shall also be provided and installed in the panel as specified by ASC. 16910-3 C. The PLC and HMI will be connected to the internal Ethernet communication network. D. All software, setup, configuration and SCADA system integration shall be performed by ASC as specified in the agreement with the City. The pump operation and SCADA system shall be programmed similar to the other lift stations within the City. 1. The City requested that the standby generator shall also be remotely controlled and monitored by the SCADA system. 2. The following minimum signals/values shall be transmitted over the SCADA system: a. Backup control active b. High-High Wet Well Level Alarm c. High Wet Well Level d. Low Wet Well Level e. Low-Low Wet Well Level Alarm -- f. Common Alarm g. Loss of Power Alarm h. Pump 1 Run Pump 2 Run j. Pump 1 Fail k. Pump 2 Fail Pump 1 Seal Fail m. Pump 2 Seal Fail n. Generator Run o. Generator Fail p. Generator Fuel Level q. Normal Power On r. Emergency Power On s. Instantaneous Pump Station Flow Rate t. Totalized Flow u. Wet Well Level a_ v. Volucalc Data w. Rainfall Data 2.08 PUMP MOTORS AND CONTROL INTERFACE: A. Two (2) Xylem Flygt Concertor DPN100-1950 submersible sewage pumps, associated control system gateways, cables, and HMI shall be provided as shown in the plans. The pumps shall have built-in VFD motor controls. B. Each pump shall be provided with a gateway interface unit (FPG 414) that shall be mounted inside the pump control panel by ASC. The two gateways shall be connected to an internal Ethernet communications network to provide an interface to the HMI and control system PLC. Level float switches and discrete connections to the PLC shall be connected to the gateway as recommend by manufacturer and ASC. 16910-4 C. A single (1) HMI touchscreen interface (FOP 402) shall be mounted to the enclosure door to provide a configuration and performance monitoring interface for the two pumps. The HMI shall be connected to the internal Ethernet communication network. 2.09 PUMP SEAL FAILURE DETECTION AND PROTECTION: A. Pump seal detection and protection shall be provided by the pump manufacturer and programmed into the pump control system provided by ASC. 2.10 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MONITOR/FLOW METER: A. The pump control system shall be provided with a Volucalc Hybric VS (Variable Speed) system performance monitoring/flow unit as manufacturer Dy Maid Labs Technologies and provided by ASC. B. Two (2) current sensors connected to the Volucalc shall monitor the wastewater pump currents as recommended by Maid Labs and provided by ASC. C. The analog wet well level transmitter shall be connected to the Volucalc via an isolated 4-20mA DIN rail module (and into the pump control PLC) and be provided by ASC. D. An analog output from each Flygt pump controller shall be provided as in input into the Volucalc as recommended by Maid Labs and provided by ASC. E. The Volucalc shall be connected to the Ethernet communicatic n network to -_ provide communication between the Volucalc, the PLC, the SCAD a system and be provided by ASC. 2.11 OVER-TEMPERATURE PROTECTION: A. Provide a pump shut down and lock out when high temperature is indicated. Pump over-temperature sensors to be supplied by pump manufacturer and programmed into the pump control system provided by ASC. 2.12 HAND-OFF-AUTO SWITCH(S): A. Switch shall be 22mm (or 30mm) oil-tight design. When in the auo position the level controls shall control the operation of the pump. When in the hand position all level controls and safeties shall be bypassed except overload pr )tection. 2.13 LED PILOT LIGHT INDICATORS: A. Indicator shall be 22mm (or 30mm) industrial LED style, push-to-l. st indicators. Pilot light indicators shall be provided and installed in the panel a3 specified by ASC. 16910-5 2.14 LEVEL INDICATION AND LEVEL CONTROL OPERATION: A. Level indication shall be provided by a 4-20mA analog level transmitter and float switches. B. Level transmitter: KPSI 750 series (or equal) C. Level indication shall be provided by float switches as shown on the plans. The float switches shall be ball type and connected with neoprene jacketed cable suitable for underwater application. They shall be hung by 316 SS chain or cable weighted by a plastic coated cast iron anchor (by vendor). D. The float switches and activation levels shall be as follows: 1. Level 1 —All pumps off (839.29 ft) 2. Level 2 — Lead pump on (842.29 ft) 3. Level 3— Lag pump on (844.29 ft) 4. Level 4 — High wet well level alarm (845.29 ft) E. All level sensor and float switch activation points must be approved by ASC to provided compatibility with the pump control system. 2.15 GROUND LUG(S): AT A. Required equipment ground lugs shall be provided for grounding the enclosure. The ground lug shall be suitable for the feeder provided to the enclosure sized per the N.E.C. In all cases the enclosure must be adequately grounded per article 250 of the N.E.C. 2.16 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS: A. The back-panel (sub-panel) shall be drilled and tapped to accept machine thread bolts (self-tapping screws are not acceptable). All control wiring shall be 16 AWG (min.) machine tool wire (MTW). All control wire shall be numbered in accordance with JIC standards. Power (motor) wiring shall be in accordance with the N.E.C. Major groups of wires shall be contained in plastic wiring trough equal to Panduit type E. 2.17 ALARM SYSTEM: A. Provide an alarm indication system on the pump control panel as specified by ASC. B. An alarm horn and flashing LED alarm light shall be mounted on the exterior of the building. It shall be provided as specified by ASC to interface with the pump control system. 16910-6 2.18 CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: A. The following cellular modem communication system shall be orovided and installed in the pump control system panel by ASC. B. The cellular modem shall be supported by the City of Water oo's wireless network provider US Cellular. C. Supplier: LEC, Incorporated, 110 Excell Drive, Pearl, MS 39208 Phone: 800- 439-8535 D. Cellular Modem Equipment: Red Lion SN6901-AM single port ct•Ilular modem router. E. Cellular Paddle Antennas (two required per router): TG.30.8113 F. Device Activation through City of Waterloo Cellular Contact and LE Inc. G. Provide antenna cable, antenna mounting and lighting-surge arotection for outdoor antennas. 2.19 NAMEPLATES: A. All major components and sub-assemblies shall be identified as to function with laminated, engraved bakelite nameplates, or similar approved means. Install nameplates on all devices or pieces of equipment for which use or identification is not readily apparent. Ensure position of nameplate is readable after equipment installation. Prior to manufacturing of nameplates. submit list- indicating designations to Engineer and City for approval. B. Identify pumps and related components as No. 1 — North/East and No. 2 — South/West. C. All wiring shall be numbered and control panel components labele : in all panels and shall be recorded on all electrical drawings. 2.20 EFFLUENT FLOW METER: A. It shall be a 4" magnetic flow meter as specified by ASC. B. The flow meter shall be a two piece design. The magnetic sensor and transmitter shall be mounted in the Metering Manhole to the 4" pipe and shall be sealed to protect it from water damage. A remote display shall be mounted next to the pump control panel. C. The flow meter power shall be obtained from the pump contr. )I panel or a separate 120 V circuit provided by the contractor from Panel LV. 16910-7 D. The flow meter shall have the signal interfaces to the PLC control panel as required by ASC. E. Flowmeter system accuracy shall be ±0.5% of actual flow rate from 3 to 30 ft/sec and ±1% from 1 to 3 ft/sec. Repeatability shall be ±0.1% and response time programmable from 1 sec to 100 sec. 2.21 RAIN GAUGE: A. A tipping bucket rain gauge shall be supplied and installed to measure rainfall. B. The rain gauge shall be the brand and model as shown on the plans to maintain consistency with the City's other installations. C. The rain gauge shall have an 8 inch diameter orifice with screens on all opening to prevent leaves, insects and other debris from clogging the rain gauge. It shall be constructed of stainless steel, aluminum, and plastic. D. It shall be mounted on a shelf attached to a post as shown on the plans. It shall have 3 leveling knobs and a bubble level to aid in leveling during installation. E. The tipping bucket bearings shall be spring-loaded sapphire jewel bearings. F. The bucket shall tip with every 0.01 inch of rainfall and have a capacity of 22 inches per hour. G. It shall have an accuracy of +/-1% at a 2 inch per hour rainfall rate and an operating temperature range of 32 to 140 degrees F. H. A magnetic reed switch shall provide an isolated, dry contact closure of at least 50 milliseconds duration with each tip of the bucket. The reed switch shall be powered from the 24 VDC power supply in the PLC pump control system panel through a 100-ohm current limiting resistor or other means to limit the current through the reed switch to prevent accidental damage to the reed switch. J. The reed switch "signal" shall be connected to an input on the PLC pump control system and shall be programmed by ASC to measure and report the rainfall as required by the City and ASC. K. The rainfall data shall be incorporated into the SCADA, pump control system and data collection system as required by the City and ASC. L. At a minimum, the PLC system shall measure and store the following (or as otherwise specified by ASC or the City): 1. The current rainfall rate (inches per hour, with a 0.1"/hr. resolution, typ.) 2. Today's accumulated rainfall amount (inches, with a 0.01" resolution) 3. Daily rainfall amounts for the past week (Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall purchase the pump control panel, flow meter, alarm and radio control system from Automatic System Company (ASC). The Contractor shall install the equipment per the manufacturer, ASC, the Engineer and the City representative. 16910-8 B. Devices requiring field calibration or testing shall be calibrated in the presence of the owner's representative and documented. C. The Contractor or supplier shall provide skilled programmer/instrumentation engineer or technician who shall complete troubleshooting and start-up to place entire system into satisfactory operation. Engineer or technician shall make necessary inspections of completed installation, make necessary final field adjustments and make program revisions as required for start-up. D. Supplier shall demonstrate proper operation of all system features and functions to City of Waterloo and Engineer. Submit a written report summari.:ing results of field tests to Engineer for final approval. E. Coordinate installation, testing and start-up scheduling with City of Waterloo, building contractor and Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install and wire in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions an,i approved submittals. B. Wire instrumentation and control package panels as specified herein. C. Wire components as reviewed shop drawings illistrate. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. System's House/Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Manufacturer's engineer shall direct services to system and equipment operation, maintenance, troubleshooting, and equipment and system related areas other than process design and philosophy. 2. Provide services of qualified service engineer to supervise, inspect, and commission equipment installation to ensure system is installed in accordance with r!anufacturer's recommendations. 3. Field calibrate equipment at time of complete system startup on loop-by-loop basis. Document field calibration results for each piece of eq .iipment and provide copy to Engineer and City. 4. Make adjustments necessary to place equipment in operation. 5. Manufacturer's engineer for equipment specified shall be present at job site or classroom designated by owner for mandays indicated, travel time excluded, for assistance during plant construction, plant startup, equipment adjustment, and training of City's personnel for plant operation. Include minimum of: a. Instrumentation and Control Panels, Section 16915: 1) 1 manday for Installation Services. 2) 1 manday for Instructional Services. 3) 1 manday for, Post Startup (Commisioning)Services. 16910-9 SECTION 17900 DEMONSTRATION, TRAINING AND COMMISIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for inE:ructing City's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipmer t. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, an i equipment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit 2 copies of outline of instructional program, including schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and - xtent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or ed.acation with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: An authorized service representative experiencE d in operation and maintenance procedures and training. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emerger cy, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until )peration and maintenance data have been reviewed by the Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes indi.'idual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as require i by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: I 'dude system and equipment descriptions, operating standards, regulatory requirements, equipment function, operating characteristics, limiting conditions, an i performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review emergency, operations, and maintenance manuals; Project Record Documents as it specifically relates to NPDES Permit; identification systems; warranties and bonds; and maintenance service agreements. 3. Emergencies: Include instructions on stopping; shutdown instructions; operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits; instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 17900-1 4. Operations: Include startup, break-in, controls, and safety procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; operating procedures for emergencies and equipment failure; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Adjustments: Include alignments and checking, noise, vibration, economy, and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include diagnostic instructions and test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, procedures for preventive and routine maintenance, and instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include diagnosis, repair, and disassembly instructions; instructions for �- identifying parts; and review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training -p modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and City for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Instructors: Engage qualified instructors to instruct City's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment. C. Scheduling: 1. Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by written report to the Engineer. E. Commissioning of the Lift Station is defined by the entire Lift Station meeting the Project requirements at the time of commissioning. However, the Contractor's performance bond applies to the performance of the Station through an entire year of performance. END OF SECTION 17900-2 SECTION 263213 ENGINE GENERATOR PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following items from a single supplier: 1. Engine Generator Set. 2. Enclosure 3. Related Accessories as specified B. Products Furnished or Supplied but not installed C. Products Installed but not furnished or supplied D. Related Requirements 1. It is the intent of this specification to secure an engine-driven generator set that has been prototype tested, factory built, production-tested, and site-tested together with all accessories necessary for a complete installation as shown on the plans and drawings and specified herein. 2. Any exceptions to the published specifications shall be subject to the approval of the engineer and submitted minimum 10 days prior to the closing of the bid with a line by line summary description of all the items of compliance, any items that have been are omitted or have been taken exception to, and a complete description of all deviations. 3. It is the intent of this specification to secure a generator set system that has been tested during design verification, in production, and at the final job site. The generator set will be a commercial design and will be complete with all of the necessary accessories for complete installation as shown on the plans, drawings, and specifications herein. The equipment supplied shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code and applicable local codes and regulations. 4. All equipment shall be new and of current production by an international, power system manufacturer of generators, transfer switches, and paralleling switchgear. The manufacturer shall be a supplier of a complete ind coordinated system. There will be single-source responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a factory-authorized representative with factory-trained technicians. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Unit Prices 1.3 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms B. Definitions C. Reference Standards 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination B. Pre-installation Meeting 263213-1 C. Sequencing D. Scheduling 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. Product Data a. The submittal shall include prototype test certification and specification sheets showing all standard and optional accessories to be supplied; schematic wiring diagrams, dimension drawings, and interconnection diagrams identifying by terminal number each required interconnection between the generator set, the transfer switch, and the remote annunciator panel if it is included elsewhere in these specifications. 2. Shop Drawings 3. Samples B. Informational Submittal 1. Certificates a. The generator set shall be listed to UL 2200 or submitted to an independent third party certification process to verify compliance as installed. 2. Test and Evaluation Reports 3. Manufacturer's Instruction 4. Source Quality Control Submittals 5. Field or Site Quality Control 6. Manufacturer's Report 7. Special Procedure Submittal 8. Qualification Statement C. Closeout Submittal 1. Maintenance Contracts 2. Operation And Maintenance Data 3. Bonds 4. Warranty Documentation 5. Record Documentation 6. Software D. Maintenance Material Submittals 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency 1. The generator set shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards: a. UL 2200 - Standard for Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies b. CSA C22.2, No. 14-M91 Industrial Control Equipment. c. EN50082-2, Electromagnetic Compatibility-Generic Immunity Requirements, Part 2: Industrial. d. EN55011, Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Industrial, Scientific and Medical Equipment. e. IEC8528 part 4, Control Systems for Generator Sets. �. 263213-2 f. IEC Std 61000-2 and 61000-3 for susceptibility, 61000-6 radiated and conducted electromagnetic emissions. g. IEEE446 Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications. h. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Equipment shall be suitable for use in systems in compliance to Article 700, 701, and 702. i. NFPA 99, Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities. j. NFPA 110, Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The generator set shall meet all requirements for Level 1 systems. Level 1 prototype tests required by this standard shall have been performed on a complete and functional unit. Component level type tests will not substitute for this requirement. 2. Qualifications a. The equipment shall be produced by a manufacturer who is ISO 9001 certified for the design, development, production and service of its complete product line. b. The power system shall be produced by a manufacturer who has produced this type of equipment for a period of at least 10 years and who maintains a service organization available twenty-four hours a day throughout the year. 3. Manufacturers a. The power system shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and testing of the complete system. The entire system shall be installed as shown on the plans, drawings, and specifications herein. 4. Suppliers 5. Fabricators 6. Installer/Applicator/ Erector 7. Testing Agencies 8. Licensed Professional 9. Certificates 10. Preconstruction testing 11. Field and Site Samples 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements B. Storage and Handling Requirements C. Packaging Waste Management 1.8 FIELD OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions 1. Engine- generator set shall operate in the following conditions without any damage to the unit or its loads. a. Ambient Temperature: 77 °F b. Altitude : 500 ft c. Relative Humidity: 95% B. Existing Conditions 1.9 WARRANTY OR BOND A. Manufacturer's Warranty 263213-3 1. The generator set shall include a standard warranty covering five (5) years or 3,000 hours, whichever occurs first, to guarantee against defective material and workmanship in accordance with the manufacturer's published warranty from the date of initial startup. 2. The generator set manufacturer and its distributor shall maintain a 24-hour parts and service organization. This organization shall regularly engage in maintenance contract programs to perform preventive maintenance and service on equipment similar to that specified. A service agreement shall be submitted with product shop drawings and shall include system operation under simulated operating conditions; adjustment to the generator set, transfer switch, and switchgear controls as required, and certification in the owner's maintenance log of repairs made and functional tests performed on all systems. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED OR CONTRACTOR-SUPPLIED A. New Products 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment 1. The generator set shall be a Kohler model 40REOZK with a 4P7BX alternator (or engineer approved equivalent). It shall provide 52.50 kVA and 42.00 kW when operating at 277/480 volts, 60 Hz, 0.80 power factor. The generator set shall be capable of a 130°C Standby rating while operating in an ambient condition of less than or equal to 77 °F and a maximum elevation of 500 ft above sea level. The standby rating shall be available for the duration of the outage. B. Engine 1. The minimum 3.4 liter displacement engine shall deliver a minimum of 67 HP at a governed engine speed of 1,800 rpm, and shall be equipped with the following: a. Electronic governor capable of 0.5% steady-state frequency regulation b. 12-volt positive-engagement solenoid shift-starting motor c. 90-ampere automatic battery charging alternator with a solid-state voltage regulation d. Positive displacement, full-pressure lubrication oil pump, cartridge oil filters, dipstick, and oil drain e. Dry-type replaceable air cleaner elements for normal applications f. Engine-driven or electric fuel-transfer pump including fuel filter and electric solenoid fuel shutoff valve capable of lifting fuel g. The turbocharged engine shall be fueled by diesel h. The engine shall have a minimum of 4 cylinders and be liquid-cooled 2. The engine shall be EPA certified tier 3 from the factory 3. The generator must accept rated load in one-step. C. Cooling System 1. The engine shall be liquid-cooled by a closed loop, unit mounted radiator rated to operate the generator set at full load at an ambient temperature of 50 degrees C (122 degrees F). The radiator fan and other rotating engine parts shall be guarded against accidental contact. D. Heavy Duty Air Cleaner 263213-4 -- 1. The air cleaner shall provide engine air filtration which meets the engine manufacturer's specifications under typical operating conditions. E. Battery 1. Each genset requires a maintenance free BC' group 24 battery which must meet the engine manufactures' specifications for the ambient conditions specified in Part 1 Project Conditions and shall comply with the NFPA requirements for engine cranking cycles. This battery shall be rated according to SAE Standards J-537 with a minimum cold cranking amp of 650 amps and a minimum reserve capacity of 120 Minutes at 80F. The battery plates shall be constructed of a Calcium-Lead alloy to provide long waterless operation and extended battery life. The battery must contain a handle to aid in lifting and the case must be constructed of polypropylene to resist breakage and extend service life. 2. Battery rack and battery cables capable of holding the manufacti rer's recommended batteries shall be supplied and installed. F. Housing 1. Level 2 Sound Attenuated Enclosure a The generator set shall be supplied with a Level 2 Sound Attenuated Enclosure, providing a sound level of 63.9 dB(A) while the generator is operating at 100% load at 7 meters (23 feet) using acoustic insulation and acoustic-lined inlet hoods, and constructed from high strength, low alloy 14 gauge galvanized steel. The acoustic insulation used shall meet UL 94 HF1 flammability classification. The enclosure shall be manufactured from bolted panels to facilitate service, future modifications, or field replacement. The enclosure shall use external vertical air inlet and outlet hoods with 90 degree angles to discharge air up and reduce noise. The enclosure shall have an integral rodent guard and skid end caps and shall have bracing to meet 241 kph (150 mph) wind loading. b The enclosure components and skid shall be cleaned with a two-stage alkaline cleaning process to remove grease, grit, and grime from parts. Components shall then be subjected to a Zirconium-based conversion coating process to prepare the metal for electrocoat (e-coat) adhesion. All enclosure parts shall receive an 100% epoxy primer electrocoat (e-coat) with high-edge protection. Following the e-coat process, the parts shall be finish coated with powder baked paint for superior finish, durability, and appearance with a Power ArmorTM industrial finish that provides heavy duty durability in harsh conditions, and is fade-, scratch- and corrosion-resistant. c The enclosure must surpass a 3,000 hour salt spray corrosion test per ASTM B-1117. d Enclosures will be finished in the manufacturer's standard color. e The enclosures shall allow the generator set to operate at full load in an ambient temperature of 50°C with no additional derating of the electrical output of the generator set. f Enclosures shall be equipped with sufficient side and end aoors to allow access for operation, inspection, and service of the unit and all options. Minimum requirements are two doors per side. When the generator set controller faces the rear of the generator set, an additional -ear facing door is required. Access to the controller and main line circuit breaker shall meet the requirements of the National Electric Code. g Doors shall be fitted with hinges, hardware, and the doors shall be removable. h Doors shall be equipped with lockable latches. Locks shall be keyed alike. Door locks shall be recessed to minimize potential of damage to door/enclosure. 263213-5 i A duct between the radiator and air outlet shall be provided to prevent re- circulation of hot air. The complete exhaust system shall be internal to the enclosure. k The critical silencer shall be fitted with a tailpipe and rain cap. G. Fuel oil storage 1. Double Wall Secondary Containment Sub-base Fuel Tank a The generator set shall be supplied with a sub-base fuel tank of sufficient capacity to hold 142 gallons of diesel fuel. b The sub-base fuel system shall be listed under UL 142, subsection entitled Special Purpose Tanks EFVT category, and will bear their mark of UL Approval according to their particular classification. c The above ground steel secondary containment rectangular tank for use as a sub base for diesel generators is manufactured and intended to be installed in accordance with the Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code—NFPA 30, the Standard for Installation and Use of Stationary Combustible Engine and Gas Turbines—NFPA 37, and Emergency and Standby Power Systems—NFPA 110. d The primary tank shall be rectangular in shape and constructed in clam shell fashion to ensure maximum structural integrity and allow the use of a full throat fillet weld. e Steel Channel Support System. Reinforced steel box channel for generator support, with a load rating of 5,000 lbs. per generator mounting hole location. Full height gussets at either end of channel and at generator mounting holes shall be utilized. f Exterior Finish. The sub-base tank exterior finish shall be Power Armor PlusTM, a polyurea-textured rubberized coating. g Normal venting shall be sized in accordance with the American Petroleum Institute Standard No 2000, Venting Atmospheric and Low Pressure �- Storage Tanks not less than 1-1/4" (3 cm.) nominal inside diameter. h The emergency vent opening shall be sized to accommodate the total capacity of both normal and emergency venting and shall be not less than that derived from NFPA 30, table 2-3, and based on the wetted surface area of the tank. The wetted area of the tank shall be calculated on the basis of 100 percent of the primary tank. The vent is to be spring-pressure operated: opening pressure is 0.5/psig and full opening pressure is 2.5 psig. The emergency relief vent is to be sized to accommodate the total venting capacity of both normal and emergency vents. i There shall be a 2" NPT opening within the primary tank and lockable manual fill cap. A direct reading, UL listed, magnetic fuel level gauge with a hermetically sealed, vacuum tested dial, to eliminate fogging, shall be provided. k A float switch for remote or local annunciation of a (50% standard) low fuel level condition shall be supplied. Fuel in basin switch — A FDEP float switch will be installing into the containment basin of the fuel tank. This switch will close a set of contacts if fuel leaks from the main tank and into the containment basin. m Engine fluid containment — The top of the fuel tank will be equipped a fluid containment area to catch engine fluids that may leak. n Fuel fill option — The fuel fill is equipped with a 5 gallon above ground fill/spill container that contains fuel over spills that may occur during fill-ups and the normal vent will be extended to 12' above the grade. -- 263213-6 _.. H. Controller 1. Advanced Power Management 402 (APM402) Generator Set Controller a. The generator set controller shall be a microprocessor-based control system that will provide automatic starting, system monitoring, and protection. The controller system shall also provide local monitoring and remote monitoring. The control system shall be capable of PC based updating of all necessary parameters, firmware, and software. b. The controller shall be mounted on the generator set and shall have integral vibration isolation. The controller shall be prototype and reliability tested to ensure operation in the conditions encountered. 2. Codes and Standards a. The generator set controller shall meet NFPA 110 Level 1 requirements and shall include an integral alarm horn as required by NFFA. b. The controller shall meet NFPA 99 and NEC requirements. c. The controller shall be UL 508 listed. 3. Applicability a. The controller shall be a standard offering in the manufacturer's controller product line. b. The controller shall support 12-volt and 24volt starting systems. c. The controller's environmental specification shall be: -40°C to 70°C operating temperature range and 5-95% humidity, non-condensing. d. The controller shall mount on the generator or remotely within 40 feet with viewable access. 4. Controller Buttons, Display and Components a. The generator set controller shall include the following features and functions: i. Push button Master Control buttons. The buttons shall ke tactile-feel membrane with an indicator light to initiate the following functions: a. Run Mode: When in the run mode the generator sf:t shall start as directed by the operator. b. Off/Reset Mode: When in the Off/Reset mode the generator set shall stop, the reset shall reset all faults, allowing f:)r the restarting of the generator set after a shutdown. c. Auto Mode: When in Auto the mode the generator set shall be ready to accept a signal from a remote device. ii. Emergency Stop Switch. The remote stop switch shall be red in color with a "mushroom" type head. Depressing the stop button will immediately stop the generator set and lockout the generator set for any automatic remote starting. iii. Push Button/Rotary Selector dial. This dial shall be used for selection of all Menus and sub-menus. Rotating the dial moves you through the menus, pushing the dial selects the menu and function/features in that menu. Pushing the button selects the feature/function and sub- menus. iv. Digital Display. The digital display shall be alphanumeric, with 2 lines of data and approximately 24 charters. The display shall have back lighting for ease of operator use in high and low light conditions. The display shall display status of all faults and warnings. The display shall also display any engine faults. While the generator set is 263213-7 running, the display shall scroll all-important information across the screen for ease of operator use. The scroll can be stopped by pushing the rotary dial. The display shall fall asleep when the generator set is not running and will wake-up when the generator set starts, or the rotary dial is depressed. v. Fault Light. The controller shall have an annunciator fault light that glows red for faults and yellow for warnings. These faults and warnings shall be displayed in the digital display. The fault light will also glow yellow when not in AUTO. vi. Alarm Horn. The controller shall provide an alarm horn that sounds when any faults or warnings are present. The horn shall also sound when the controller is not in the AUTO mode. vii. Alarm Silence/Lamp Test Button. When this button is depressed, it -- shall test all controller lamps. This button will also silence the alarm horn when the unit is not AUTO. viii. USB Connection. The controller shall have a USB connection on the face of the controller. This connection shall allow for updating of all software and firmware. This port shall also allow for all servicing of generator set parameters, fault diagnostics and viewing of all controller information via use a laptop computer. ix. Dedicated user inputs. The controller shall have dedicated inputs for remote emergency stop switch, remote 2-wire star for transfer switch and auxiliary shutdown. x. The controller shall have auto resettable circuit protection integral on the circuit board. 5. System Controller Monitoring and Status Features and Functions a. The generator controller shall display and monitor the following engine and alternator functions and allow adjustments of certain parameters at the controller: i. Overview menu a. Active shutdowns and warnings shall be displayed if present and without the need of operator interface b. Engine runtime with total hours c. Average line to line voltage d. Coolant temperature e. Fuel level or pressure f. Oil pressure g. Battery voltage h. Software version i. Frequency j. Average current ii. Engine metering menu. -' a. Engine speed b. Oil pressure c. Coolant temperature d. Battery voltage iii. Generator metering menu. a. Total power in VA b. Total power in W c. Rated power % used d. Voltage L-L and L-N for all phases e. Current L1, L2, L3 263213-8 -� f. Frequency iv. Generator set information. a. Generator set model number b. Generator set serial number c. Controller set number v. Generator set run time. a. Engine run time total hours b. Engine loaded total hours c. Number of engine starts d. Total energy in kW vi. Generator set system a. System voltage b. System frequency 50/60Hz c. System phase, single/three phase d. Power rating kW e. Amperage rating f. Power type standby/prime g. Measurement units, metric/English units adjustable h. Alarm silence, always or auto only vii. Generator set calibration, the following are adjustable a the controller. a. Voltage L-L and L-N all phases b. Current L1, L2, L3 c. Reset all calibrations viii. Voltage regulation, +/-0.5% regulation, the following is idjustable at the controller. a. Voltage Adjustable +/- 10% ix. Digital and Analog Inputs and outputs a. Displays settings and status x. Event Log a. Stores event history, up to 1000 events 6. Controller Engine control features and functions a. Automatic restart - the controller has automatic restart feature that initiates the start routine and re-crank after a failed start attempt. b. Cyclic cranking - the controller shall have programmable cyclic cranking c. Engine starting aid - the controller shall have the capability of providing control for an optional engine starting aid. d. The control system shall include time delays for engine start and cool down. e. The control system shall interface with the engine ECM and display engine fault codes and warnings. The ECM shall also include sender failure monitoring to help distinguish between failed senders and actual failure conditions. f. The controller shall monitor and display engine governor fulctions which include steady state and transient frequency monitoring 7. Controller Alternator control features and functions a. Integrated hybrid voltage regulator. The system shall have integral microprocessor-based voltage regulator system that provides +/- 5% voltage regulation, no-load to full load with three phase sensing. The system is prototype tested and control variation of voltage to frequency. The voltage regulator shall be adjustable at the controller with maximum +/- 10% adjustable of nominal voltage. 263213-9 b. AC output voltage regulator adjustment. The system shall allow for adjustment of the integral voltage regulator with maximum of+/- 10% adjustment of the system voltage. c. Alternator thermal overload protection. The system shall have integral alternator overload and short circuit protection matched to each alternator for the particular voltage and phase configuration. d. Power metering. The controller digitally displays power metering of kW and kVA. 8. Other control features and functions a. Event logging. The controller keeps a record of up to 1000 events, for warning and shutdown faults. This fault information becomes a stored record of systems events and can be reset. b. Historical data logging. The controller total number of generator set successful start shall be recorded and displayed. c. Programmable access. The control system shall include a USB port that gives service technicians the ability to provide software and firmware upgrades. The system shall also be capable of allowing setting of all critical parameters using the service software and a laptop computer. All parameters and setting should be capable to being stored on a laptop for future upgrades of printing for analysis. 9. Generator Set Warning, Shutdown Alarm and Status a. The generator set shall have alarms and status indication lamps that show non-automatic status and warning and shutdown conditions. The controller shall indicate with a warning lamp and or alarm and on the digital display screen any shutdown, warning or engine fault condition that exists in the generator set system. The following alarms and shutdowns shall exist as a minimum: i. Engine functions a. Critical high fuel level (alarm) b. ECM communication loss (shutdown) c. ECM diagnostics (alarm & shutdown) d. Engine overspeed (shutdown) e. Engine start aid active f. Engine under speed (shutdown) g. Fuel tank leak (alarm & shutdown) h. High DC battery voltage (alarm) i. High coolant temperature (alarm & shutdown) j. High fuel level (alarm) k. Low DC battery voltage (alarm) I. Low coolant level (shutdown) m. Low coolant temperature (alarm) n. Low cranking voltage (alarm) o. Low engine oil level (alarm & shutdown) p. Low fuel level (alarm & shutdown) q. Low fuel pressure (alarm) r. Low oil pressure (alarm & shutdown) s. No coolant temperature signal (shutdown) t. No oil pressure signal (shutdown) u. Overcrank (shutdown) v. Speed sensor fault (alarm) ii. Generator functions a. AC sensing loss over& under current (alarm & shutdown) 263213-10 b. Alternator protection (shutdown) c. Ground fault input (alarm) d. kW overload (shutdown) e. Locked rotor (shutdown) f. Over-frequency (shutdown) g. Over AC voltage (shutdown) h. Under-frequency (shutdown) i. Under AC voltage (shutdown) j. Emergency stop (shutdown) iii. Other General functions a. Battery charger fault (alarm) b. Common fault (shutdown) c. Common warning (alarm) d. Master switch not in auto (alarm) e. Generator running f. Input/output fault (alarm) iv. The generator set controller shall also be capable of meeting all necessary NFPA 110 level 1 requirements that include several of the above along with; EPS supplying load, Master switch "not in auto", and contacts for local and remote common alarm. 10. Communications a. The controller shall communicate with the ECM (engine control module) _ for control, monitoring, diagnosis, and meet SAE J1939 standards b. Kohler proprietary RBUS communication shall be available c. A RBUS shall be able to monitor and alter parameters and start or stop a generator. d. The controller shall have the capability to communicate to a personal computer (IBM or compatible) and appropriate application software e. A variety of connections shall be available based on requirements: i. A single control connection to a PC via USB ii. Internet connection via Ethernet f. Generator and transfer switch controls shall be equipped with communications modules capable of connecting to the same communication network. I. Generator Overcurrent and Fault Protection 1. The generator shall be provided with a factory installed, 80% rated line circuit breaker rated at 100.00 amperes that is UL489 listed. Line circuit breakers shall be sized for the rated ampacity of the loads served by the breaker per the NEC. 2. The circuit breaker(s) shall incorporate a thermo-magnetic trip unit. 3. Load side lugs shall be provided from the factory. The line circuit breaker shall include auxiliary contacts, shunt trip, undervoltage trip, alarm swich, and overcurrent switch functionality. Load side breaker connections r iade at the factory shall be separated from field connections. 4. The shunt trip device shall be connected to trip the generator breaker when the generator-set is shut down by other protective devices. 5. When GFI is required per the NEC, additional neutrals shall be factory installed, and the alarm indication shall be integrated with the other generator-set alarms. 6. Barriers to provide segregation of wiring from an emergency source to emergency loads from all other wiring and equipment, if required by the NEC, shall be provided. 263213-11 J. Alternator 1. The alternator shall be salient-pole, brushless, 2/3-pitch, with 4 bus bar provision for external connections, self-ventilated, with drip-proof construction and amortisseur rotor windings, and skewed for smooth voltage waveform. The ratings shall meet the NEMA standard (MG1-32.40) temperature rise limits. The insulation shall be class H per UL1446 and the varnish shall be a vacuum pressure impregnated, fungus resistant epoxy. Temperature rise of the rotor and stator shall be limited to 130°C Standby. The PMG based excitation system shall be of brushless construction controlled by a digital, three phase sensing, solid- state, voltage regulator. The AVR shall be capable of proper operation under severe nonlinear loads and provide individual adjustments for voltage range, stability and volts-per-hertz operations. The AVR shall be protected from the environment by conformal coating. The waveform harmonic distortion shall not exceed 5% total RMS measured line-to-line at full rated -- load. The TIF factor shall not exceed 50. 2. The alternator shall have a maintenance-free bearing, designed for 40,000 hour B10 life. The alternator shall be directly connected to the flywheel housing with a semi- flexible coupling between the rotor and the flywheel. 3. The generator shall be inherently capable of sustaining at least 300% of rated current for at least 10 seconds under a 3-phase symmetrical short circuit without the addition of separate current-support devices. 4. Motor starting performance and voltage dip determinations shall be based on the complete generator set. The generator set shall be capable of supplying 180.00 LRKVA for starting motor loads with a maximum instantaneous voltage dip of 35%, as measured by a digital RMS transient recorder in accordance with IEEE Standard 115. Motor starting performance and voltage dip determination that does not account for all components affecting total voltage dip, i.e., engine, alternator, voltage regulator, and governor will not be acceptable. As such, the generator set shall be prototype tested to optimize and determine performance as a generator set system. K. Vibration Isolation 1. Vibration isolators shall be provided between the engine-alternator and heavy-duty steel base. L. Generator Pad 1. The generator shall be installed on a reinforced concrete pad, sized by the engineer and/or manufacturer in relation to the size and weight of the generator and fuel tank. The top of the pad shall be a minimum of 4-inches above grade extending out 6- inches from the generator and fuel tank base on all sides. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. The generator shall be supplied with a thermostatically controlled strip heater to prevent the accumulation of moisture and dampness and to maintain the stator windings above the dew point. The heater shall be wired to be "on" at all times that the generator set is not operating. B. The generator set shall be supplied with a 10-ampere automatic float/equalize battery charger capable of charging both lead-acid and ni-cad type batteries, with the following features: 1. Automatic 3-stage float to equalization charge 2. Voltage regulation of 1% from no to full load over 10% AC input line voltage variations 263213-12 3. Battery charging current Ammeter and battery voltage voltmeter vith 5% full-scale accuracy 4. LED lamp for power ON indication 5. Current limited during engine cranking, short circuit, and reverse polarity conditions 6. Temperature compensated for ambient temperatures for-40°C to 60°C 7. Alarm circuit board featuring alarm contacts for low battery voltage, high battery voltage, and battery charger malfunction. 8. UL 1012 Listed 9. CSA Certified C. Battery rack and battery cables capable of holding the manufacturer's ecommended batteries shall be supplied. D. The generator shall be furnished with an externally mounted, recesses, emergency stop switch (break glass, pushbutton style) protected from accidental operation. E. The generator set shall be furnished with rodent guards to prevent rodent intrusion and protect internal components. F. The air cleaner restriction indicator shall indicate the need for mainten_ince of the air cleaners. G. Supply a Modbus to Ethernet Converter that provides one RJ45 jack for standard Ethernet 10/100 connection, and a terminal block for RS-485 connection, and is powered by 12 VDC. The Baud rate on the Modbus RTU side shall be selectable 9600 or 19200. The converter shall support Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) users to poll or issue trap commands. H. Block Heater- The block heater shall be thermostatically controlled, 1, )00 watt, 110-120 VAC - single phase, to maintain manufacturers recommended engine ;oolant temperature to meet the start-up requirements of NFPA 99 and NFPA 110, Level 1 I. Supply flexible fuel lines to provide a flexible connection between the engine fuel fittings and the fuel supply tank piping and for the fuel return lines from the injector pump per engine manufacturer's recommendations. Flex line shall have a protective steel wire braid to protect the hose from abrasion. _ J. The generator set shall be supplied with a 2 Input/5 Output Module kit to provide two additional analog inputs and 5 additional dry contact outputs. The analog inputs can be used for analog or digital input functions. They can be set up for 0-5VDC, ±3VDC resistive or relay contact sensor devices. The dry contact outputs shall be arranged as two 120VAC or 28VDC, 10A form C contacts and three 28VDC, 2A form C contacts. Input and output functions are user defined. K. The generator set shall be supplied with a means to manually adjust the speed of the generator. L. The generator set shall be supplied with a common failure relay to pro iide means of signaling fault and/or shutdown conditions. 263213-13 1. The common failure relay shall remotely signal auxiliary faults, emergency stop, high engine temperature, low oil pressure, overcrank, and over speed via one single-pole, double-throw relay with 10 amps at 120 VAC contacts. 2. The relay contacts shall be gold flashed to allow use of low current draw devices (100ma @ 28VDC min.). 3. Once energized the relay shall remain latched until the system is reset by the main controller switch. M. The generator set shall be provided with a run relay which shall provide a three-pole, double-throw relay with 10-amp/250 VAC contacts to indicate that the generator is running. The run relay dry contacts can be used for energizing or de-energizing customer devices while the generator is running (e.g. louvers, indicator lamps, etc.) 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work 1. To ensure that the equipment has been designed and built to the highest reliability and quality standards, the manufacturer and/or local representative shall be responsible for three separate tests: design prototype tests, final production tests, and site commissioning tests. a. Design Prototype Tests. Components of the emergency system, such as the engine/generator set, transfer switch, and accessories, shall not be subjected to prototype tests because the tests are potentially damaging. Rather, similar design prototypes and preproduction models shall be subject to the following tests: i. Maximum power (kW) ii. Maximum motor starting (kVA) at 35% instantaneous voltage dip. iii. Alternator temperature rise by embedded thermocouple and/or by resistance method per NEMA MG1-32.6. iv. Governor speed regulation under steady-state and transient conditions. v. Voltage regulation and generator transient response. vi. Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation, and telephone influence factor. vii. Three-phase short circuit tests. viii. Alternator cooling air flow. ix. Torsional analysis to verify that the generator set is free of harmful torsional stresses. x. Endurance testing. b. Final Production Tests. Each generator set shall be tested under varying loads with guards and exhaust system in place. Tests shall include: i. Single-step load pickup ii. Safety shutdown device testing iii. Rated Power @ 0.8 PF iv. Maximum power v. A witness test, or a certified test record sent to engineer prior to shipment. c. Site Tests. The manufacturer's distribution representative shall perform an installation check, startup, and system load test. The engineer, �. regular operators, and the maintenance staff shall be notified of the time and date of the site test. The tests shall include: i. Fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze shall be checked for conformity to the manufacturer's recommendations, under the environmental 263213-14 conditions present and expected. ii. Accessories that normally function while the set is standing by shall be checked prior to cranking the engine. These shall include: block heaters, battery chargers, alternator strip heaters, remote annunciators, etc. iii. Generator set startup under test mode to check for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust gases outside the building, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration during operation, normal and emergency line-to-line voltage and frequency, and phase rotation. iv. Automatic start by means of a simulated power outage to test remote- - automatic starting, transfer of the load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to this test, all transfer switch timers shall be adjusted fc r proper system coordination. Engine coolant temperature, oil pressure, and battery charge level along with generator set voltage, amperes, and frequency shall be monitored throughout the test. B Manufacturer's Services For City of Waterloo PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS A. Installer List B. Installation Schedule 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions B. Pre-installation Testing C. Evaluation and Assessment 3.3 PREPARATION A. Protection of In-place Condition B. Surface Preparation C. Demolition/ Removal 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques B. Interface with Other Work C. System Integration D. Tolerances 3.5 REPAIR/ RESTORATION 3.6 REINSTALLATION 3.7 FIELD OR SITE QUALITY CONTROL -- A. Field or Site Tests and Inspection B. Non-Conforming Work C. Manufacturer's Services 263213-15 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP (COMMISSIONING) 3.9 ADJUSTING 3.10 CLEANING A. Waste Management 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration B. Training 3.12 PROTECTION 3.13 MAINTENANCE 3.14 ATTACHMENTS END OF SECTION 263213-16 SECTION 263623 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following items from a single supplier: 1. Automatic transfer switch 2. Related Accessories as specified B. Products Furnished or Supplied but not installed C. Products Installed but not furnished or supplied D. Related Requirements 1. It is the intent of this specification to secure an automatic transfer switch that has been prototype tested, factory built, production-tested, and site-tested together with all accessories necessary for a complete installation as shown on the plans — and drawings and specified herein. 2. Any exceptions to the published specifications shall be subject to the approval of the engineer and submitted minimum 10 days prior to the closing of the bid with a line by line summary description of all the items of compliance, any items that have been are omitted or have been taken exception to, and a complete description of all deviations. 3. It is the intent of this specification to secure an automatic transfel switch that has been tested during design verification, in production, and at the f nal job site. The automatic transfer switch will be a commercial design and will be complete with allof the necessary accessories for complete installation as shown on the plans, drawings, and specifications herein. The equipment supplied shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code and applicable local codes and regulations. 4. All equipment shall be new and of current production by an international, power system manufacturer of generators, transfer switches, and paralleling switchgear. The manufacturer shall be a supplier of a complete and coordinated system. There will be single-source responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a factory-authorized representative with factory-trained technicians. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Lump Sum 1.3 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms B. Definitions C. Reference Standards 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination B. Pre-installation Meeting C. Sequencing D. Scheduling 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 263623-1 1. Product Data a. The submittal shall include specification sheets showing all standard and optional accessories to be supplied; schematic wiring diagrams, dimension drawings, and interconnection diagrams identifying by terminal number each required interconnection between the generator set, the transfer switch, and the remote annunciator panel if it is included elsewhere in these specifications. 2. Shop Drawings 3. Samples B. Informational Submittal 1. Certificates 2. Test and Evaluation Reports 3. Manufacturer's Instruction 4. Source Quality Control Submittals 5. Field or Site Quality Control 6. Manufacturer's Report 7. Special Procedure Submittal 8. Qualification Statement C. Closeout Submittals 1. Maintenance Contracts 2. Operation And Maintenance Data 3. Bonds 4. Warranty Documentation 5. Record Documentation 6. Software D. Maintenance Material Submittals 1. Literature 2. Spare Parts 3. Extra Stock Materials 4. Tools 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency ..... 1. The automatic transfer switch shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards: a. UL 1008 - Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment b. IEC 947-6-1 Low-voltage Switchgear and Control gear; Multifunction equipment; Automatic Transfer Switching EquipmentEN55011, Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Industrial, Scientific and Medical Equipment. c. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code d. NFPA 99 - Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities e. NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems f. IEEE Standard 446 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications g. NEMA Standard ICS 10-2005, Electromechanical AC Transfer Switch Equipment. h. EN61000-4-4 Fast Transient Immunity Severity Level 4 i. EN61000-4-5 Surge Immunity Class 4 (voltage sensing and programmable inputs only) 263623-2 j. IEEE 472 (ANSI C37.90A) Ring Wave Test k. IEC Specifications for EMI/EMC Immunity (CISPR 11, IEC 1000-4-2, IEC 1000- 4-3, IEC 1000-4-4, IEC 1000-4-5, IEC 1000-4-6, IEC 1000-1-8, IEC 1000-4-11) I. CSA C22.2 No. 178 certification 2. Qualifications a. The automatic transfer switch shall be produced by a manufacturer who is ISO 9001 certified for the design, development, production and service of its complete product line. b. A manufacturer who has produced this type of equipment f:;)r a period of at least 10 years and who maintains a service organization a\ailable twenty-four hour a day throughout the year shall produce the automatic transfer switch. 3. Manufacturers a. The automatic transfer switch shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and testing of the complete system. The entire system shall be installed as shown on the plans, drawings, and specifications herein. b. The manufacturer shall maintain a national service organization of employing personnel located throughout the contiguous United States. The Service center's personnel must be factory trained and must be on call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Manufacturer shall supply owner, each year, updated personnel contact information. — c. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each switch, by serial number, for a minimum of 20 years. 4. Suppliers 5. Fabricators 6. Installer/Applicator/ Erector 7. Testing Agencies 8. Licensed Professional 9. Certificates 10. Preconstruction testing 11. Field and Site Samples 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements B. Storage and Handling Requirements C. Packaging Waste Management 1.8 FIELD OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions 1. Automatic transfer switch shall operate in the following condition, without any damage to the unit or its loads. a. Ambient Temperature: -4 to 158 Degrees F b. Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% noncondensing B. Existing Conditions 1.9 WARRANTY OR BOND A. Manufacturer's Warranty 263623-3 1. The ATS shall include a standard warranty covering five (5) years to guarantee against defective material and workmanship in accordance with the manufacturer's published warranty from the date of initial startup. 2. The ATS manufacturer and its distributor shall maintain a 24-hour parts and service organization. This organization shall regularly engage in maintenance contract programs to perform preventive maintenance and service on equipment similar to that specified. A service agreement shall be submitted with product shop drawing and shall include system operation under simulated operating conditions; adjustment to the generator set, transfer switch, and switchgear controls as required, and certification in the owner's maintenance log of repairs made and functional tests performed on all systems. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED OR CONTRACTOR-SUPPLIED A. New Products 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment 1. Furnish and install an automatic transfer switch system(s) with 3-Pole/4-Wire, Solid Neutral, 150 Amps, 480V/60Hz. Each automatic transfer shall consist of an inherently double throw power transfer switch mechanism and a microprocessor controller to provide automatic operation. All transfer switches and controllers shall be the products of the same manufacturer. �... B. Manufacturer 1. Automatic transfer switches shall be Kohler Any Breaker Rated - Programmed Transition (KCP)/KCP-AMTB-0150#. Any alternate shall be submitted for approval to the consulting engineer at least 10 days prior to bid date. Alternate bids shall include a line-by-line clarification of the specification marked with "D" for deviation; "E" for exception, and "C" for comply. C. Construction D. Enclosure 1. The ATS shall be furnished in a NEMA 12 enclosure. 2. All standard door mounted switches and indicating LEDs shall be integrated into a flush-mounted, interface membrane or equivalent in the enclosure door for easy viewing & replacement. The panel shall be capable of having a manual locking feature to allow the user to lockout all membrane mounted control switches to prevent unauthorized tampering. This cover shall be mounted with hinges and have a latch that may be padlocked. The membrane panel shall be suitable for mounting by others when furnished on open type units. 2.3 DESCRIPTION A. Regulatory Requirements B. Sustainability Characteristics 2.4 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Capacities 263623-4 — 2.5 OPERATION A. Operators B. Controls 1. A four line, 20 character LCD display and dynamic 4 button keypad shall be an integral part of the controller for viewing all available data and setting desired operational parameters. Operational parameters shall also be available for viewing and control through the communications interface port or USB. The following parameters shall only be adjustable via a password protected programming on the controller: a. Nominal line voltage and frequency b. Single or three phase sensing c. Operating parameter protection d. Transfer operating mode configuration (Standard transition Programmed transition, or Closed transition) C. Voltage and Frequency 1. Voltage (all phases) and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources shall be continuously monitored. Voltage on both normal and emergency sources and frequency on the emergency sources shall be adjustable with the following pickup, dropout, and trip setting capabilities (values shown as % of nominal unless otherwise specified): a Parameter Dropout/Trip Pickup/Reset b Under voltage 75 to 98% 85 to 100% c Over voltage 06 to 135% 95 to 100% of trip d Under frequency 95 to 99% 80 to 95% e Over frequency 01 to 115% 105 to 120% f Voltage unbalance 5 to 20% 3 to 18% 2. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within ± 0.5% over an operating temperature range of-20°C to 70°C. 3. An adjustable dropout time for transient voltage and frequency e x:cursions shall be _ provided. The time delays shall be 0.1 to 9.9 seconds for voltage and .1 to 15 seconds for frequency. 4. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments either locally with the display and keypad, remotely via the communications interface port or USB. 5. The controller shall be capable of sensing the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency sources. The source shall be considered unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected (ABC or BAC). Unacceptable phase rotation shall be indicated on the LCD; the service required LED and the annunciation through the communication protocol and dry contacts. In addition, the phase rotation sensing shall be capable of being disabled, if required. 6. The controller shall be capable of detecting a single phasing condition of a source, even though a voltage may be regenerated by the load. This condition is a loss of phase and shall be considered a failed source. 7. Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to provide digital readout of voltage on all 3 phases (phase to phase and phase to neutral), frequency, and phase rotation. D. Time Delays 1. The transfer switch shall include time delay controls for the following functions: prevent start/stop short cycling of the generator due to momentary dips in line voltage; transfer the load to the generator when it is at rated voltage and frequency, return to line power with adjustable time delay when line power is restored, and initiate an engine shutdown E. Additional Features 263623-5 1. The controller shall have 3 levels of security. Level 1 shall allow monitoring of settings and parameters only. The Level 1 shall be capable of restriction(s) with the use of a lockable cover. Level 2 shall allow test functions tc be performed and Level 3 shall allow setting of all parameters. 2. The display shall provide for the test functions, allowed through password security. The test function shall be load, no load or auto test. The auto test function shall request an elapsed time for test. At the completion of this time delay the test shall be automatically ended and a retransfer sequence shall commence. All loaded tests shall be immediately ended and retransfer shall occur if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable. 3. A contact closure shall be provided for a low-voltage engine start signal. The start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the engine by requiring the generator set to reach proper output, and run for the duration of the cool down setting, regardless of whether the normal source restores before the load is transferred. 4. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided consisting of a minimum of two contacts, closed when the ATS is connected to the normal source and two contacts closed, when the ATS is connected to the emergency source. 5. LED indicating lights shall be provided; one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the normal source (green) and one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the emergency source (red). 6. LED indicating lights shall be provided and energized by controller outputs. The lights shall provide true source availability of the normal (green) and emergency sources (red), as determined by the voltage, frequency and phase rotation sensing trip and reset settings for each source. 7. A membrane switch shall be provided on the membrane panel to test all indicating lights and display when pressed. 8. Provide the ability to select "commit/no commit to transfer" to determine whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load. 9. Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact which opens to signal the ATS to transfer to emergency and for remote contacts which closes to inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal. Both of these inhibit signals can be activated through the keypad, communications interface port or USB. A "not-in- auto" LED shall indicate anytime the controller is inhibiting transfer from occurring. 10. An in-phase monitor shall be a standard feature in the controller. The monitor shall control transfer so that motor load inrush currents do not exceed normal starting -. currents, and shall not require external control of power sources. The in-phase monitor shall be specifically designed for and be the product of the ATS manufacturer. The in-phase monitor shall be capable of being enabled or disabled from the user interface, communications interface port or USB. 11. The programmed transition feature shall control the transfer so that mechanism is placed in a load disconnect position for an adjustable period of time, giving motor and transformer loads an opportunity to decay to acceptable levels. The programmed transition feature shall be specifically designed for and be the product of the ATS manufacturer. The programmed transition setting shall be capable of being enabled or disabled from the user interface, communications interface port or USB. The controller shall include a built-in time delay for programmed transition operation. This time shall be adjustable from the user interface. The default value shall be 1 second and shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. 12. A time based load control feature shall be available to allow the prioritized addition and removal of loads based during transfer. This feature may be enabled for either or both sources. The user shall be able to control up to nine loads with independent timing sequences for pre and post transfer delays in either direction of transfer. 263623-6 13. The controller shall provide 2 inputs for external controls that can be programmed from the following values: a. Common fault, Remote test, Inhibit transfer, Low battery voltage, Peak shave, Time delay bypass, Load shed forced to OFF position (Programmed transition only) 14. The controller shall provide two form "C" contact outputs rated for up to 12A @ 240VAC or 2A @ 480VAC that can be programmed from the following values: a. Aux switch open, Transfer switch aux contact fault, Alarm silenced, Alarm active, I/O communication loss, Contactor position, Exercise active, Test mode active, Fail to transfer, Fail to acquire standby source, Source available, Phase rotation error, Not in automatic mode, Common alarm. In phase monitor sync, Load bank control active, Load control active, Maintenance mode active, Non- emergency transfer, Fail to open/close, Loss of phase, Over/under voltage, Over/under frequency, Voltage unbalance, Start signal, Peak shave active, Preferred source supplying load, Standby source supplying load 15. The controller shall be capable of expanding the number of inputs and outputs with additional modules. 16. Optional input/output modules shall be furnished which mount or the inside of the enclosure to facilitate ease of connections. 17. Engine Exerciser- The controller shall provide an internal engine exerciser. The engine exerciser shall allow the user to program up to 21 different exercise routines based on a calendar mode. For each routine, the user shall be able to: a. Enable or disable the routine b. Enable or disable transfer of the load during routine. c. Set the start time, time of day, day of week, week of month (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, alternate or every) d. Set the duration of the run. e. At the end of the specified loaded exercise duration the switch shall transfer the load back to normal and run the generator for the specified cool down period. All loaded exercises shall be immediately ended and retransfer shall occur if the standby source fails. The next exercise period shall be displayed on the main screen with the type of exercise, time and date. The type of exercise and the time remaining shall be display when the exercise is active. It shall be possible of ending the exercise event with a single button push. 18. Date and time - The date shall automatically adjust for leap year and the time shall have the capability of automatically adjusting for daylight saving and standard times. 19. System Status - The controller shall have a default display the following on: a. System status b. Date, time and type of the next exercise event c. Average voltage of the preferred and standby sources d. Scrolling through the displays shall indicate the following: i) Line to line and line to neutral voltages for both sources ii) Frequency of each source iii) Load current for each phase iv) Single or three phase operation v) Type of transition vi) Preferred source vii) Commit or no commit modes of operation viii) Source/source mode ix) In phase monitor enable/disable x) Phase rotation xi) Date and time 263623-7 20. Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or display "coded" system status messages, which must be explained by references in the operator's manual, are not permissible. 21. Self-Diagnostics - The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for the purpose of detecting system errors. This screen shall provide information on the status input signals to the controller which may be preventing load transfer commands from being completed. 22. Communications Interface - The controller shall be capable of interfacing, through a standard communications with a network of transfer switches and generators. It shall be able to be connected via an RS-485 serial communication (up to 4,000 ft. direct connect or multi-drop configuration). This module shall allow for seamless integration of existing or new communication transfer devices and generators. 23. The transfer switch shall also be able to interface to 3rd party applications using u— Modbus RTU open standard protocols utilizing Modbus register maps. Proprietary protocols shall not be acceptable. 24. The controller shall contain a USB port for use with a software diagnostic application available to factory authorized personnel for downloading the controller's parameters and settings; exercise event schedules; maintenance records and event history. The application can also adjust parameters on the controller. 25. Data Logging - The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the last 2000 events, even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in a non-volatile memory. The controller shall be able to display up to the last 99 events. The remaining events shall be accessible via the communications interface port or USB. a. Event Logging i) Data, date and time indication of any event b. Statistical Data i) Total number of transfers* ii) Total number of fail to transfers* iii) Total number of transfers due to preferred source failure* iv) Total number of minutes of operation* v) Total number of minutes in the standby source* vi) Total number of minutes not in the preferred source* vii) Normal to emergency transfer time viii) Emergency to normal transfer time ix) System start date x) Last maintenance date xi) * The statistical data shall be held in two registers. One register shall contain data since start up and the second register shall contain data from the last maintenance reset. 26. External DC Power Supply - An optional provision shall be available to connect up to two external 12/24 VDC power supply to allow the LCD and the door mounted control indicators to remain functional when both power sources are dead for extended periods of time. This module shall contain reverse battery connection indication and circuit protection. F. Operation Sequence �.. 2.6 MATERIALS 2.7 ASSEMBLY OR FABRICATION A. Factory Assembly B. Shop Fabrication 263623-8 C. Assembly or Fabrication Tolerances 2.8 MIXES 2.9 FINISHES A. Primer Materials B. Finish Materials C. Shop Finishing Materials 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Controller Disconnect Switch. A Logic disconnect switch shall be mounted inside the enclosure, and shall disconnect power to controller without disconnecting the load. The logic disconnect switch shall disconnect utility power to the controller during maintenance and service without disconnecting power to the load. The switch has two positions, auto and disconnect. The disconnect position shall disconnect the voltage sensing leads for the utility source (A, B, C, N). It is assumed that the user shall disable the generator by placing the controller in the OFF position. B. Current Sensing. Current sensing shall measure the load bus current c;n all phases with 1% accuracy. Load current shall be viewable on the controller LCD display. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and Inspection 1. Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying compliance with all of the requirements of this specification including compliance with the above codes and standards. The certification shall identify, by serial number(s), the equipment involved. No exceptions to the specifications, other than those stipulated at the time of the submittal, shall be included in the certification. 2. The ATS manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and the manufacturer shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation and servicing in accordance with ISO 9001. B. Non-Conforming Work C. Manufacturer's Services D. Coordination of Other Tests and Inspections PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS A. Installer List B. Substitution Limitations 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions B. Pre-installation Testing C. Evaluation and Assessment 3.3 PREPARATION A. Protection of In-place Condition B. Surface Preparation C. Demolition/Removal 263623-9 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques B. Interface with Other Work C. System Integration D. Tolerances 3.5 REPAIR/ RESTORATION 3.6 REINSTALLATION 3.7 FIELD OR SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Field or Site Tests and Inspection B. Non-Conforming Work C. Manufacturer's Services 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP 3.9 ADJUSTING 3.10 CLEANING A. Waste Management 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration B. Training 3.12 PROTECTION 3.13 MAINTENANCE 3.14 ATTACHMENTS END OF SECTION 263623-10 GEOTECHNICAL REPORTS 1. NOTICE The included geotechnical reports are provided for the c,:)ntractor's reference. 2. REPORTS INCLUDED 1. General Soil Borings a. Soil Boring at Lift Station is identified as Boring Log No. 7 GEOTECHNICAL REPORTS CONTRACT NO. 983 21 - 1 Ilerracon GeoReTf Geotechnical EngineeringReport Waterloo Air & Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements Waterloo, Iowa Feb uary 13, 2020 Terracon Project No 13195070.02 Prepared for: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates, Inc. Cedar Falls, Iowa Prepared by: Terracon Consultants, Inc. Cedar Falls, Iowa Environmental Facilities Geotechnical Materials February 13, 2020 herr con Clapsaddle-Garber Associates, Inc. GeoReport 5106 Nordic Drive Cedar Falls, Iowa 50613 Attn: Mr. Adam Daters, P.E. P: (319)266-0258 E: adaters©cgaconsultants.com Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, Iowa Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 Dear Mr. Daters: Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Terracon) has performed Geotechnical Engineering services for the above referenced project. Our services were performed in general accordance with Terracon Proposal No. P13195070.02 dated August 21, 2019. This report presents the findings of our subsurface exploration and provides geotechnical recommendations concerning earthwork and the design and construction of foundations and pavements for the proposed project. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this project. If you have any questions concerning this report or if we may be of further service, please contact us. Sincerely, Terracon Consultants, Inc. Gib Gregory M. Decker, E.I. Jason P. Heinz, P.E. Staff Engineer " Department Manager Geotechnical Services Iowa No. 18345 Terracon Consultants, Inc. 3105 Capita, Way, Ste. 5 Cedar Fans, lowa 50613 P (319) 277 4016 -9i 277 4320 ter racor.co - Environmental Facilities Geotechnical Materials REPORT TOPICS INTRODUCTION -_. 1 SITE CONDITIONS =..=.=,.s=; 1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION . 2 GEOTECHNICAL CHARACTERIZATION 2 GEOTECHNICAL OVERVIEW 4 EARTHWORK 4 SPREAD FOOTING FOUNDATIONS ...,,3................................. 9 SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS - ,.,.3.....,,#........................ 11 LATERAL EARTH PRESSURES .,,.... .,.®...,,....... 11 PAVEMENTS.............................................................................................................. 13 FROST CONSIDERATIONS.....................a,..=.,=a=3.= 16 GENERAL COMMENTS...................................... . 16 _ Note:This report was originally delivered in a web-based format.Orange Bold text in the report indicates a referenced section heading. The PDF version also includes hyperlinks which direct the reader to that section and clicking on the GeoReport logo will bring you back to this page. For more interactive features, please view your project online at client.terracon.com. ATTACHMENTS EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES SITE LOCATION AND EXPLORATION PLANS EXPLORATION RESULTS PPORTING INFORMATION Note: Refer to each individual Attachment for a listing of contents. Responsive _ Resourceful • Reiiabie 1 Geotechnical Engineering Report Waterloo Air & Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, Iowa Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 February 13, 2020 INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of our subsurface exploration and geotechnical engineering services performed for the proposed sanitary sewer improvements and road construction to be located east of Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road in Waterloo, Iowa. The purpose of these services is to provide information and geotechnical engineering recommendations relative to: • Subsurface soil conditions - Foundation design and co istruction • Groundwater conditions Seismic site classification ,:per IBC -  Site preparation and earthwork - Lateral earth pressures • Excavation considerations - Pavement design and construction Frost considerations The geotechnical engineering Scope of Services for this project included the advancement of fifteen (15) soil borings to depths ranging from approximately 15.5 to 40 feet below existing site grades Maps showing the site and boring locations are attached in Site Location and Exploration . The results of the laboratory testing performed on portions of recovered samples are included on the boring logs and as separate graphs in the attached Exploration Results and Supporting information. SITE CONDITIONS _ Item Description The sanitary sewer improvements are planned east of Leversee Road extending from W.Airline Highway to E. Lone Tree Road. WARP Drive will Site Location extend from the intersection of Leversee Road and East Lone Tree Road II about 1,000 feet to the east. See Site Location Existing Improvements None Current Ground Cover Crop residue Existing Topography Site elevations at the boring locations range from about 864 eet to about 874 feet. Responsive E Raccarcefu Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements m Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 a Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport. PROJECT DESCRIPTION Item Description The project proposed includes the construction of sanitary sewers, manholes, a lift station, and a road on the east side of Leversee Road. The sewer will extend from about 450 feet north of East Lone Tree Road south Project Description to the Canadian National Railroad,where it extends about 1,600 feet to the east before continuing south to West Airline Highway. WARP Drive will extend from the intersection of Leversee Road and East Lone Tree Road about 1,000 feet to the east. The manhole and lift station structures will consist of pre-cast and/or cast- Proposed Structures in-place concrete and extend about 7 to 24 feet below existing grades. Maximum cuts and fills of about 3 feet are anticipated for the sewer, lift Grading station, and roadway areas. GEOTECHNICAL CHARACTERIZATION Subsurface Profile Conditions encountered in each boring are indicated on the individual boring logs in the attached E =orati 4 Res,_-t . Stratification boundaries on the boring logs represent the approximate location of changes in soil types; in situ, the transition between soil types may be gradual or abrupt horizontally and vertically. The following depths are in reference to the grades existing at the time _ the borings were performed. Based on the results of the borings, subsurface conditions can be summarized as follows. Approximate Depth to Consistency I Stratum Material Description Bottom of Stratum(feet) i Relative Density Surface 0.3 to 3.5 Topsoil N/A 2 to 10 Sandy Lean Clay, Silt, Lean Clay, Medium Stiff to 1 and SiltyClay,trace sand andgravel Stiff (Borings 5, 7, and 9 to 13) 9 to 18 Silty Sand, Clayey Sand, and Sand, 2 with varying amounts of silt and ; Generally Loose (Bottom of Borings 12 to 15) gravel 20.5 to 40 Silty Sand and Sand with varying Generally 3 (Bottom of Borings 1 to 11) amounts of silt and gravel Medium Dense Re SIB`_ •. Resour of ' Rena!'; Geotechnical Engineering Report Iowalierracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements Waterloo, February 13, 2020 - Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport Groundwater Conditions — The boreholes were observed during and after drilling and sampling for the presence and level of groundwater. The following groundwater depths are in reference to the grades existing at the time of the exploration. Water level observations in the boreholes can be found on the boring logs in the attached Exploration Results and are summarized in the following table. Approximate Approximate Approximate Depth Groundwater Approximate Groundwater Boring to Groundwater Elevation while Depth to Elevation after Number Groundwater after while Drilling (feet) Drilling Drilling — (feet) Drilling (feet) (feet) 1 15.5 850.5 None Observed -- 2 12.5 i 851.5 13 851 3 14 851.5 14 851.5 4 14.5 852 14.5 852 5 19 850.5 19 850.5 6 16 854 16.5 853.5 7 10.5 858 8.5 860 1 8 None Observed --- None Observed' --- 9 None Observed' 1 --- None Observed --- 10 None Observed' --- 8 862 11 19 851.5 None Observed --- 1 12 None Observed --- None Observed --- i 13 None Observed --- None Observed --- 14 None Observed --- None Observed --- 15 15.5 j 856 15.5 856 - . Groundwater was not observed prior to mud rotary. The preceding groundwater depths provide an approximate indication of the groundwater conditions at the time the borings were performed. Groundwater level observations made within granular soils are usually a reliable indication of the current groundwater conditions. Long term observations in piezometers or observation wells, sealed from the influence of surface water, would _ be required to provide a better evaluation of the site groundwater conditions. Groundwater level fluctuations occur due to seasonal variations in the amount of rainfall, runoff, — and other factors not evident at the time the borings were performed. Perched (trapped) water can also develop within more `permeable' soils/materials overlying and/or within lower `permeability' soil. Therefore, groundwater levels during construction or at other ti nes during the Re- € sive■ Resourceful • Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements - Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 • Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport. lives of the structures and pavements may be higher or lower than the levels indicated on the boring logs. The possibility of perched groundwater and groundwater level fluctuations should be considered when developing the design and construction plans for the project. GEOTECHNICAL OVERVIEW Loose sand was generally encountered to depths of about 9 to 18 feet below existing grades and was underlain by medium dense sand to the bottom of the borings. Based on the anticipated bearing depths of the lift station and manhole structures and the estimated contact pressures, some of the on-site soils appear suitable for support of the structures. Overexcavation and replacement with a thicker granular bedding layer may be necessary in the areas of Borings 4, 6, and 7 where very loose to loose sand was encountered at the manhole and shallower lift station structure bearing elevations. Some subgrade improvement could also be required for WARP drive prior to placing fill below pavements. Groundwater was generally observed at depths of about 8 to 19 feet below existing grades. A groundwater control system should be planned to facilitate construction 'in the dry' for the lift station structures and the sanitary sewer. The dewatering system designer, as well as the earth retention system designer, should be aware of the depths of excavations required to reach the planned excavation depths and suitable bearing soils and to provide a layer of crushed stone fill immediately below foundations. The Earthwork section provides geotechnical recommendations for site preparation, subgrade evaluation, fill material types and compaction, and groundwater control and other general construction considerations. The a I - da£ - section provides recommendations for the design and construction of foundations. The _.katere Ea aa Eressurersection provides values for use in design of below-grade walls and groundwater design considerations. The P -- section provides typical minimum thickness recommendations and general design and construction considerations. The keeF, rare section provides comments regarding the limitations of this report. EARTHWORK Stripping Topsoil, vegetation, and any otherwise unsuitable materials should be removed from the construction area. Based on the conditions encountered in Borings 1 through 11, about 0.3 to 3.5 feet of topsoil is anticipated at the site surface in the area of the sanitary sewers. Based on the conditions encountered in Borings 12 through 15, about 1 to 1.5 feet of topsoil is anticipated at the site surface in the area of WARP Drive. Organic materials should not be used for fill below Responsive Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements •Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport structures and pavements, or as excavation backfill unless noted/approved by the civil/structural engineer. Excavation Considerations Groundwater was generally observed in granular soils at depths of about 8 to 19 feet below existing grades. As mentioned previously, the groundwater levels during construct on could differ from those encountered in the borings and the contractor should be prepared for this condition. Considering the subsurface conditions and the construction planned, a temporary dewatering system, consisting of a series of wells, is expected to be required to facilitate construction of the lift station structures and the sanitary sewer improvements north of the lift station, and in the vicinities of Borings 1 through 3 at the southeastern end of the sanitary sewer planned. Design of a temporary dewatering system and temporary earth retentions system(s) is beyond the scope of this report. These system designs are typically provided by the contractor(s) involved in the construction. It is important to note that a `quick' condition will result if excavation is made near or below the groundwater level in sand and silt that has not been properly dewatered prior to excavation. It should be noted that, if proper dewatering procedures are not performed during construction, the density and/or support capability of any previously compacted fill and suitable soils could be affected and subsequently contribute to higher than anticipated settlement. Groundwater levels should be maintained at least 2 to 3 feet below the lowest anticipated excavation level in sand and silt soils, respectively. Where groundwater seepage occurs, flatter slopes than those required by OHSA could be required to maintain the stability of the excavation. Materials should not be stockpiled/stored immediately adjacent to an excavation so undue loads are not imparted to the earth retention system. The individual contractor(s) is responsible for designing and constructing stable, temporary excavations as required to maintain stability of the excavation sides and bottom. As a minimum, excavations should be performed in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P, "Excavations" and its appendices, and in accordance with any applicable local, and/or state regulations. — Subgrade Evaluation and Improvement Prior to the placement of fill, foundations, and pavements, subgrades should be evaluated by — Terracon personnel. Any low density or disturbed material, soft to medium stiff soil partly organic materials, or otherwise unsuitable materials, should be removed prior to furthe' construction. Subgrade evaluations should include the following, where applicable: Observation and visual classifications of subgrade and granular base materials Responsive ■ R - r eful Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 -- Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport • Probing and sampling for laboratory testing including: • water content • organic content • plastic and liquid (a.k.a. Atterberg) limits laboratory compaction characteristics of soils (a.k.a. `proctors') • In-place moisture and density testing • Strength and/or cone penetration testing • Observing proofrolls Prior to fill and pavement placements, consideration should be given to scarifying, moisture conditioning, and compacting the exposed subgrade to the density and moisture content ranges recommended in this report. This method of subgrade preparation should be considered in pavement areas where generally stable soils/materials are present, but the density, moisture condition, and uniformity of the material would be improved. The success of scarifying, moisture conditioning, and compacting exposed subgrades would depend primarily upon favorable weather and sufficient time to scarify and moisture condition materials. Even with adequate time and favorable weather, stable subgrades may not be achieved if the thickness of the unstable material is greater than about 1 foot. Alternatively, unstable, low density, or unsuitable materials could be removed and replaced with granular fill (with or without geosynthetics). The appropriate method of subgrade improvement would be dependent on factors such as schedule, weather, the size of area to be improved, and the nature of the instability. A Terracon representative should observe subgrade preparation and could assist in developing appropriate subgrade improvement procedures based on the conditions encountered during construction. Performing grading during warm seasons and dry periods would help reduce the amount of subgrade improvement required. The sand soils exposed during construction of the sewer and manholes will be susceptible to disturbance from construction activity, particularly if groundwater is encountered in the excavations. Moist, sand soils at the base of excavations should be compacted with equipment such as a vibratory plate compactor to improve the bearing conditions. Groundwater should be controlled at a level of about 2 feet below the bearing surfaces prior to the compaction of the sand soils. A 1/2 to 1-foot thick granular working layer may be needed to reduce the potential for disturbance of sand soils during construction and to improve the support conditions for the sewers. Where practical in pavement areas, clay subgrades should also be proofrolled with a loaded, tandem-axle dump truck and granular subgrades proofrolled with a heavy, smooth drum roller. These processes will help to delineate low density or disturbed areas prior to the placement of fill and pavements. If unsuitable areas are observed, subgrade improvement will be necessary. -- On most project sites, grading is accomplished relatively early in the construction phase, and fill is placed and compacted in a uniform manner. However, as construction proceeds, excavations -- ".se= ve Fesciicet - - 6 Geotechnical Engineering Report Ilerracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements • Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 • Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport are made, rainfall and surface water saturates some areas, construction traffic disturbs subgrades, and surface irregularities are filled in with loose materials to tempcirarily improve trafficability. As a result, pavement subgrades and granular bases for pavements prepared early in the project should be carefully evaluated as the time for pavement construction approaches. Fill Material Types The use of granular material would provide for greater ease of placement and compaction and help facilitate the removal of any groundwater in the excavation areas. The use of granular fill in limited and deeper fill areas would also help reduce the amount of post-construction settlement. Fill below foundations, wall backfill, and pavements should meet the following material property requirements: Fill Type USCS Classification ' Acceptable Locations for Placement Imported, Low Plasticity, CL, CL/SC  Excavation backfill Fine-Grained (LL<_45 and PI <_23) - Below granular base for pavements ■ Below the lift station foundation(s) GW, GP, SP a Excavation backfill Imported E Below pavements Coarse-Grained/Granular 2 - Excavation backfill SP-SC, SP-SM E Below the granular base for pavements Excavation backfill, if apr roved by the On-Site, Low Plasticity SP, SP-SM, SM, SC, designer(s) Soils CL, ML 3 Below the granular base for pavements Fill should consist of approved materials that are free of organic matter and debris. Frozen material should not be used, and fill should not be placed on a frozen subgrade. Material with organic contents greater than 5 percent should not be used for fill below foundations and pavements. By our definition, low plasticity material would have a liquid limit (LL)of 45 or less, and a plasticity index(PI) of 23 or less. Each proposed fill material type should be sampled and evaluated by the geotechnical engineer prior to its delivery and/or use. Relatively clean, granular material is recommended immediately below pavements. Material with more than 6 percent fines should not be placed within 4 feet of final grades below exterior slabs-on- ground where the reduction of movements from freezing and thawing is desired. Based on the results of the borings and laboratory testing, it appears that the on-site soils/materials could be reused. Some moisture conditioning (i.e. drying) should also be expected to achieve compaction requirements if on-site soils/materials are used for fill. It should be noted that clayey and silty soils (CL, ML, SC, and SM) can be difficult to compact during cool or cold weather, in relatively small areas, and over lower strength/density and marginally stable subgrades. ve Resourceful Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Ilerracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements 3 Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 s Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport Fill Placement and Compaction Requirements Fill should be placed and compacted in accordance with the following requirements: Item Description 9 inches in loose thickness when heavy, self-propelled compaction equipment is used Maximum Fill Lift Thickness ! ▪ 4 inches in loose thickness when hand-guided equipment (i.e.jumping jack or plate compactor) is used • 98 percent • Below structure foundations Minimum Compaction  >- 15 feet below final grades adjacent to walls and in Requirements below Structures= utility trenches 95 percent • < 15 feet below final grades adjacent to walls and in �. utility trenches 98 percent Minimum Compaction Granular material below pavements Requirements below Pavements ''2E 95 percent • Fine-grained material below pavements Water Content Range s Low plasticity fine-grained: -2 to +3 percent from Optimum  Coarse-grained/Granular: -3 to +3 percent - As determined by the `standard Proctor' test (ASTM D 698). We recommend that each lift of fill be --- tested for water content and compaction prior to the placement of each lift of fill. Should the results indicate that the specified water content or compaction have not been met,the area represented by the test should be reworked and retested until the specifications are met. If the granular material is a coarse sand or gravel, or of a uniform size, or has a low fines content, compaction comparison to relative density may be more appropriate. In this case,granular materials should be compacted to at least 70 percent relative density (ASTM D 4253 and D 4254). Actual compaction requirements for coarse, uniform, or low fines content granular material should be based on laboratory test results. Specifically, water contents of granular material should be maintained low enough to allow for satisfactory compaction to be achieved without the granular fill bulking during placement and pumping when proofrolled. Earthwork Considerations We anticipate that bearing subgrades for structures and pavements will consist of granular soil with varying amounts of fines. Fine-grained soils (i.e., clay and silt) are also anticipated in pavement areas and in utility excavations. These soil types should be considered as frost- susceptible and are susceptible to disturbance from construction equipment; particularly if the r R r e u _ _a:lip Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements a Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 • Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 eoReport soils are wetted and/or subjected to construction traffic. Should unstable subgrade conditions develop, subgrade improvement will be required. If a significant period of time elapses between subgrade preparation and subsequent construction, the subgrade should be reworked and retested prior to placement of the foundation and additional fill. Upon completion of fill placement, care should be taken to maintain the subgrade water content. Disturbance of the completed foundation subgrade should be avoided to the extent practical. If the subgrade should become frozen, desiccated, saturated, or disturbed, the affected material should be removed or the material should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and recompacted prior to further construction. SPREAD FOOTING FOUNDATIONS Based upon the subsurface conditions encountered in the borings and the propose I construction, it is our opinion that the lift station structures can be supported on spread footing foundations. The foundations at the base of the structures should bear on a layer of crushed stone placed over medium dense, granular soil. Where very loose to loose, granular soil is encountered at the bearing elevation of the lift station structures, the very loose to loose sand should be overexcavated and replaced with properly compacted granular fill. Overexcavation which results from the removal of unsuitable bearing material should be backfilled as recommended in the Earthwork section. Foundation Design Recommendations Item Value Maximum Net Allowable Bearing Pressure 1 4,000 psf Minimum Embedment Depths Below Finished Grade Footings in unheated areas: 60 inches Estimated Total Settlement 1 inch or less Estimated Differential Settlement j About 1/2 to 2/3 of the estimated total settlement The net allowable bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum surrounding '- overburden pressure at the footing base elevation. • Finished grade is defined as the lowest adjacent grade within five feet of the foundations. Differential settlement on the order of 1/2 of the total settlement typically occurs across rigid mats and differential settlement on the order of 2/3 of the total can occur across more flexible or semi-rigid mats. Responsive eso rceful w Reiia ie Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport Uplift resistance of shallow foundations can be developed from the effective weight of the footing and the overlying backfill. The effective weight of the soil prism defined by diagonal planes *. extending up from the top of the perimeter of the foundation to the ground surface at an angle of 20 degrees from the vertical can be included in uplift resistance. The maximum allowable uplift capacity should be taken as a sum of the effective weight of soil and the foundation, divided by an appropriate factor of safety. A maximum total unit weight of 115 pcf should be used for the backfill. This unit weight should be reduced to 53 pcf for portions of the backfill below the design groundwater elevation. Foundation Construction Considerations As noted in the Enrthwork section, the bearing level/base of excavations should be evaluated by Terracon personnel. The base of all foundation excavations should be free of water and loose/disturbed material, prior to placing concrete. Concrete should be placed soon after excavating to reduce bearing soil disturbance. Excessively wet or dry material or any loose/disturbed material in the bottom of the excavation(s) should be removed/reconditioned before foundation concrete is placed. Where unsuitable bearing soil is encountered at the base of a foundation excavation, the excavation should be extended deeper to suitable soil, and the foundation could bear directly on lean concrete backfill placed in the excavation. Alternatively, the footing could bear on compacted granular fill extending down to suitable soil. Prior to the placement of fill below structures and concrete, granular material at the base of the excavation should be compacted in place. Compaction should not be attempted if groundwater is within 2 feet of the excavation bottom. If groundwater is encountered at the time of foundation construction, it should be lowered and controlled to a minimum depth of 2 feet below the excavation elevation. Overexcavation for backfill placement below foundations should extend laterally beyond all edges of the footings at least 8 inches per foot of overexcavation depth below the `Design Footing Level'. The overexcavation should then be backfilled up to the `Design Footing Level' with properly compacted fill as recommended in the _3rthwork section. Lateral widening may not be required for overexcavations backfilled with lean concrete. The overexcavation and backfill procedures are shown in the following figures. s- n lye = -- ourceful • Reliable �. Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020  Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport ' i. •• - - 23D W V3D - DESIGN DESIGN FOOTING LEVEL FOOTING LEVEL `----- mwm STRUCTURAL D LEAN FILL CONCRETE _ -- RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED - ---- --- --- EXCAVATION LEVEL EXCAVATION LEVEL LEAN CONCRETE BACKFILL OVER-EXCAVATION/BACKFILL ZONE I NOTE:EXCAVATIONS ARE SHOWN VERTICAL HOWEVER,THE NOTE: ONS ARE SNOT^JN VERTICAL.HOWEVER,THE SIDE�NALLS SHOULD BE SLOPED AS NECESSARY FOR SAFETY SiDEVVALLS SHOULD 6E SLOPED AS NECESSARY FOR SA=ETY SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS The seismic design requirements for buildings and other structures are based on Seismic Design Category. Site Classification is required to determine the Seismic Design Category for a structure. The Site Classification is based on the upper 100 feet of the site profile defined by a weighted average value of either shear wave velocity, standard penetration resistance, or undrained shear strength in accordance with Section 20.4 of ASCE 7 and the International Building Code (IBC). Based on the soil properties encountered at the site and as described on the exploration logs and results, it is our professional opinion that the Seismic Site Classification is D. Subsurface exploration at this site was extended to a maximum depth of 40 feet. The site properties below the boring depth to 100 feet were estimated based on our experience and knowledge of geologic conditions of the general area.Additional deeper borings or geophysical testing may be performed to confirm the conditions below the current boring depth. LATERAL EARTH PRESSURES Design Parameters Reinforced concrete, below-grade walls of the lift station structures subjected to unbalanced earth pressures should be designed for at-rest earth pressures at least equal to those indicated following table. Earth pressures will be influenced by structural design of the walls, conditions of wall restraint, methods of construction and/or compaction and the strength of the materials being restrained. The at-rest condition should be used where no wall movement is permitted. The surcharge components apply where drives, surface parking, or other loading will be applied adjacent to the below grade walls. The recommended design lateral earth pressures do not include a factor of safety or surcharge loadings. Responsive es r eful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report ilerraconIowa Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements •Waterloo, Ot"f` February 13, 2020 = Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 Gea�4e p S = Surcharge S' For at-rest pressure - No Movement Assumed Horizontal '} Finished 'Grade i e s - Horizontal Finished Grade 9 I = 3 �I--p2 /11 pi-+i Retaining Wall At-Rest Earth Pressure Coefficients - Above groundwater level Earth Equivalent Surcharge Earth Coefficient for Fluid Pressure Pressure Pressure Pressure Condition Backfill Type P, P2 (Pct.) (Pcf) (psf) Relatively Clean, Crushed stone—0.44 55 (0.44)S (55)H At-Rest Clayey Sand/ Sandy Lean Clay—0.56 70 (0.56)S (70)H (KO) Lean Clay- 0.63 80 (0.63)S (80)H At-Rest Earth Pressure Coefficients - Below groundwater level Equivalent Surcharge Earth Earth Coefficient for Fluid Pressure Pressure Pressure Pressure P, P2 ConditionBackfill Type (Pcfl (pcf) (psf), Relatively clean, Crushed Stone—0.44 90 (0.44)S j (90)H At-Rest Clayey Sand/Sandy Lean Clay—0.56 95 (0.56)S (95)H (KO) Lean Clay- 0.63 I 100 (0.63)S I (100)H Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements • Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport Passive Earth Pressure Coefficients Equivalent Surcharge Earth Earth Coefficient for Fluid Pressure Pressure Pressure Pressure p, P2 Condition Backfill Type (pcf) (pcf) (psf) Relatively clean, Crushed Stone—3.54 440 --- --- Passive I Clayey Sand/Sandy Lean Clay—2.56 320 --- --- (Kr) Lean Clay—2.20 275 --- --- Conditions applicable to the preceding values include: • For passive earth pressure, wall must move horizontally to mobilize resists ice • Uniform surcharge, where S is surcharge pressure • • In-situ, backfill weight a maximum of about 125 pcf Horizontal backfill, compacted to at least 95 percent of the ASTM D 698 maximum dry density value No loading from heavy compaction equipment included • No hydrostatic pressure acting on wall above the groundwater level a  No safety factor included Ignore passive pressure in frost zone Backfill placed against below-grade structures should consist of granular material or low plasticity, fine-grained material. Use of fine-grained material for wall backfill should be approved by the designer. For the granular values to be valid, the granular backfill must extend out and up from the base of the wall at an angle of at least 45 and 60 degrees from vertical for the at-rest and passive cases, respectively. To calculate the resistance to sliding, a value of 0.35 can be used as the ultimate coefficient of friction between a concrete footing/foundation and loc se to medium dense sand. An ultimate coefficient of friction value of 0.45 may be used if at east 2 feet of crushed stone is provided immediately below the concrete foundation. Construction equipment should not operate within a distance closer than the exposed height of the walls/structures to prevent lateral pressures greater than those provided. PAVEMENTS Pavement Design Considerations On most project sites, site grading is accomplished relatively early in the construction phase, and fill is placed and compacted in a uniform manner. However, as construction proceeds, excavations are made into these areas, rainfall and surface water saturates some areas, _ - $wive Resourcetui ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements • Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport construction traffic and other vehicles disturb the subgrade, and many surface irregularities are filled in with loose material to improve trafficability temporarily. As a result, pavement subgrades prepared early in the project should be carefully evaluated as the time for pavement construction approaches. We recommend the water content and density of the upper 6 to 9 inches of the subgrade be evaluated and pavement subgrades be proofrolled within two days prior to commencement of actual paving operations. Areas not in compliance with the required ranges of water content or density should be moisture conditioned and recompacted. Particular attention should be paid to high traffic areas that were rutted and disturbed earlier and to areas where backfilled trenches are �- located. Areas where unsuitable conditions are located should be repaired by removing and replacing the material with compacted fill. After proofrolling and repairing deep subgrade deficiencies, the entire subgrade should be scarified and developed as recommended in the - . --- s- section, to provide a relatively uniform subgrade for pavement construction. Areas that appear severely desiccated following site stripping may require further undercutting and moisture conditioning. If a significant precipitation event occurs after the evaluation or if the surface becomes disturbed, the subgrade should be reviewed by qualified personnel immediately prior to paving. The subgrade should be in its finished form at the time of the final review. Pavement Subgrade Parameters A CBR value of 2.5 to 3 percent was considered for our pavement thickness recommendations. Provided the recommendations in this report are implemented in the design and construction of pavements, it is our opinion that a modulus of subgrade reaction (k) of 100 pci be considered in the pavement design. Typical Minimum Pavement Section Thicknesses Pavement thickness can be determined using American Concrete Institute, National Ready Mixed Concrete Association, AASHTO, and/or other methods or guidelines. Traffic loading conditions were not provided. Therefore, for our pavement analyses, we considered a traffic count of 35 to 100 semi-tractors and trailers per day. 18-kip equivalent single axle loads (18-kip ESALs) for pavements are expected to be less than 1,000,000 and 3,000,000, respectively, over a period of 20-years. The recommended pavement thickness are minimums, and periodic maintenance should therefore be expected. Responsive• Reeo rce ui Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements -= Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 • Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport Minimum Recommended Pavement Section (inches) Semi-Tractors and Trailers per Day PCC over Aggregate Base 35 7.5 over 6 100 9 over 6 The subgrade and pavement should be sloped to promote drainage and the subgra:le prepared in accordance with the Earthwork: section. Pavement materials, design, and construction should conform to the Iowa Department of Transportation (IDOT) Standard Specifications. 17 Pavement thickness are for plain PCC with dowels. PCC pavement should F ave a 28-day compressive strength of at least 4,000 psi and a modulus of rupture of 580 psi. P.�C pavements require properly designed and constructed longitudinal joints (parallel to traffic) -ind transverse joints (perpendicular to traffic)to provide satisfactory performance. Pavement Drainage and Granular Base Pavements should be sloped to provide rapid drainage of surface water. Water allowed to pond on or adjacent to pavements could saturate the subgrade and contribute to premature pavement deterioration. In addition, the pavement subgrade should be graded to provide positive drainage within the granular (sub)base section. At a minimum, appropriate sub-drainage or connection to a suitable outlet should be provided to remove water from the granular (sub)base in areas of anticipated frequent wetting. A permeable granular base should consist of a minimum of 4 inches of free-draining, granular material meeting IDOT Specifications Section No. 4121 (Gradation No. 12a or 12b) or Section No. 4123 (Gradation No. 14). Subdrains should be spaced no more than 40 feet on-center, be extended a minimum of 3.5 feet below pavement subgrades, and should be backfilled with free- draining, granular material meeting IDOT Specification Section No. 4131, Gradation No. 29. A perforated drain line should be placed near the base of the trench excavation and surrounded with at least 6 inches of the drainage material graded to minimize the intrusion of fines (i.e., IDOT Gradation No. 29)or an alternative free-draining granular material encapsulated with suitable filter fabric. The drains should be hydraulically connected with the permeable base and sloped to provide positive gravity drainage to a reliable discharge point. Although not recommended, if subdrains are not provided, the granular base material should consist of a dense-graded crushed stone meeting or similar to IDOT Section No. 4120.04 (Gradation No. 11) or Section No. 4123 (Gradation No. 14). Pavement Maintenance The pavement sections provided in this report represent minimum thicknesses and periodic maintenance should be expected. Therefore, preventive maintenance should b planned and _-__ -- • Resourceful a Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon _ Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 • Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport provided for through an on-going pavement management program. Preventive maintenance activities are intended to slow the rate of pavement deterioration, and to preserve the pavement investment. Preventive maintenance consists of both localized maintenance (e.g. crack and joint sealing and patching) and global maintenance (e.g. surface sealing). Preventive maintenance is usually a priority when implementing a pavement maintenance program. Additional engineering observation is recommended to determine the type and extent of a cost effective program. Even with periodic maintenance, some movements and related cracking will occur and repairs will be required. FROST ONSI RATIONS The soils on this site are frost susceptible, and small amounts of water can affect the performance of the slabs on-grade. Exterior slabs should be anticipated to heave during winter months. If frost action needs to be eliminated in critical areas, we recommend the use of coarse-grained/granular fill with 6 percent or less fines. Placement of granular material with low frost susceptibility in large . areas may not be feasible; however, the following recommendations are provided to help reduce the amount of frost heave: Providing surface drainage away from the slabs and toward the site storm drainage system Installing drain tiles below exterior slabs and connect them to the site drainage system Grading clayey subgrades beneath a more permeable granular base, toward the site drainage system Placing less frost susceptible granular fill beneath slabs that are critical to the project Placing a 3 horizontal to 1 vertical (3H: 1V) transition zone between less frost susceptible granular material and other soils As an alternative to extending the granular fill to the full frost depth, consideration can be made to placing extruded polystyrene or cellular concrete under a buffer of at least 2 feet of granular fill maintained in a drained condition. GENERAL COMMENTS Our analysis and opinions are based upon our understanding of the project, the geotechnical conditions in the area, and the data obtained from our site exploration. Natural variations will occur between exploration point locations or due to the modifying effects of construction or weather. The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until during or after construction. Terracon should be retained as the Geotechnical Engineer, where noted in this report, to provide observation and testing services during pertinent construction phases. If variations appear, we can provide further evaluation and supplemental recommendations. If variations are noted in the purls-VC Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements • Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport absence of our observation and testing services on-site, we should be immedia:ely notified so that we can provide evaluation and supplemental recommendations. Our Scope of Services does not include either specifically or by implication any er vironmental or biological (e.g., mold, fungi, bacteria) assessment of the site or identification of prevention of pollutants, hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about tf e potential for such contamination or pollution, other studies should be undertaken. Our services and any correspondence or collaboration through this system are intended for the sole benefit and exclusive use of our client for specific application to the project discussed and are accomplished in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices with no third-party beneficiaries intended. Any third-party access to services or correspondence is solely for information purposes to support the services provided by Terracon to our client. Reliance upon the services and any work product is limited to our client, and is not intended for third parties. Any use or reliance of the provided information by third parties is done solely at their own risk. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. Site characteristics as provided are for design purposes and not to estimate excavation cost. Any use of our report in that regard is done at the sole risk of the excavating cost estimator as there may be variations on the site that are not apparent in the data that could significantly impact excavation cost. Any parties charged with estimating excavation costs should seek their own site characterization for specific purposes to obtain the specific level of detail necessary for costing. Site safety, and cost estimating including, excavation support, and dewatering requirements/design are the responsibility of others. If changes in the nature, design, or location of the project are planned, our conclusions and recommendations shall not be considered valid �- unless we review the changes and either verify or modify our conclusions in writing. Responsive Resourceful si Reliable E Geotechnical Engineering Report 1rericon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements a Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 a Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport ......_....._.__-. Mom I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. � . son Patrick Heinz, P.E. date ... My license renewal date is December 31,2020. Immo immlm IMmor Responsive a Resourceful Reliable 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements • Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 -- Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES Field Exploration Number of Borings Boring Depth (feet) Planned Location 10 15.5 to 35.5 Manhole Locations 1 40 Lift Station 4 15.5 WARP Drive Boring Layout and Elevations: Terracon worked in cooperation with Clapsaddle-Garber Associates (CGA) personnel to determine the boring locations. CGA personnel staked the borings in the field and provided surface elevations at the boring locations. Boring 12 was offset to about STA 6+00 for access. The elevation at Boring 12 was estimated from the Overall Grading Plan provided by CGA. Latitudes and longitudes were obtained with a handheld GPS unit with a minimum horizontal accuracy of about 20 feet. The locations and elevations of the borings should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the means and methods used to define them. Subsurface Exploration Procedures: We advanced the borings with track-moulted rotary drill rigs using continuous flight solid and hollow-stem augers and mud rotary techniques Sampling was performed at intervals of 2.5 feet in the upper 10 to 15 feet and at intervals of 5 feft thereafter. In the split-barrel sampling procedure, a standard 2-inch outer diameter split-barrel sampling spoon was driven into the ground by a 140-pound automatic hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. The number of blows required to advance the sampling spoon the last 12 inches of a formal 18-inch penetration is recorded as the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) resistance value. The SPT resistance values, also referred to as N-values, are indicated on the boring logs at the test depths. We observed and recorded groundwater levels during drilling and sampling. For safety purposes, all borings were backfilled with auger cuttings after their completion. Our exploration team prepared field boring logs as part of the drilling operations. These field logs included visual classifications of the materials encountered during drilling and the exploration team's interpretation of the subsurface conditions between samples. The sampling interval depths, penetration resistances, recoveries, and other sampling information are recorded on the field boring logs. The samples were containerized and transported to our laboratory for further testing and classification. Laboratory Testing The project engineer reviewed the field data and assigned various laboratory tests aid in soil classifications and our engineering evaluations for this project. Laboratory testing for this project included determination of water content of soil by mass, organic content of soil, and sieve analysis Responsive a Resourceful • Reliable EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES' of 5 Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 LI Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport tests. Based on the material's texture and plasticity, we described and classified the soil samples in general accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). The final boring logs represent the geotechnical engineer's interpretation of the field logs and include modifications based on laboratory observation and testing of the samples. Responsive E ResourceRS seR7s:,-esees: EXPLORATiaN AND TESTING PROCEDURES 2 0f a -- SITE LOCATION AND EXPLORATION PLANS Contents: Site Location Plan Exploration Plan R espons -e _ Resourceful I§ Reliable SITE LOCATION _lierracon — Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements a Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 a Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport. , i „,_:-li-='''-_=;:--'--;- „,n „..---__=__,_ _ ____-.,--i. a - :- - - s -N -_„.___- _-_—___-„ ,__=_ ..... - -w1_,_- _,-,_---- -ri4,-- ___ ______ ___ _______=_,: ______ _ _ ___,_____;„,_,_ __ ,_, _ __,__.;, ______ __ _,,__ __„_ ___,_ , 7,„_,___„___,„_,__„_,„___,_ _ __=„_, _ _ , ______ __ --_ _I- _ ____ ______ __-_-___-,__7,;._s _ __ _ - , ____ ___,__ _ ___ - 1=_ :17-- - - _ ____ -- ; _ ____—':---_.'-c_-:_------._:_--_Ali -'ID t_ „ir --:',_ 57-EM_Fs_l';--- 7—___t=_ , -----___, — _ _r___t_, ------ — = - _  _ - = .- — — _ _ - _ — N = - = - _= 1 - :: 1 r_ _ 41--:„ _ ,_-:7:7_7 _ -,,_2:::;_i , States,_, _ ___,_. _____ ____„__, „ ___„,_,„____,_„:„ _. — ' _ -1_ _ _ _ _ 401‘;;;;T T - =_, :___ ___ „i -A7 r - ,,_" . --—w— -;----w- -k__,7 _ 1 - _ _ 'DIAGRAM IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY,AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES MAP PROVIDED BY MICROSOFT BING MAPS EXPLORATION PLAN lrerracon Waterloo Air& Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements a Waterloo, Iowa February 13, 2020 m Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 GeoReport n — Immr =r '- -. ---____,7:z.tl= _it _ -_ „7-,,_!= :-:. --17:71' _=_,, : _=±,__Z?:_ _ - s,',- =-- 1 r:,_-* - - __ -__ - , --,__ --- 3 Y --1--=- :-,--i 2 '_-_,4-_--7 -1- =-'_ ----- -- - --r-' _: -- iniNarrillill - = - 'DIAGRAM IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY,AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES MAP PROVIDED BY MICROSOFT BING MAPS EXPLORATION RESULTS Contents: Boring Logs (Borings 1 to 15) Grain Size Distribution (8 pages) BORING LOG NO. 1 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA O LOCATION See Exploration Plan W z w o a J Lit WO H } }-Lu 1- 0w Qv UH - U Latitude:42.5432°Longitude:-92.4105° _i Q CC I——II—Q w Z z z Q a w� a > o� Oa Q� 0.g I cc Surface Elev.:866.1(Ft.) o Q m LU Q 0 L CO O O Ov 0 ) cc _i v t DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O — 4.t\21 . SILTY SAND(SM),trace organics,fine to medium grained,dark brown, i,'..,1.,;• (possible fill) — — X 17 -,,.`i.,, N=3 — •' •3.5 862.5 1 a i..,:'-:' SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to medium grained,brown,loose • 14 3-4-5 4 N® ::: 5— N=9 :" X12 1-2-2 6 — a '• N=4 --- • ..'•9.0 857 o > SAND(SP-SM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,brown,loose 3-5-7 o • to medium dense �0- X 15 N=12 6 0 • cc e — w.e ~r•° 10 3-3-4 7 a N=7 o — X d ♦ c xs . — Q • - 4-6-8 o •, 15— 0 X 18 N=14 11 o.. J g eCC i• w=e• H P a Q •e a — �s a O P41.4 e • e O ° O • M °•' 19.0 847 _ - °e• SAND(SP-SM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,gray brown, 0-4-6 — w :°< medium dense 20— X 18 N=10 18 Vie. o •. z •, O — e ...I._ •a ♦ ' e r. CC e Q • — e u) e•q e] Ore°e' 0 — 17 5-5-6 17 1 °e' 25.5 840.5 25— N=11 Boring Terminated at 25.5 Feet I z i 21 - o I£ I w I o- w Q. Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic - cc' d w_ Advancement Method. See Exploration and Testing Procedures fora Notes: "' Solid stem auger description of field and laboratory procedures o= - Q. used and additional data(If any). --. See Supporting information for explanation of zAbandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. 1 z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips I O upon completion. Elevation provided by Client — WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS o, Boring Started:01-23-2020 Boring Completed:01-23-2020 zm 0 15.5'observed while sampling El erracori O Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE I 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 - Dry cave-in at 14.5'after drilling Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 I BORING LOG NO. 2 1 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates I Improvements Cedar Falls, IA SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA ! 0 LOCATION See Exploration Man _i CO w c r e OJ >0 )- cjcn cc '- 0 • 0 Latitude:42.5439°Longitude:-92.4119° _ to Q w C4 1-J 0° w z Q w a a wIX 0_ CD Oa ¢z IYz <coSurface Elev.:863.9(Ft.) o ¢ LT_ Q 0 0 0 ... DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) .\i'y <-1.o TOPSOIL 863 - SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to medium grained,brown,loose 1 - X :::; - - 14 6X13 5 I _.. •.. 17 4 N=4 18 2-2-2 4 o .1 0_ N=4 ...... w • 11.5 852.5 - - ,1 SAND(SP-SM),with silt layers,fine to medium grained,brown and gray, ___ _)( 18 1-2 1 29 a loose N=3 ozs I- 849.5 0-1-2 Q - 14.5 SAND(SP-SM),with silt,fine to medium grained,brown gray,loose 15 13 N_3 24 ' - 0 w r•.': Q o I I o 18.0 846 - l_°°°' SAND(SP-SM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,brown,loose I-°.°I' 2-3-4 w 18 °°<1 20.5 843.5 20— 18 N=7 i °z r Boring Terminated at 20.5 Feet 0 a 23 col 0 0' a- ws col QIi MINI 1 0 0 cot 0 Lu Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic co at w Advancement Method: Testing Notes: See .-ration a- r Procedures-=fora Solid stem auger description of field and laboratory procedures i used and additional data(If any). See--upp ,- *or --v for explanation of 0 i Abandonment Method: symbols and ab-breviations. zw Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips I s -1 upon completion. Elevation provided by Client e o I WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS oz `? 12.5'observed while sampling Boring Started:01-23-2020 Boring Completed:01-23-2020 1 o i lierracon Drill Rig:#546 Driller WE co t cn= 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 Wet cave-in at 13'after drillin Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 ( BORING LOG NO. 3 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates i Improvements Cedar Falls, IA ..... SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road = Waterloo, IA . o LOCATION See Exploration Plan w z El } -- \ 1 — U Latitude:42.544°Longitude:-92.4148° V 'Q ~ fiii 1— cc O1—Q w Z Z z a �> > o� rea Qw 0� o_ wIx a _1w O ~ �z ccc Surface Elev.:865.4(Ft.) o <m Q ill Q p O O DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O � ct U -- t L `' TOPSOIL i-e•--�' 1.5 864 •• .' SILTY SAND ISM),fine to medium grained,brown,loose — 13 1-2-1 N=3 9 o . 4.0 861.5 _ N :: SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to medium grained,brown and light 3-2-3 a brown, loose 5— 18 N=5 6 — �$ — ; -• — 17 2-3-3 8 N=6 — Z, . :.• 14 2-2-2 7 o.•.:-:::: ' 10— N=4 ai _ . :. — 18 1-2-2 6 a . N=4 0 ••., •;:14.0 851.5 -- 'X DPe. SAND(SP-SM},with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,brown and 1-1-2 o°1••••. gray, loose 15— 12N=318 wce •. F- ° <4°♦ — ♦♦' — _♦° Q . a, °•e — a) •• a, •e ♦ J •°e V 2-3-4 J ee w °a 20.5 845 20— 18 N=7 18 o Boring Terminated at 20.5 Feet o 0 1- ..._ a ) 2 oI 0 i — 0 a w w J z. 0 E — p, 2 O LLI 0 1 Q1 Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic Q d w LL Advancement Method. See Exploration on and Testing Procedures for a Notes: —= Solid stem auger description of field and laboratory procedures MI used and additional data(If any). See Supporting information for explanation of o Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips upon completion. Elevation provided by Client — 0_, WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS 0 I Boring Started:01-23-2020 Boring Completed:01-23-2020 z= � 14'observed while sampling iierraco n O I Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE rn f 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 - F 1 Wet cave-in at 14'after drilling Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 BORING LOG NO. 4 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA "" 1 SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA 0 LOCATION See Expiori..__ co w r 0 1 wo a — o 0 3 OJ wF= H } wig- O.� cCv (),1--_ v Latitude:42.5452°Longitude: 92.4162° _ -1 Q w a f— Q a z w Q w F-w 2 OU wCC m= z 00 0 Surface Elev.:866.5(Ft.) o m Q w '3 0 0 — DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O 'j'• 'L TOPSOIL E,•.�,�; -• 1.5 865 — SAND(SP),trace silt,fine to medium grained,brown,loose 1-2-2— — X 18 N=4 8 ) of _ 2-3-2 N 5— X12 N=5 5 — X 15 1-2-2 5 � N=4 ... w � •'•_•9.0 857.5 oi �:� SAND(SP-SM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,brown and 18 1-1-1 7 0 gray,very loose 10— N=2 ....... Lilw t.`j . a_▪ e°d• — >( i 16 N=1 6 ' CC °▪t.• 14.0 852.5 1 Q .: SAND(SP-SM),with silt layers,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained, 18 1-1-1 19 ° brown,very loose 15-- N=2 ,16.0 850.5 w °°• SAND(SP-SM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,brown and -::• , gray, medium dense — 1 r X 16 El1 20.5 846 .-)0__ N=10 o I Boring Terminated at 20.5 Feet 1 c��i1 o 1- 2 0 o w 0 ▪; cc 0` d1 w- Q z_ o 1 I 0 0 o• f aI Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic cc_ a1 Advancement Method: Notes: See Explo Inc o .rg P =_�'u e-for a `- Solid stem auger description of field and laboratory procedures o used and additional data(If any). ¢: >£ See Soo porting Informattoo for explanation of 0 Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. z I Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips =I upon completion. Elevation provided by Client I ..., 01 o WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Boring Started:01-23-2020 Boring Completed:01-23-2020 z 14.5'observed while sampling eiiacoriDrill Rig:#546 Driller:WE 1 cn 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 g Inii Wet cave-in at 14.5'after drillin Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 ' BORING LOG NO. 5 I — Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA i ,°.,, SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA 0 LOCATION See Exploration Plan J co ^C } 0 ^ Lii Z v >= > i- „)U — 0 - - U Latitude:42.5473°Longitude:-92.4162° _ -' uJ f zQW ,Q a ui Lli Q w 1-w a O ww m= >Z �z Surface Elev.:870.7(Ft.) a <m Q w Lu J O 0 0 O to Ce DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) — r, TOPSOIL - `1 I' 1.5 869 f .- SILTY SAND(SM),fine to medium grained,brown,loose - X18 N=3 14 3 11 , 0 4.0 866.5 — N SILT(ML),with sand layers,light brown,stiff to medium stiff 3-3-3 3000 N 5— 17 N=6 (HP) 26 • o • - ui - 14 2-2-2 22 m _ N=4 _ a _ a 2-3-6 2000 o °' • 10.0 860.51 X18 N=9 (HP) 70 S SAND(SPSM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,brown and w' 11 5 gray, medium dense 859 - '� ... ' : SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to medium grained,light brown, - 5-11-14 a= medium dense X 13 N=25 4 3" 1 X 7-11-13 - a '•:: ::: 5— 17 N=24 3 Q§ - 7I_. •:.19.0 851.5 —� °: I SAND(SPSM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,brown and 3-6-6 J ° XP°°a 20 5 gray, medium dense 850 20— 17 N=12 15 o Boring Terminated at 20.5 Feet 0 J ,- MINIM Q 2 CO 0 W 0 F- X - 0 a X z (0 E — 0 2 o= 5- of cStratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic w -- - co i Advancement Method: g Procedures fora Notes: LL See plot ion ar u esti Solid stem auger description of field and laboratory procedures o J used and additional data(If any). - > See Supporting Information for explanation of O Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z 1 Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips cn Elevationprovided byClient O£ upon completion. S.3 WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS c. Boring Started:01-23-2020 Boring Completed:01-23-2020 E �/ 19'observed while sampling iierracon Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE E 1 19'observed after drilling <o I 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 1-1 Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 i BORING LOG NO. 6 Page 1 of 1 II PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates I Improvements Cedar Falls, IA SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road 1- Waterloo, IA 0 LOCATION See Exploration Plan O wZ 4. c H o o >� C/)CO 0 U Latitude:42.5505°Longitude: 92.4161° vI Q ~LL F- � • O a w Z Z z E n• o_ Wcc J > 0(n wo_ QW O� Q a Lw O z CCZ W Surface Elev.:869.6(Ft.) o <m Q 0 LL CO p O O DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O 14:i` TOPSOIL 0.8 869 ' SILTY SAND(SM�,trace gravel,fine to medium grained,dark brown to — •t 1; . a brown,very loose to loose — 2-1-1 �— .' 18 N=2 19 E — • 3 2-3-5 N •.•.;6,...�5.0 864.5 5 18 9 Owe ° ° ° SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to coarse grained, brown,loose to N-8 1— ee , 4 , 1 8- °:° very loose — O°Q:. iii .e .) X 14 N2-2-13 3 am. . ° 0>O O O a6 < O ° ♦ O O.e Pe e6e ' °°e°°tr°°� 2-1-2 Zls Dees0__114 N=3 3 1 LT ; w- e 2-1-1 1***:.:' X 10 N=2 3 e e°{ Q ° POI e-e e 1 O O O I -t°•°•°• 1-1-1 Q °O.O.P O 0°9'°'155 854 15� 15 I N=2 4 w °e°. SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to coarse grained,gray,loose — O tr O 1 �•O•O•O ~ O O O i��P e•PO s•1 § O O O O ° 1 _ O e e e tr e e t• •OO• • i 849 20— X 18 3-4-5 9 15 e Ptreeeeel W e i_._•:•'20.5 °z Boring Terminated at 20.5 Feet o o} i I-_ 2 l O i w 0 0 a w J Q . .. z. E z 1 OI CC Li:I- Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic 1. w1 a r u) Advancement Method: See Exploration and Testina P _=for a Notes: ▪ Solid stem auger description of field and laboratory procedures o J used and additional data(If any). 11 See Supo _og infoottotico for explanation of 0 3 Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips upon completion. Elevation provided by Client o WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS z 16'observed while drillingBoring Started:01-27-2020 Boring Completed:01-27-2020 m II !1"IECOI.1 Drill Rig:#546 Driller.RF u)= 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 s l . Wet cave-in at 16.5'after drilling Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 -..e BORING LOG NO. 7 _ Page 1 of 2 PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA O LOCATION See Exp:oration Plan w z ww } — o v >O CO O) U U Latitude:42.552°Longitude:-92.4159° w Q ~ CC -1 IO a w z Z z I- wW a > �w Lu Om az CCz O Surface Elev.:868.4(Ft.) o m Q Q �'0 0 0 DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O w U 'i''. TOPSOIL .%.' — 2-3-3 —2.5 866 X9 N=6 1000 25 SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL),trace gravel,brown,medium stiff — _ (HP)• 14 0 • 4.0 864.5 _ N lk.A, SAND(SP-SC),with gravel and clay, brown,medium dense 4-5-5 N I;' ; 5— Ki.6_ N=10 6 _ o :,6.0 862.5 — SAND(SP1,trace gravel and silt,fine to medium grained,brown,loose X 12 2-2-1 6 N=3 w — 2-1-2 10— vX 14 N=3 8 nr .•:..••.11.5 857 �. w e •• SAND(SP-SM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,brown,loose — 1-1-1 [..' 18N=2 19 tLaUeQe♦ .•. — X 9 1-1-1 18 N=2 o ;•; 15— J °e♦, Et e — W • e • Q�e°i _ ro .... 18.0 850.5 — r °o SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to coarse grained,brown,medium ....°; dense — X 9 5-7-7 17 J . .. •e N=14 ♦e•I W e♦e 2I r- ° e e e Z ° — V •e O • O O . e e e°. F • e e e e e - e e • — e e ♦i o•♦•e o.••o•o°, — X 5-6-10 I •♦°e•♦ 25— 10 N=16 16 e e e H=E a ee e e e o a • e . — e e o ••••••' — 10 8-10-11 18 ♦ .e . 30— W Q Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic — a Advancement Method See Ex�,.ora n and.Testing Procedures for a Notes: Solid stem auger to 13.5 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratoryprocedures a` termination. p p 25%water loss at about 13 feet Q used and additional data(If any). > See c-rung Information for explanation of z Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips U- upon completion. Elevation provided by Client r °i WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS o Boring Started:01-27-2020 Boring Completed:01-27-2020 z V 10.5'observed while sampling m8.5'observed about 4.5 hrs.after drilling erracoii Drill Rig:#546 Driller:RF co I 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 — - Cave-in at 12'about 4.5 hrs.after drilling Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 I BORING LOG NO. 7 I Page 2 of 2 1 PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA i — I SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA A LOCATION See Fx t.a..- . .__ - w z a >- o 0 - � _ w_ H } in o aH Z� Latitude:42.552°Longitude: 92.4159° I- W j J w 0 D <a H z <w a a wa > -Jw Q~ O~ a w o az - wSurface Elev.:868.4(Ft.) o <m Q LU 1-1 -a CO= O 0 o — DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O V1 a J U :°:•e°a' SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to coarse grained,brown, medium ° °e°° dense(continued) — s e e ee- e — .`e°e a 33.0 835.5 — 1 o SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to medium grained, light brown, N — medium dense 12 9-8-6 19 N=14 35— — LLI Q — w=: — X I 1 5-6-9 20 z' .• 40.0 828.5 40 N=15 ° Boring Terminated at 40 Feet I — H i a= OF _ CC 0 CC w- H QI a> J I J W 0 Z 0 O J H a Q V)' 01 0 H CC 0 I w 3 a J. a Z 0® CC OI 0- a' I ti.. wI Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic a a= CO'Advancement Method: See Exaioration and Tesi,,,i Prod -s for a Notes: "' Solid stem auger to 13.5 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures termination. used and additional data(If any). Qa > oSee Supp-�;ng info for explanation of !Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips 1 upon completion. Elevation provided by Client != WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Boring Started:01-27-2020 Boring Completed:01-27-2020 V 10.5'observed while sampling o 1 8.5'observed about 4.5 hrs.after drilling iierracon Drill Rig:#546 Driller:RF co cn I 3105 Capital Way.Ste 5 F._Ea Cave-in at 12'about 4.5 hrs.after drillin. Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 1 I BORING LOG NO. 8 Page 1 of 2 PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA I SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA o LOCATION See Exp oration Plan Z w r o 0 — U Latitude:42.555°Longitude:-92.4159° _i Q ~ cc 1--1 F-a Lip Z Z z _ �> o� W� Qw �� 3 n- wu o_ Jw O z oz cc Surface Elev.:866.8(Ft.) a m 1—Ill Q E C CO p OO DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) !IT— -� TOPSOIL '.)L. 1.5 865.5 ` E r CLAYEY SAND(SC),trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,brown, loose - 1-1-4 2.5 864.5 X 18 13 • SAND(SP-SM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to medium grained,light brown, _ N_5 , 5 , loose 0 :: X16 3-3-3 7 N 5— N=6 i a t'• 6.0 861 Off•,_:- , - uj ;•::':._a SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to medium grained,light brown, a loose - i A 18 1-2-2 3 1 N=4 - o •;:'....: 10— 15 2-2-3 N=5 4 � .:••. — :•i: ' - i 0: _ 7 :•• • X 10 N=7 15 O 15— -, •'•..-16.0 851 _ -i. SILTY SAND(SM),fine to medium grained, light brown,loose '- 0 .$ n • ‘-,.*. ... -. X 12 4-2-2 26 J' N=4 20— Oi-{a. ;•21.0 846 _ :::• SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to medium grained,brown,medium O dense ' I _- _ - X6-7-9 10 N=16 18 - a - w .' z .• - X 9-11-11 • .••.30.0 837 11 N=22 18 O 30— l g w_ a Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic cc. Q= a= Advancement Method: See Exp,o,atior arid Testing Procedures for a Notes: - Solid stem auger to 9 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures 2! termination. used and additional data(If any). — F i See S.,opoffnc.information for explanation of z'Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. coBoring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips 0upon completion. Elevation provided by Client — o WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS 2 Boring Started:01-27-2020 Boring Completed:01-27-2020 I E( None observed prior to mud rotary iierracon 1 O Drill Rig:#546 Driller:RF m 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 ..._ 1— Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 BORING LOG NO. 8 ( Page 2 of 2 t PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA I SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA LOCATION See Fop Plan w w v I wo o . o 0 wt= 1- } wI- ow ce� V� a Latitude:42.555°Longitude: 92.4159° W> J w o D a H z Q w > to a_ Q H 0 F- I Surface Elev.:866.8(Ft.) o Q co .z OU w CO= 0 0 O 0 m c¢n w U 0 ... DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) �. °°°° SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to coarse grained,light brown, °a medium dense ♦.a — e o O•O•e1 s e°.' e O O •ee .a 1 O ;° °, — X4-6-8 N . °° ' 11 19 N=14 •> 1ao.♦.oee 5— F °• ae e O eOo e e 1 O °e°.•. _ 1 LLI 0.0.0.0, Q idr.0*..1 J e • e e e .1 0- e o. • • o e 1 W e e e • e e 1 H e• o Q °e°e4.o1 ▪ • 4. 1 • O O 1 o' °>O °'40.0 827 40 12 N=11 K— --- 21 O Boring Terminated at 40 Feet W� 1 W I a▪= .s Q 01 O J Q' W F O O O i _ J- wi 01 1 t 3 9 Q CD i O i......W 0I I--. w 0 a w J 3 `- z` 1 i 21 0 i a 2 i I O of QStratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic dih a o Advancement Method: See id="pioration and stir.Tggegedi gee for a Notes: ` 1 Solid stem auger to 9 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures Di termination. used and additional data(If any). >ISee Supp eding Info'matgn for explanation of 01 Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips - Elevation provided byClient ` 0 upon completion. O= WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS 0 1 Boring Started:01-27-2020 Boring Completed:01-27-2020 z None observed prior to mud rotary I1t!rrEJCOfl 0. Drill Rig:#546 Driller:RF m- o. 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 _1 Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 H BORING LOG NO. 9 Page 1 of 2 I PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA ..... SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA o LOCATION See Exploration n Par 1 �z w o — U Latitude:42.557°Longitude:-92.416° Lt -I Q ~ i--1 i—a w. Z z a a w> a > �cn Wa Q'p c9 tw- W 1—w ., O ww CO �Z 0z CC9 Surface Elev.:874.0(Ft.) a <m Q w O O O DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O u) 0' • — {' TOPSOIL 7.87'1 5 SILTY SAND(SM),fine grained,brown,loose — — 12 2-2-2 6 N=4 N •�." :4.0 870 — N , SILTY CLAY(CL-ML),trace sand,gray and brown,stiff 18 3-3-3 2500 21 ,--.15— N=6 (HP) F-- o _ w-- g — 2-2-4 3500 1—. - - — /\ 18 N=6 (HP) 31 -8.5 865.5 '_'? — _' SAND(SP),trace silt and gravel,fine to medium grained,brown,loose to 0_='::'••- medium dense 5-4-5 ' X11 14 10— N=9 • • wa:•'• � .,•::..., — 2 c9 _ d -. 13 -.. X 11 4-6-9.•._. 15— N=15 cc W1:...•::, — _ O _ ,`:,_;• 19.0 855 — •.A SAND(SP-SM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,gray and 10 5-5-5 20 AMON w ... brown,medium dense 20— X N=10 . o e e° Z — o•a o eee e a _ e 1-to e ..... ea • • • e s a t a 0�es — au (-1.!c°•°j 25— N=14 ee X 11 5-6-8 15 e e W a< - c "' J .e..: Q Ida — z.. U" re e — 1°,4,1 ! 29.0 845 — 5-6-6 30— 10 17 21 `_ Q Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic QI a LY)I Advancement Method: d T .:ra Procedures for a Notes: See hu•. r a ._ Hollow stem auger to 9 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures Si termination. used and additional data(If any). — j s 1- See rtng Information for explanation of z Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. co Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips upon completion. Elevation provided by Client WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS c9 Boring Started:01-27-2020 Boring Completed:01-27-2020 z None observed prior to mud rotary elI.aCol.1 m Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 H Cave-in at 8.5'after drilling Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 BORING LOG NO. 9 Page2of2 I PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA 1 -- SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road i Waterloo, IA 1 o LOCATION See on Plan co w ^ z o 3 = Latitude:42.557°Longitude: 92.416° J w w I- Q w Q I z Q W FL CL Lug >f-Th JM D_ Q~ 0~ Surface Elev.:874.0(Ft.) o Q w m z O CL O C7 m w w < U U DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to medium grained,gray brown, ?S N=12 medium dense(continued) — — I 8-10-13 35_ 11 N=23 19 838.51 I o 1 Boring Terminated at 35.5 Feet I u.ii Q- U= w- Q pl z 0 U= a w- H 2 0.i a xs QI O X H1 QI 0 L i - 0 �. M_ B jJ O O a i aI a_ o= w= 0_ 0= d= w a Z EEI I Om 2 u-= oStratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic a o Advancement Method: See Explo. :on and Testing Procedures for a Notes: "--I Hollow stem auger to 9 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures o 1 termination. used and additional data(If any). = See ppo't ;o inform ation for explanation of 1 > o i Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips —= upon completion. Elevation provided by Client Oi ° WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS z None observed prior to mud rotary Boring Started:01 27-2020 Boring Completed:01-27-2020 o lerracon Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE _ m �- v�I 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 Cave-in at 8.5'after drilling Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 BORING LOG NO. 10 Page 1 of 2 I PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA I SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA I 0 LOCATION See ExploFation Pia-_ w } o Iw z c wo w =LL I- } � o.: fv� - U Latitude:42.5591°Longitude:-92.416° _ JQw f i-J ~ wZZ z _ a i � Q.a-- 1-w Qw CC � Q~ �a w0Q O zQ O Ow Surface Elev.:870.0(Ft.) o <m 1 CO 0 co w _1 U DEPTH ELEVATION¢t.) — .i•'::•` TOPSOIL i,'.,,•i,. — . 1.8 868 i SILTY CLAY(CL-ML),with sand,brown to gray brown,medium stiff —— X 8 N24 1000 23 _ (HP)' 25 ' N -,- - --4.5 865.5 N • •' '• ' SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to medium grained,light brown to 5- X 14 N=6 (HP)3-3-3 2000 ) 26 brown,loose to medium dense 5 — Q — 4-4-4 : X 14 N=8 5 1 _ x — 1 4-6-8°, o '• 10— 18 N=14 3 a a - L • 12.0 858 ° SAND(SP-SM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,brown, a/::: medium dense — . . _ cc e a ° 4-7-10 15— 11 N=17 11 1 o • J . e w a°' — w cI • - I M e° — I L°• 3-6-8 J�° �. w '•° 2°- X 9 N=14 12 _• e O re°a • — e a e o a J ° F e a • e o ti e j 24.0 846 w ' SAND(SP-SM),with silt,tracegravel,fine to mediumgrained,light brown, ( ) 9 10 3-6-10 21 medium dense 25- N=16 - d .;:- - w z .`.:• - 0<7.- 8-10-12 �) X 11 18 E —:.i i i 30- ° w- Q Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic QI a3 w ')w!Advancement Method: I See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a Notes: — Hollow stem auger to 9 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures °' termination. used and additional data(If any). F-i See Supporting fo at:on for explanation of o Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. I Z I Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips O upon completion. Elevation provided by Client — WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS O Boring Started:01-27-2020 Boring Completed:01-27-2020 I Z None observed prior to mud rotary iierraco l o Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE m w 8'observed after drilling 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 T Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 1 BORING LOG NO. 10 Page 2 of 2 PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA I SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA 0 LOCATION See Expic a = w z u] o 0 0 0 Latitude:42.5591°Longitude:-92.416° _ j W w _i o° w iz ¢w _ J 0u) Wd ¢H 01- I a_¢ 0- Lii W HW ., C Ww m= Z DO Surface Elev.:870.0(Ft.) Q O J 0 = ,.� DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) 30 5 839 5 >< N=22 Boring Terminated at 30.5 Feet I 1 o N 1 N .- 1- 0 q ui Q J _w 1 H o DI z 03 01 W H d O 0_ 0= O1 WI 1 I DI O H 2 Q QStratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic ¢ a lAdvancement Method: See .r o _.r d =_. a res for a Notes: Hollow stem auger to 9 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures Q I termination.:211 used and additional data(If any). >1 See S = ding in ation for explanation of 0 Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z. Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips D.IElevation rovided b Client upon completion. P Y 00i 0 WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Boring Started:01-27-2020 Boring Completed:01-27-2020 o= None observed prior to mud rotary iierracon g 0_ m 1� 8'observed after drilling Drill Rig:#546 Driller WE u)= 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 H Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 s Ia BORING LOG NO. 11 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA _ SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA LOCATION See Expiotation Plan w z w - 0 O — U Latitude:42.5626°Longitude:-92.416° i Q F- w co cn 1--1 I-Q w z Z z Iw 0 ¢,. f- QLu a~ w� > ofn Wa ¢w 01— w 1-Ili o O wW Om z aZ CC Surface Elev.:870.4(Ft.) o <m Q w u- J 0 O O - DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O rn l — a{''..`' TOPSOIL '" •1.5 869 LEAN CLAY(CL),trace sand,brown,stiff - 2-3-4 4000 7 N=7 (HP) 24 — 1. 3.5 867 ▪ :: 1) SAND(SP-SM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to medium grained,brown, — loose 11 4-3-4 8 t N ••. 5— XN=7 a 0 u; J 6.5 864 a E. .., SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to medium grained,light brown, - 3-6-8 medium dense to loose 13 N=14 4 w -� — O . :::.•: X18 3-3-6 5 1�- N=9 ° '. 1 • • -2-3 5 II1N I 0, . ...- 14.0 856.5 - - Q e., SAND(SP-SM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,gray and 18 3-3-5 6 o v. , brown,loose 15— N=8 e< i J- �yJ=e a F e — i,sea O e O 4.... i OV.' O e M e e a ikee` 3-2-3 — W :�v. 20— 9 N=5 14 .. ze- - q - C7 e r O a e J e. — e a• :— F e F eed (/)t s a j O ..e.i. — I. 2-3-5 — °>1 i 25.5 25— 12 N=8 17 845 i Boring Terminated at 25.5 Feet w c J 1 a z_ — m c 1 w` Q' Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic - a' a1 Advancement Method: Notes: See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a L -= Solid stem auger description of field and laboratory procedures used and additional data(If any). I - 1- See cc-or i.n Information for explanation of o lAbandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips 0 upon completion. Elevation provided by Client WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS O : t: 01-24-2020 Boring Completed:01-24-2020 • 19'observed while samplingrracon 546 Driller:WE cn 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 F:la Dry cave-in at 15.5'after drilling Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 BORING LOG NO. 12 Page 1 of 1 I PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA MEW SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA O LOCATION See on Plan. w z c >- o 1 -, - >O >- cn cn U U Latitude:42.5613°Longitude:-92.4149° = J¢ H. w 1--1 o°- W z z w 1 EL a.. wW a_ > �w Oo_ Q� o z I Ce Surface Elev.:870.5(Ft.) o Q 2 LLJ Z OV u_ Q O O O DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) '-• • ` TOPSOIL e' ` 1.5 869 2.0 \SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL),trace gravel,brown,medium stiff �5 —_ X18 1-2-2 2000 15 I CLAYEY SAND SC fine to medium grained,brown,loose 867.5 N=4 (HP) SAND(SP-SM),with silt,fine to medium grained,brown,loose o N3 5— X 16 N8 5 : I a 3... 12— 2-3-3 �3 .. X6 N=6 I>:• II9.0 861.5 — I of 1 SAND(SP-SM1,with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained, brown,loose 16 1-2-2o 6 . 10— N=4 Q ie ee I _ Q I....Ill • °e1 I — X 8 1-2-2 5 2 °.1 1 N=4 I • e1 I 0,5 P.e4 1 1 - 1 --y •1eQ < 2-3-3 O r6 ee X �I 15.5 8551 15— 15 N=6 W Boring Terminated at 15.5 Feet o o 1 a, � i 7,1 LiI of of X co w cc O- as w= Q i ee ... I O i OI LL Q Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic CC 1 a. 'Advancement Method: See Fxddicdation and Testin! -~ce --s for a Notes: "= Solid stem auger description of field and laboratory procedures used and additional data(If any). >= See Sup;_-,.. ,-,-::;.In`- on for explanation of He'Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. z 1 Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips upon completion. Elevation estimated from a topographic site plan. O P P o WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS z� Boring Started:01-24-2020 Boring Completed:01-24-2020 o- None observed while drilling iierracon g None observed after drilling Drill Rig:#546 Driller WE mI - '.. co= 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 II Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 H BORING LOG NO. 13 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA . U LOCATION See Exploration Plan Lt z w > o — U Latitude:42.5612°Longitude:-92.4141° v _1 o ~ fY I--I O-Q w Z Z Z a ~ J > o a o- Q W 0~ ci_ -'w O z Oz . CL Surface Elev.:874.0(Ft.) o m Q Q 0 O O 3 DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O U O — a+':.`t TOPSOIL 1.0 873 _ SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL),trace gravel,brown,stiff •; — X18 1-2-2 3000 14 3 — N=4 (HP) — 0 3.5 870.5 SAND(SP-SM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to medium grained,brown, _ loose 12 3-3-4 5 N .: 5— X N=7 o •.:. W ..: g _— X17 2-2-3 4 2 • N=5 w I: a&•:- — x Z, 17 2-3-3 7 10— N=6 .. — - w — X i X18 2-2-2 5 18 2-2-4— 5 o=. .: 15.5 858.5 15 X N=6 w Boring Terminated at 15.5 Feet w I-- - 0 N. 0 in a, J - W 0 0 0 J H - CC Q 2 c 0 w O d 1 W CC i Q' Z 0= 2 o' w- Q• Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic Q- aI w`Advancement Method: for a Notes: w See Exploration and Testing Procedures Solid stem auger description of field and laboratory procedures o used and additional data(If any). - Q FSee S pp0ning information for explanation of o Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips o upon completion. Elevation provided by Client — WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS 0 Boring Started:01-24-2020 Boring Completed:01-24-2020 cc 1 None observed while drilling iierracon m None observed after drilling Drill Rig.#546 Driller.WE cn` 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 F Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 BORING LOG NO. 14 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA i 0 LOCATION See Explorat= _- w z w >- o o _' w� H } why- O N w, z~ U Latitude:42.5612°Longitude:-92.4133° _ J Q w w ~-, Q Q Luz z w a w W> J aw CCw_ Q� 01-- d W O �Z w Surface Elev.:873.0(Ft.) o Q u) . OU u Q O O O 0 m 0) . V U DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O �'':•' TOPSOIL 1.0 872 — f' `' SILTY SAND(SM),fine to medium grained,brown, loose — X 1-2-2 '� 1-1 1.• 18 7 • N=4 }.'3.0 870 I SAND(SP-SM),with silt,trace gravel,fine to medium grained,brown, N 1 I loose X 15 2-2-3 7 N l 5 N=5 uiry.ij a 14 2-2-2 7 'I a r,. N=4 — X I 1! 2-2-3 18 6 z i i 10J X N=5 §1`•... - 3: . w3 '` X 11 10 N=4 (0 .• 06 • " 11 xs — i i 2-3-4 15.5 857.5 15 X 17 N=7 6 W Boring Terminated at 15.5 Feet •— o- rn1 `r - _ W s O U O J 2. 1 co O O W O PO W Q z 2 of iTI o 1 Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic ¢- re I a' I Advancement Method: See Exoloration and Testing Procedures for a Notes: Solid stem auger description of field and laborato procedures ❑= used and additional data(If any). 1- See Effie-porting information for explanation of o i Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips -1 upon completion. Elevation provided by Client O I WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS 0 Boring Started:01-24-2020 Boring Completed:01-24-2020 E None observed while drilling Ierrco 1 ° None observed after drilling Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE can)! 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 F I Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195070.02 BORING LOG NO. 15 — Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates Improvements Cedar Falls, IA SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Waterloo, IA o LOCATION See - - _1 co W O WO a v —>- 0 J~ H WJ �5 �1— ZH a Latitude:42.5612°Longitude: 92.4124° �; W > o S CL Q w aJ W O Q Z rE Surface Elev.:871.7(Ft.) o ,<m Q 0 L <= p O O DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O ly —I U — •:•` TOPSOIL �^1.0 870.5 _ .' SILTY SAND(SM),trace organics,fine to medium grained,dark brown, X ' loose — 13 1-2-2 12 3 _ N=4 — 868 N • SAND(SP),trace silt,fine to medium grained,brown to light brown,loose _ �s 5_ X 14 ::: Q .�.•. -. X a�- •. 18 =5 2-3-3 10-- 18 N=6 5 U i i • _ X 18 2-2-3 5 N=5 o _• {:. •14.0 857.5 ► kas — — W,•.••.••. SAND(SP),trace gravel and silt,fine to coarse grained,brown and gray, 18 2-2-2 o..�• loose 15-- X N=4 __:•_15.5 856 W. Boring Terminated at 15.5 Feet Q — of 1 o LC)3 �= I J J O= = i Og 1 CL 2 o co cc — O 3 a_ W. cc Q Z_ O 2 I °I I u_ i a I Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic - Q W Advancement Method: See Y 7::'1310,and Tes:r.- az for a Notes: Solid stem auger description of field and laboratory procedures 1 used and additional data(If any). > See` .00i f c,for explanation of O'Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. z- Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips upon completion. Elevation provided by Client 01 — _,I WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Boring Started:01-24-2020 Boring Completed:01-24-2020 I '_ 15.5'observed while sampling iierracon o- DrillRig: Driller:WE co15.5'observed after drilling w 1 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 1-L_ Cedar Falls,IA Project GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ASTM D422/ASTM C136 _ U.S.SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S.SIEVE NUMBERS I HYDROMETER 6 4 3 2 1.5 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 3 6 10 1416 20 30 40 50 60 100 140 200 100 I I I I I I . I fi I ° 95 • — 90 10 85 80 20 75 • — 70 30 65 — H 60 40�' m _C� 55 X n_ m= 0Iw Z_ - >-• 50 50 0 I — Nm 0 Hg > O.X M- 03 w 45 cn- w=Z m1 "Iw 73- gH4o 6007= -<- Wi Li 0 *I Q3o' 35 m z 30 70--1 o- UI — aI 25 w r a 20 80 cD c ' 15 It 0 10 90 0 0 • J x - w 5 • H O 0 10p o 100 10 1 0.1 0.0" 0.0010 _5a col M up "= COBBLES GRAVEL SAND SILT OR CLAY I�= W I.I coarse fine coarse[ medium fine N Z I BORING ID I DEPTH %COBBLES _ %GRAVEL %SAND %SILT %FINES °h CLAY USCS Et y• •i 2 11.5-13 0.0 i 0.0 93.1 6.9 SP-SM _ o i a w z GRAIN SIZE I; SOIL DESCRIPTION "= Si•eve .% •Finer •Sieve %Finer? Sieve %Finer — o - - -- 1 I•• SAND,with silt layers,fine to medium #4 100.0 = o• — D60 027 #8 99.74 I I 'grained,brown and gray(SP-SM) . LL D30 0.175 ( #16 99.49 i i I i O I- #30 96.31 1 D10 i 0.089 j #50 67.31 I — rx r #100 19.24 a (� = #200 6.91 REMARKS u f COEFFICIENTS I` , I i• � o. • I' — > C� 1.27 z C1 3.03 I w= Ct < — PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary PROJECT NUMBER 13195070.02 W Sewer Improvements �� �� i 0 _ _ .:_i ,. w SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road _ 3105 Capital way.Ste 5 ICLIENT: Clapsaddle Garber Associates — m° Waterloo, IA Cedar Falls,IA Cedar Fall: IA ¢s GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ASTM D422/ASTM C136 U.S.SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S.SIEVE NUMBERS I HYDROMETER i 6 4 3 2 1.5 1 3/4 1/2 3 4 6 810 1416 20 30 40 50 60 100 140 200 95 • 90 10 1 85 80 -- - 20 • • • 75 70 30 65 �" • • 60 40-0 mI • • • - 55 m1 I o3_W zI N > 50 50 001 =m D= 0 w45 • cn1 w z x1 -'• Z40 • 60�1 a 2--w w1V m < w 35 0 o zI 30 \ —HI I \* 70 3 o I U Q • 25 cc a20 80 o= s Q • 15 • 0 10 -• 90 1 J 1 ix• 5 • w 1 0 o- 11 N-= 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.00 1 rn= M I COBBLES GRAVEL SAND SILT OR CLAY _. w I coarse fine coarse[ medium 1 fine NCO _ z B RING II) DEPTH `%COBBLES; °/a GRAVEL i %SAND %SILT %FINES ;%CLAY '' USCS 0 • 4 14-15.5 0.0 1.2 84.5 14.3 SP-SM .I i o iI I z GRAIN S i = — SOIL DESCRIPTION Wan - • = i• SAND,with silt layers,trace gravel,fine to �x o 13/8" 100.0 i I I 2• �Dw I 0.423 o I I l #4 98.78 j i! coarse grained,brown(SP-SM) D30 0.169 . I #8 96.09 I I 11 o 1 #16 89.39 i I wHi Dto #30 71.9 a #50 48.33 ! Q #100 26.29 I REMARKS - COEFFICIENTS 1. #200 14.32 I I i I •; __ El ,l I - > C� . I ▪ Cu I I a u) PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary 1 1 PROJECT NUMBER: 13195070.02 1- erracon i ._. Sewer Improvements H. 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 CLIENT: Cla saddle Garber Associates • SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road Cedar Falls,IA p Falls, IA o Cedar m Waterloo, IA gI GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ASTM D422/ASTM C136 U.S.SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S.SIEVE NUMBERS I HYDRC'AETER 6 4 3 2 1.5 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 3 4 6 810 1416 20 30 40 50 60 100 140 200 100 I I I I I I I I I I 1 l 0 95 • 90 . . 10 85 . 80 20 75 70 30 • • 65 • — 60 40-0II— m 70- C2 55 n o Z3 w _ -1 N 1} 50 , 500_ m O. olcL >. 0:w z 45 . �- QET: m H- o_ z 40 60 cp w w 35 m d = zI 30 ..- _ _ 70 H-1 U- ct I 25 w ui1 E.'I 20 80 c d- o 1 15 - ccs p1 10 - 90 — L 5 I I 0 • 0 11 o 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.00?0 0= rn I M co 1 COBBLES GRAVEL SAND SILT OR CLAY w= L l coarse i fine coarse] medium I fine . i Qz` BORING ID DEPTH %COBBLES %GRAVEL i %SAND i %SILT 1 %FINES %CLAY USCS o I•I 6 9-10.5 0.0 5.2 90.7 I 4.1 SP — —r-- o I = I w � I I I CL z GRAIN SIZE •• SOIL DESCRIPTION E • l%Finer Sieve %Finn Sieve I%Finer!Sieve o- • SAND,trace graval and silt,fine to coarse 1/2" 100.0 o I D� 0.945 3/8" 98.97 :grained,brown(SP) El D3 I 0.45 I #4 94.84 I w I , #8 85.83 F D,o 0.207 i I #16 69.36 i — #30 40.84 - #50 14.71 .: REMARKS n. COEFFICIENTS #100 5.97 I _- I ti_ #200 4.11 I •I p3 • i. — Cc 1.04 I a- Cu j 4.58 z- w — ? PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary PROJECT NUMBER 13195070.02 w ___ ct__ } Sewer Improvement — I s - SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 - CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates cc.°} Waterloo, IA cedar Falls,IA Cedar Falls, IA a1 _ J GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ASTM D422/ASTM C136 U.S.SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S.SIEVE NUMBERS I HYDROMETER 4 2 1 1/2 3 6 10 16 30 50 100 200 I 6 3 1.5 3/4 3/8 4 8 14 20 40 60 140 100 I I I I I I I I 1 1 I I 1 95 • 90 _ • .- 10 I 85 I 80 _ 20 • • 75 I I 70 30 65 • 60 40 m I n1 C 55 mI RI zI N -1 N }50 50 O F m yI cc x w z45 cn m i Q LI 0 0- z 40 60-< 2 w U H ill35 5_ o=� of 30 ` 70 o Q= w3 25il H 1 a 1 20 80 oI cc .a 15 I C Q o 10 90 o J 5 I Hi 01 0_ 1 N-1 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.0d00 ._ rn_ I —3 GRAVEL SAND COBBLES SILT OR CLAY _ [ coarse fi ars ne coe medium fine w= I N CO z 1 BORING ID ' DEPTH %COBBLES. %GRAVEL i %SAND I %SILT %FINES ` %CLAY ; USCS 6, i 7 9-10.5 0.0 8.3 88.7 3.0 SP o w= z= GRAIN SIZE ° • I SOIL'DESCRIPTION ' 1`Sieve '%Finer' Sieve 1%Fined Sieve %Finer ss E • - •;SAND,trace gravel and silt,fine to medium o Dso 1.133 ' 1/2" : 100.0 o= 3/8" 98.99 ,grained,brown(SP) E_ I D300.531 #4 , 91.71 o; - I I i i o_ #8 79.61 i I F 1 D10 0.292 1 #16 : 61.64 a.Q Il #30 34.21 I #50 10.26 I` -_ REMARKS % COEFFICIENTS #100 3.85 1 #200 ' 2.99 I I I Q I C 0.85 I 1I _ 1 ( i 11 o ICu 3.89 I I ! z W col I cn PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary1 r I PROJECT NUMBER: 13195070.02 0. Sewer Improvements w: ! strewn I low I—43105 Capital Way,Ste 5 £ CLIENT: Associates SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree RoadClapsaddle-Garber Cedar Falls,IA ° Waterloo,IA Cedar Falls, IA ! GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ASTM D422/ASTM C136 U.S.SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S.SIEVE NUMBERS I HYDRC'd1ETER 6 4 3 2 1.5 1 3/4 1/2 3 4 6 810 1416 20 30 40 50 60 100 140 200 100 I I I I I I I ( I I I I I 0 I 95 90 ' ' 10 85 I 80 20 I 75 70 30 65 , — I 60 40-0 i. m1 2 2J- CD 55 - n o'w> ZI > I — Nm 50 50 o DI 0 Z 45 . _. cn ui m H _ m H- a_ z 40 60 W O Q. 35 m= 5£ I oily 30 .. 70 H — o I • 25 wi I-6 a2 20 - 80 = °_ ar = 15 xs1 a 10 90 0 oI J ct1— 5 w= I 0 pp o 100 10 1 0.1 0.0A O.08 O 1 E:E)1 — COBBLES GRAVEL SAND E SILT OR CLAY di= coarse I fine coarse I medium 1 fine j 1 Z I BORING ID 1 DEPTH . %COBBLES i %GRAVEL %SAND %SILT %FINES I %CLAY USCS 1 ES • 7 i 13.5-15 0.0 8.6 85.9 I 5.5 SP SM I i 0 0_ w cc J3 z- GRAIN SIZE •• SOIL DESCRIPTION °• ' Sieve %Finer Sieve %Finer; Sieve %Finer 1-1 0 0 •!SAND,with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse I 3/8 100.0 i ;grained,brown(SP-SM) '1 D� 0.429 I. #8 78.69 o i 0.176 -- - 1 #16 63.39 f £ D,o #30 40.44 — cc #50 18.84 I REMARKS aI _':. #100 7.3 I COEFFICIENTS 1 #200 5.45 i i• I J I I a — >= Cc 0.98 j IoCu 6.05 w= Q - w PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary _ PROJECT NUMBER 13195070.02 F Sewer Improvements Terra con }r a, of -_s 1 SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road 3105 Capital way,Ste 5 IA rxECedar Falls, CLIENT: Clapsaddle Sarber Associates °I Waterloo, IA Cedar Fall: IA Q J_ - - _-. -- -- GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ASTM D422/ASTM C136 — U.S.SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S.SIEVE NUMBERS I HYDROMETER 6 3 1.5 4 2 1 1/23/8 4 8 14 20 40 60 140 3 6 10 16 30 50 100 200 100 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 0 95 90 10 • • 85 • 80 20 I 75 • • 70 - 30 1 1 65  - i 60 40mi ii cX2 01W 55- 02 �. '� 50c) Nam 50 O > �=ill 45 , co� �ii rn xi 1 — aiZ 40 60 co I -<= 2w LU v m <i - a=L35 _ i7 'a m =i - zi3 30 70 of U§ Q' ▪ i 25 w a 1 20 80 0 d= 15 • • o0 10 - 90 I Vowo • CC i5 • 3 • r 0 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.0(1p 0 i ,..- rn _M 1 o GRAVEL SAND n= COBBLES SILT OR CLAY w coarse fine coarse medium fine N CO_ . _ , BORING ID DEPTH %COBBLES° %GRAVEL °lo SAND %SILT %FINES I %CLAY f USCS Z€ = o 1• 8 4-5.5 0.0 5.9 88.5 5.6 SP-SM •I CC i o € ---] a - III —__ z} GRAIN SIZE I C ! - SOIL DESCRIPTION — o -- ';Sieve %Finer Sieve ;%Finer Sieve '%Finer' 6- =� I[--- !• SAND,with silt,trace gravel,fine to medium 2 2 D60 I 0.273 1 !' 3/4" . 100.0I. E o i 1/2" 97.56 `` I Igrained,light brown(SP-SM) El D30 1 0.184 i i 3/8" 1 96.52 I 1 I i 01 #4 94.09 i I F 1 D,o 0.107 #8 188.81 j I I E 1 = 1 #16 I 82.42 a_a REMARKS #30 75.63 COEFFICIENTS #50 67.22 w t • #100 I 14.22 I• 1 O ; #200 ' 5.56 I, �_ Cc 1.16 I 1 I o-l Cu ' 2.55 I I a a w i PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary i i PROJECT NUMBER: 13195070.02 HI Sewer Improvements 1 erraconrn i="7 o �. Q - 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 1 CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road = Cedar Falls,IA � m Waterloo, IA Cedar Falls, IA S= GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ASTM D422/ASTM C136 U.S.SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S.SIEVE NUMBERS I HYDROMETER — 6 4 3 2 1.5 1 3/4 1/2,. 3 4 6 810 1416 20 30 40 50 60 100140200 100 I I I I I I I I I ' I I I ° i. 95 90 10 85 - 80 20 75 — • 70 30 I 65 1 — - 60 - 40-a t Nz CD 55 m w N — N m 50 50 n o • 0- o Z 45 — - cn H LT_ m a_Z 40 60� 2-W U • w 35 m o I zI 30 70 0 0 - Q 25 F 1 I 20 80 c3 - x 15 0 90=• 10 - • - w 5 • 0 10 o i 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.00?° 2.1 I U COBBLES GRAVEL SAND SILT OR CLAY coarse i w fine coarse I medium fine N z: BORING ID DEPTH %COBBLES %GRAVEL ! %SAND %SILT %FINES . %CLAY USCS • I r 9 19-20.5 0.0 1.5 93.1 5.4 1 SP-SM ae i ccw Z GRAIN SIZE • SOIL DESCRIPTION re Sieve %Finer Sieve %Finer Sieve .%Finer p { ,• SAND,with silt,trace gravel,fine to coarse • D, 0.518 3/8" 100.0 o #4 98.47 I grained,gray and brown(SP-SM) wf D30 1 0.358 j I #8 ' 96.56 #16 93.42 w D10 ! 0.189 I #30 71.95 #50 15.73 #100 7.12 F REMARKS u_ COEFFICIENTS #200 5.4 • •0 I > C� 1.31 o C 2.74 z " w= Qa — w PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary 1 £ PROJECT NUMBER: 13195070.02 s Sewer Improvements cc- erracon 1 cl SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree Road I 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates mo Waterloo, IA Cedar Falls,IA Cedar Falls. IA g GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ASTM D422/ASTM C136 - U.S.SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S.SIEVE NUMBERS I HYDROMETER 4 2 1 1/2 3 6 10 16 30 50 100 200 6 3 1.5 3/4 4 8 14 20 40 60 140 100 I I I I 1 1 I I ( 1 I I 1 ' : 85 8 0 _ - 20 • I 75 70 30• 65 i 60 40 m 1 U55 m1 zI �£w -1 ` _� 500 c" } 50 \ . O m • • x 8 W 45 — cn Z 40 60 0 w w • U m_3 F w 35 r zi 30 70 i 0 U 25 w= ~ 80 — d i 20 (3 ¢- I 15 [ 1090 \Iic....., :: Om.. w 5 z E • 11pp 0 0 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.0010 u, rn cn= GRAVEL SAND 1 COBBLES SILT OR CLAY I coarse fine coarse medium r fine N z BORING ID DEPTH %COBBLES , %a GRAVEL %SAND %SILT Ito FINES ' %CLAY i USCS 10 9-10.5 0.0 1.1 94.0 4.9 i SP o , aI w z= GRAIN SIZE • $ SOIL DESCRIPTION t • i - Sieve ;%Finer, Sieve .°/a Finer' Sieve %Fi 1• SAND,trace gravel and silt,fine to medium 1 o; i I I 3/8" 100.0 ' i o D� 0.558 o� _ #4 98.86 � grained,light brown to brown(SP) E D� 0.315 s #8 ; 96.63 ! _ ❑y i#16 90.99 Q= D,o 0.163 #30 63.77 I ' #50 27.39 a #100 7.61 I REMARKS- '. cow COEFFICIENTS #200 4.86 • - _ - Cc 1.09 I o. Cu2 1 I �' I I z I w= PROJECT: Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary PROJECT NUMBER: 13195070.02 1- Sewer Improvements i ct• � — -- strewn _ = - o= H= 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 CLIENT: Clapsaddle-Garber Associates § SITE: Leversee Road and Lone Tree RoadP m Waterloo, IA Cedar Falls,IA Cedar Falls, IA J I SUPPORTING INFORMATION Contents: General Notes Unified Soil Classification System GENERAL NOTES lierracon DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS = . Waterloo Air&Rail Park Sanitary Sewer Improvements M Waterloo, IA GeoReport February 13,2020'' Terracon Project No. 13195070.02 SAMPLING WATER LEVEL FIELD TESTS Water InitiallyN Standard Penetration Test Resistance(Blows/Ft.) Encountered 1 XWater Level After a (HP) Hand Penetrometer Split Spoon Specified Period of Time Water Level After (T) Torvane a Specified Period of Time 1 vs Cave In ...� Encountered (DCP) Dynamic Cc ie Penetrometer 1 'Water levels indicated on the soil boring logs are UC Unconfined compressive the levels measured in the borehole at the times Strength indicated. Groundwater level variations will occur i over time. In low permeability soils. accurate (PID) Photo-Ionization Detector 1 determination of groundwater levels is not 1 possible with short term water level observations. (OVA) Organic Vapor Analyzer DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION Soil classification as noted on the soil boring logs is based Unified Soil Classification System. Where sufficient laboratory data exist to classify the soils consistent with ASTM D2487"Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes"this procedure is used.ASTM D2488"Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure)" is also used to classify the soils, particularly where insufficient laboratory data exist to classify the soils in accordance with ASTM D2487. ii In addition to USCS classification, coarse grained soils are classified on the basis of their in-place relative density, and :fine-grained soils are classified on the basis of their consistency. See"Strength Terms"table below for details. The ASTM standards noted above are for reference to methodology in general. In some cases, variations to methods are applied as a result of lueal practice or r iesaiurrai judgrrieri� — — LOCATION AND ELEVATION NOTES Exploration point locations as shown on the Exploration Plan and as noted on the soil boring logs in the form of Latitude — and Longitude are approximate. See - ploration and Testing Procedures in the report for the methods .ised to locate the exploration points for this project. Surface elevation data annotated with +/-indicates that no actual top( graphical survey was conducted to confirm the surface elevation. Instead, the surface elevation was approximately deter Wined from topographic maps of the area. STRENGTH TERMS La RELATIVE DENSITY OF COARSE-GRAINED SOILS r CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILS (More than 50%retained on No.200 sieve.) (50%or more passing the No.200 sieve:) Density determined by Standard Penetration Resistance = Consistency determined by laboratory shear strength testing,field visual-manual procedures or standard penetration resistance Descriptive Term Standard Penetration or Descriptive Term_ Unconfined Compressive Strength Standard Penetration or (Density) N-Value (Consistency) Qu,(psf) N-Value Blows/Ft. Blows/Ft. Very Loose 0-3 Very Soft less than 500 0-1 _ Loose 4-9 Soft 500 to 1,000 2-4 Medium Dense 10-29 Medium Stiff 1,000 to 2,000 i 4-8 Dense 30-50 I Stiff 2,000 to 4,000 8-15 Very Dense >50 ' Very Stiff 4,000 to 8,000 € 15-30 Hard >8,000 >30 ' r__ RELEVANCE OF SOIL BORING LOG I The soil boring logs contained within this document are intended for application to the project as descrit,ed in this document. Use of these soil boring logs for any other purpose may not be appropriate. i lierracon _ __�� - �==� 1 gig_- 33 = s� - - --F n _L -- i _- _ s_ = GeoReport Soil Classification Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests Group Group Name Symbol Clean Gravels: Cu>_4 and 1 <_Cc<3 E GW Well-graded gravel F — Gravels: Less than 5%fines E I Cu<4 and/or[Cc<1 or Cc>3.0]E I GP Poorly graded gravel More than 50%of coarse fraction Fines classify as ML or MH GM Silty gravel T-G,H retained on No.4 sieve :Gravels with Fines: Coarse-Grained Soils: More than 12%fines c Fines classify as CL or CH GC Clayey gravel F, More than 50%retained on No.200 sieve ;Clean Sands: Cu>_6 and 1 5_Cc<_3 E SW ;Well-graded sand Sands: Less than 5%fines D Cu<6 and/or[Cc<1 or Cc>3.0]E SP Poorly graded sand s 50%or more of coarse fraction passes No.4 Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sand , sieve Sands with Fines: More than 12%fines° Fines classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand -H, PI>7 and plots on or above"A" CL Lean clay K,L.£= Inorganic: Silts and Clays: PI<4 or plots below"A"line-I ML Silt K,G. _ Liquid limit less than 50 Liquid limit-oven dried Organic clay k L,Tyl. Fine-Grained Soils: Organic: <0.75 OL Liquid limit-not dried Organic silt NI,g _ 50%or more passes the No.200 sieve i PI plots on or above"A"line CH ,Fat clay =,M Inorganic: plots and Clays: PI below"A"line MH Elastic Silt ,L',.L',. Liquid limit 50 or more Liquid limit-oven dried ' Organic clay _ Organic: <0.75 OH Liquid limit-not dried ' !Organic silt - P -- Highly organic soils: Primarily organic matter,dark in color,and organic odor PT 'Peat A Based on the material passing the 3-inch(75-mm)sieve. ! H If fines are organic,add"with organic fines"to group name. a If field sample contained cobbles or boulders,or both,add"with cobbles a If soil contains>_15%gravel, add"with gravel"to group name. or boulders,or both"to group name. =If Atterberg limits plot in shaded area,soil is a CL-ML,silty clay. c Gravels with 5 to 12%fines require dual symbols: GW-GM well-graded 'If soil contains 15 to 29%plus No.200,add"with sand"or"with gravel with silt,GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay,GP-GM poorly gravel,"whichever is predominant. graded gravel with silt,GP-GC poorly graded gravel with clay. o L If soil contains>_30%plus No.200 predominantly sand, add 0 Sands with 5 to 12%fines require dual symbols: SW-SM well-graded "sandy"to group name. sand with silt,SW-SC well-graded sand with clay,SP-SM poorly graded -- o sand with silt,SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay. £If soil contains>_30/o plus No.200, predominantly gravel,add "gravelly"to group name. _ (D30)2 H PI>_4 and plots on or above"A"line. E Cu=D60/Dio Cc= GPI<4 or plots below"A"line. D10 D60 60 s PI plots on or above"A"line. F If soil contains>_15%sand, add"with sand"to group name. a PI plots below"A"line. If fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-GM,or SC-SM. 60 �T For classification of fine-grained 1 ,'` soils and fine-grained fraction I i 50 of coarse-grained soils e, '! Equation of"A"-line <} ,' , la' Horizontal at PI=4 to LL=25.5. I I` x 40 then PI=0.73(LL-20) k' Iw p Equation of"U"-line ,, � Vertical at LL=16 to PI=7, >- 30 — then PI=0.9(LL-8) F,• I , .... I— ,/ L �� i (coAlll #,' H I MI or OH i I I, i 1a , 7 - L - MLorOL l 0 0 10 16 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 LIQUID LIMIT(LL) FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF F.Y. 2021 LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION PROJECT NO. 5623 CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA CONTRACT NO. 983 This contract made and entered into this day of , 20 _, by and between the City of Waterloo, Iowa, a Municipal Corporation, (hereinafter referred to as City), and of , (hereinafter referred to as Contractor), WITNESSETH: PAR. 1 Contractor agrees to build and construct the FY 2021 LEVERSEE ROAD LIFT STATION PROJECT NO. 5623, Contract 983, and furnish all necessary tools, equipment, materials,. and labor necessary to do all the work called for in the plans and specifications in a workmanshiplike manner and for the prices set forth in Contractor's proposal, which was accepted by the City, and which is understood and agreed to be a part of this contract. PAR. 2 It is understood and agreed that the resolution adopted b/ the City Council ordering the construction of the improvement, the Notice to Contractors as published, the Instruction to Bidders, the Form c f Proposal, the Construction and Maintenance Bonds, the Council Proceedings relating to this matter, and the Plans and Specifications shall all )e considered as forming a part of the contract the same as though they were each set out in said contract. PAR. 3 The Contractor agrees to furnish at its own cost and expense, all necessary materials and labor for said work and to construct said improvements in a thorough, substantial, and workmanlike manner, and in strict accordance with the requirements of this contract, and of the plans and specifications made a part hereof by reference, and 'o the satisfaction and approval of the City and its engineer. PAR. 4 The Contractor agrees to perform said work and install said improvements on the terms set out in bid or proposal to the City which has been accepted by the City and which is by reference made a part of this contract. FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT 983 22 - 1 5623 PAR. 5 The Contractor agrees to commence said work within ten (10) working days after receipt of "Notice to Proceed" and complete it on or before unless an extension of time is granted in writing by the Council of the City. PAR. 6 Should the Contractor fail to complete said improvements in strict accordance with the terms and conditions of this contract, or the plans and specifications therefor promptly by the date herein specified, the City may pay such additional sums as it may be required to pay by reason of the failure of said contractor and deduct any and all such sums from any amount then due the Contractor. PAR. 7 The Contractor agrees to comply with and obey all ordinances of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, relating to the obstruction of streets and alleys, keeping open passage ways for water, traffic, and protecting any excavations in any street or alley, and maintaining proper and sufficient barricades with lights and signals during all hours of darkness, to see that the backfilling is properly done, and agrees to keep the City whole and defend any and all suits that may be brought against the City by reason of any injuries that may be sustained by any person or property allegedly caused by the Contractor, or his agents, while work is done pursuant to this agreement. PAR. 8 The Contractor agrees that in the event a law suit is brought against the City for damages allegedly sustained by reason of any act, omission or negligence of the Contractor or its agents, or on account of any injuries �-- allegedly sustained by reason of any obstruction, hole, depression or barrier placed or dug by the defendant or its agents, in the doing of the work herein contracted for, that it will defend said suit and save the City - harmless therein, and in case judgment is rendered against the City, the Contractor agrees to pay the same promptly. The Contractor agrees to carry public liability insurance in a solvent company in a sufficient amount to protect the City and those who use the streets of the City. PAR. 9 The City shall have the right to appoint one or more construction reviewers who shall review the progress of the work in detail; also, to make any test or any material to be used in such work. No material shall be used in any work until the same has first been approved by the construction reviewer. Such construction reviewer shall have full authority to pass judgment upon all materials and upon the manner of doing the work, and their judgment on rejecting any materials, substance, or manner of work shall be final unless it is revoked or modified by the City Engineer. PAR. 10 Any material, which has been rejected by the construction reviewer, shall be at once removed from the line of work and shall not be again taken thereon or placed with the material proposed to be used without the written consent of the City Engineer. FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT 983 22 -2 5623 PAR. 11 The Contractor shall maintain no cause of action against the City on account of delays and prosecution of work, but if said work is delayed by the City, the Contractor shall have such extra time for completion of the job as was lost by reason of the delay caused by the City. PAR. 12 The Contractor agrees to pay punctually all just claims Df labor, material, men, or subcontractors who shall perform labor or furnish materials entering into this improvement. It is agreed that the City need not pay the Contractor until all such claims are paid by the Contractor. It is agreed that the City shall not be liable for said labor, material, or men under this contract. PAR. 13 The Contractor agrees to furnish the City, simultaneously with this contract, a bond on a form to be provided by the City in the amount provided by law as stated in the Notice to Bidders, which shall be for the benefit of the City, and any and all persons injured by the breach of any of the terms of this contract. Said bond shall be filed with the City Clerk and shall be subject to the approval of the City Council, and is by reference made a part of this contract. PAR. 14 The Contractor agrees that should it abandon work under this contract or cease the prosecution thereof for a period of thirty (30) consecutive days without reasonable cause, and should it fail to proceed with said work within ten (10) days after a notice to continue or carry it on has been mailed to it at the address given herein by the City, or after such notice has been served on it, then the City may proceed to complete said work, using any material, tools, or machinery found along said line of work, doing the work either by contract or as it may elect, and the Contractor and the sureties on its bond shall be liable to the City for the costs and expenses so paid out. Said costs shall be retained by the City from any compensation due, or to become due the Contractor, and may be recovered by the City in an action upon Contractor's bond. PAR. 15 In consideration of the full compliance on the part of the Contractor with all the provisions, stipulations, and conditions hereof, or contained in the various instruments made a part of this contract by reference, and upon completion and acceptance of said work, the City agrees to pay to the Contractor, in the manner set out in the Notice to Contractors, the amount of money due the Contractor for work performed and accepted, at the unit prices set out in the Contractor's proposal, which has been accepted by the City. PAR. 16 The total amount of the contract, based on the Engineer's estimates of quantities and the Contractor's unit bid prices, and for which 100% surety bond is required is FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT 983 22 - 3 5623 PAR. 17 After the completion of said work, the Contractor agrees to remove all debris and clean up said streets, and to save the City harmless from any damage allegedly resulting from a failure to clean up and remove the debris or put the street back in a proper condition for travel. PAR. 18 This contract is not divisible, but in the event of a conflict between this contract and the various instruments incorporated by reference, this contract shall govern. PAR. 19 Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this contract, it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond must be approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work. PAR. 20 The Contractor shall maintain all work done hereunder in good order for the period of two (2) years from and after the date it is accepted by the Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. Said maintenance shall be made without expense to the City or the abutting property. In the event of the failure or default of the Contractor to remedy any or all defects appearing in said work within a period of two (2) years from the date of its acceptance by said Council, and after having been given ten (10) days notice so to do by registered letter deposited in the United States Post Office in said town, addressed to said contractor at the address herein given, then the City may proceed to remedy such defects. The costs and expenses thereof to be recovered from the Contractor and the sureties on its maintenance bond by an action brought in any court of competent jurisdiction. PAR. 21 The Contractor shall give notice to said City by registered letter directed to the Mayor or City Clerk/Auditor thereof not more than four (4) and not less than three (3) months prior to the expiration of the term during which the Contractor is required to maintain said improvements, in good repair by the terms of its Contract. The liability of the Contractor and of the sureties on its bond for maintenance of the said improvements shall continue until three (3) months after such notice has been given to the City, and, in any event, until two (2) years after the acceptance of the work. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Mayor -- FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT 983 22 -4 5623 City Clerk Contractor BY: Title: Approved by the City Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, this day of , 2020. ATTEST: , City Clerk Waterloo, Iowa FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT 983 22 - 5 5623 PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, of _ (the "Principal"), and of (the "Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Waterloo, Iowa (the "Obligee"), in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ), lawful money of the United States, for the payment of said sum in connection with a contract (the "Contract") dated on or about for the purpose of . The (:Contract is incorporated herein by reference as though fully set forth herein. Whenever the Principal shall be and is declared by the Obligee to be in def-cult under the Contract, with the Obligee having performed its obligations in the Contract, then the Surety, acknowledging that time is of the essence, may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly undertake to: 1. Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions; or 2. Obtain one or more bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, and upon determination by the Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, or negotiated proposal, or, if the Obligee elects, upon _ determination by the Obligee and the Surety jointly of the lowest responsible bidder, or negotiated proposal, arrange for a contract between such party and the Obligee. The Surety will make available as work progresses sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the Contract price. The cost of completion includes responsibilities of the Principal for correction of defective work and completion of the Contract, the Obligee's legal and design professional costs resulting directly from the Principal's default, and liquidated damages or actual damages if no liquidated damages are specified in the Contract. The term "balance of the _ Contract price" means the total amount payable by the Obligee to the Principal under the Contract and any amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by the Obligee to the Principal; or 3. Determine the amount for which it is liable to the Obligee and pay the Obligee that amount as soon as practicable. In the event this bond is enforced, Principal and Surety agree to indemnify Obligee and hold Obligee harmless from and against any and all costs of enforcement, including but not limited to reasonable attorneys' fees and expenses. _ Every Surety on this bond shall be deemed and held, any contract to the contrary notwithstanding, to consent to each and all of the following matters, without n )tice: PERFORMANCE BOND CONTRACT 983 23 - 1 5623 1. To any extension of time to the Contract in which to perform the Contract. 2. To any change in the plans, specifications, or Contract when such change does not involve an increase of more than twenty percent (20%) of the total Contract price, and shall then be released only as to such excess increase. 3. That no provision of this bond or of any other contract shall be valid which limits to less than one (1) year from the time of the acceptance of the work the right to sue on this bond for defect in workmanship or material not discovered or known to the Obligee at the time such work was accepted. If the Principal performs the Contract, then this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. In no event shall the Surety's total obligation exceed the penal amount of this bond. Terms used herein shall include, as appropriate, the singular or plural number, or the masculine, feminine or neuter gender. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Principal and Surety have executed this Performance Bond as of PRINCIPAL SURETY Name Name �- By: By: Title: Title: [attach Power of Attorney] NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND. If this project includes Federal Fund _ merit bond: IMPORTANT: Surety companies executing bonds must appear on the Treasury Department's most current list (Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact —N business in the State where the project is located. PERFORMANCE BOND CONTRACT 983 23 -2 5623 PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (Name of Contractor) (Address of Contractor) a , hereinafter c 3lIed Principal, (Corporation, Partnership or Individual) and, (Name of Surety) (Address of Surety) hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Name of Owner) (Address of Owner) hereinafter called OWNER, in the penal sum of Dollars,($ ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contract with the OWNER, dated the day of 20 , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of: NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all persons, firms, SUBCONTRACTORS, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the WORK provided for in such contract, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, coal and coke, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed or used in connection with the construction of such WORK, and all insurance premiums on said WORK, and for all labor, performed in such WORK whether by SUBCONTRACTOR or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PAYMENT BOND CONTRACT 983 24 - 1 5623 PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK to be performed thereunder or the SPECIFICATIONS accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this BOND, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK or to the SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS HEREOF, this instrument is executed in counterparts, each one of (number) which shall be deemed an original, this the day of 20 ATTEST: Principal (Principal)Secretary (SEAL) By (s) (Address) Witness as to Principal (Address) Surety ATTEST: By Attorney-in-Fact Witness as to Surety (Address) (Address) NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND. PAYMENT BOND CONTRACT 983 24 - 2 5623 project includes F Funds, the following applies bthe PaYmenl bond: IMPORTANT: Surety companies executing bonds must appear on the Treasury Department's most current list (Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in the State where the project is located. MEMO PAYMENT BOND CONTRACT 983 24 - 3 5623